e497

Pacific Journey is an individual flexible premium deferred variable annuity contract issued by Pacific Life & Annuity Company.

This Prospectus provides information you should know before buying a Contract. It’s accompanied by current Prospectuses for the Funds that provide the underlying Portfolios for the Variable Investment Options offered under the Contract. The Variable Investment Options are funded by Separate Account A of Pacific Life & Annuity Company. Please read both Prospectuses carefully, and keep them for future reference.

Here’s a list of all the Investment Options currently available under your Contract; the Variable Investment Options are listed according to the underlying Funds:

You’ll find more information about the Contract and Separate Account A in the SAI dated May 1, 2008. The SAI has been filed with the SEC and is considered to be part of this Prospectus because it’s incorporated by reference. You’ll find a table of contents for the SAI on page 75 of this Prospectus. You can get a copy of the SAI without charge by calling or writing to Pacific Life & Annuity Company or you can visit our website at www.pacificlifeandannuity.com. You can also visit the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov, which contains the SAI, material incorporated into this Prospectus by reference, and other information about registrants that file electronically with the SEC.

This Contract is not available in all states. This Prospectus is not an offer in any state or jurisdiction where we are not legally permitted to offer the Contract.

The Contract is described in detail in this Prospectus and its Statement of Additional Information (SAI). A Fund is described in its Prospectus and its SAI. No one has the right to describe the Contract or a Fund any differently than they have been described in these documents.

You should be aware that the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) has not reviewed the Contract and does not guarantee that the information in this Prospectus is accurate or complete. It’s a criminal offense to say otherwise.

Pacific Life does not provide legal or tax advice. Any statement contained in this communication is not intended or written to be legal or tax advice, nor may it be used for the purpose of avoiding any tax penalties that may be imposed on the taxpayer. Any taxpayer should seek advice based on the taxpayer’s particular circumstances from an independent tax advisor.

This Contract is not a deposit or obligation of, or guaranteed or endorsed by, any bank. It’s not federally insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC), the Federal Reserve Board, or any other government agency. Investment in a Contract involves risk, including possible loss of principal.

This overview tells you some key things you should know about your Contract. It’s designed as a summary only – please read this Prospectus, your Contract and the Statement of Additional Information (SAI) for more detailed information.

Rules about how annuity contracts are described or administered are reflected in your Contract, in Riders or Endorsements to your Contract. The terms of your Contract and of any Rider or Endorsement, prevail over what’s in this Prospectus.

In this Prospectus, you and your mean the Contract Owner or Policyholder. Pacific Life & Annuity, PL&A, we, us and our refer to Pacific Life & Annuity Company. Pacific Life, PL and administrator means Pacific Life Insurance Company. Contract means a Pacific Journey variable annuity contract, unless we state otherwise.

Some of the Terms used in this Prospectus may be new to you. You will find a glossary of certain terms in the TERMS USED IN THIS PROSPECTUS section.

An annuity contract may be appropriate if you’re looking for retirement income or you want to meet other long-term financial objectives. Discuss with your qualified investment professional whether a variable annuity, optional benefits and underlying Investment Options are appropriate for you, taking into consideration your age, income, net worth, tax status, insurance needs, financial objectives, investment goals, liquidity needs, time horizon, risk tolerance and other relevant information. Together you can decide if a variable annuity is right for you.

This Contract may not be the right one for you if you need to withdraw money for short-term needs, because withdrawal charges and tax penalties for early withdrawal may apply.

You should consider the Contract’s investment and income benefits, as well as its costs.

Pacific Journey is an annuity contract between you and Pacific Life & Annuity Company (PL&A). Annuity contracts have two phases, the accumulation phase and the annuitization (income) phase. The two phases are discussed below.

This Contract is designed for long-term financial planning. It allows you to invest money on a tax-deferred basis for retirement or other goals, and/or to receive income in a variety of ways, including a series of income payments for life or for a specified period of years.

Non-Qualified and Qualified Contracts are available. You buy a Non-Qualified Contract with “after-tax” dollars. You buy a Qualified Contract under a qualified retirement or pension plan, or some form of an individual retirement annuity or account (IRA). It’s important to know that IRAs and qualified plans are already tax-deferred which means the tax deferral feature of a variable annuity does not provide a benefit in addition to that already offered by an IRA or qualified plan. An annuity contract should only be used to fund an IRA or qualified plan to benefit from the annuity’s features other than tax deferral.

Pacific Journey is a variable annuity, which means that the value of your Contract fluctuates depending on the performance of the Investment Options you choose. The Contract allows you to choose how often you make Investments (“Purchase Payments”) and how much you add each time.

During the Free Look period, you have the right to cancel your Contract and return it with instructions to us or to your registered representative for a refund. The amount refunded may be more or less than the Investments you’ve made, depending on the type of Contract you buy. You will find a complete description of the Free Look period that applies to your Contract on the Contract’s cover sheet or notice that accompanies your Contract. The Free Look period ends 10 days after you receive your Contract. If you are replacing another annuity contract or life insurance policy, your Free Look period ends 60 days after you receive your Contract.

You will find more information about the Right to Cancel (“Free Look”) period starting on page

The Investment Options you choose and how they perform will affect the value of your Contract during the accumulation phase, as well as the amount available to annuitize on the Annuity Date.

The accumulation phase begins on your Contract Date and continues until your Annuity Date. During the accumulation phase, you can put money in your Contract by making Investments, and choose Investment Options in which to allocate them. You can also take money out of your Contract by making a withdrawal.

Your initial Investment must be at least $5,000 for a Non-Qualified Contract and at least $2,000 for a Qualified Contract. Additional Investments must be at least $250 for a Non-Qualified Contract and $50 for a Qualified Contract. We also call your Investments “Purchase Payments”.

You will find more information about Making Your Investments (“Purchase Payments”) starting on page

You can ask your registered representative to help you choose the right Investment Options for your goals and risk tolerance. Any financial firm or registered representative you engage to provide advice and/or make transfers for you is not acting on our behalf. We are not responsible for any investment decisions or allocations you make, recommendations such financial representatives make or any allocations or specific transfers they choose to make on your behalf.

You can choose from a variety of Variable Investment Options (also called Subaccounts), each of which invests in a corresponding Portfolio of the Pacific Select Fund, AllianceBernstein Variable Products Series Fund, Inc., BlackRock Variable Series Funds, Inc. or Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust. The value of each Portfolio will fluctuate with the value of the investments it holds, and returns are not guaranteed.

You can also choose any available fixed option that earns a guaranteed rate of interest of at least 3% annually.

We allocate your Investments to the Investment Options you choose. The value of your Contract will fluctuate during the accumulation phase depending on the Investment Options you’ve chosen. You bear the investment risk of any Variable Investment Options you choose.

You will find more information about the Investment Options and the Investment Advisers starting on page 12.

You can transfer among Investment Options any time, subject to certain limitations, until your Annuity Date without paying any current income tax. Transfers are limited to 25 for each calendar year. Only 2 transfers per month may involve the International Value, International Small-Cap, International Large-Cap or Emerging Markets Investment Options. In addition, only 2 transfers into or out of the American Funds Growth or American Funds Growth-Income Investment Options may occur in any calendar month. If you have used all 25 transfers in a calendar year, you may make one additional transfer of all or a portion of your Variable Account Value to the Money Market Investment Option before the start of the next calendar year. You can also make systematic transfers by enrolling in our dollar cost averaging, portfolio rebalancing or earnings sweep programs. Transfers made under these systematic transfer programs or under an asset allocation program established and maintained by us are excluded from the limitation. Some restrictions may apply to transfers to or from any fixed option.

You will find more information about transfers and transfer limitations starting on page 21.

You can make full and partial withdrawals to supplement your income or for other purposes. You can withdraw a certain amount each year without paying a withdrawal charge, but any amount withdrawn in excess of this amount may incur a withdrawal charge on Investments that are less than 7 years old. Some restrictions may apply to making partial withdrawals from any fixed option.

In general, you may have to pay income taxes on withdrawals or other distributions from your Contract. If you’re under age 59 1/2, a 10% federal tax penalty may also apply to taxable withdrawals.

The income phase of your Contract begins on your Annuity Date. Generally, you can choose to surrender your Contract and receive a single payment or you can annuitize your Contract and receive a series of income payments over a fixed period or for life.

You can choose fixed or variable annuity payments, or a combination of both. You can choose monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual payments. We’ll make the income payments to your designated payee. The Owner is responsible for any tax consequences of any annuity payments.

If you choose variable annuity payments, the amount of the payments will fluctuate depending on the performance of the Variable Investment Options you choose. After your Annuity Date, if you choose variable annuity payments, you can exchange your Subaccount Annuity Units among the Variable Investment Options up to 4 times in any 12-month period.

You will find more information about annuitization starting on page 27 and annuity options available under the Contract starting on page 28.

Generally, the Contract provides a death benefit upon the first death of an Owner or the death of the sole surviving Annuitant, whichever occurs first, during the accumulation phase. Death benefit proceeds are payable when we receive proof of death and payment instructions in proper form. To whom we pay a death benefit, and how we calculate the amount of the death benefit depends on who dies first and the type of Contract you own.

Optional Riders are subject to availability. Before purchasing any optional Rider, make sure you understand all of the terms and conditions and consult with a qualified professional for advice on whether an optional Rider is appropriate for you. We reserve the right to restrict the purchase of an optional living benefit Rider to only Contract issue in the future.

This optional Rider offers you the ability to lock in market gains for your beneficiaries with a stepped-up death benefit, which is the highest Contract Value on any previous Contract Anniversary (prior to the Annuitant’s 81^st birthday) adjusted for additional Purchase Payments and withdrawals. You can only buy the SDBR when you buy your Contract.

You may purchase an optional Rider on the Contract Date or on any Contract Anniversary (if available). In addition, if you purchase a Rider within 60 days after the Contract Date or, if available, within 60 days after any Contract Anniversary, the Rider Effective Date will be that Contract Date or Contract Anniversary.

At initial purchase and during the entire time that you own an optional living benefit Rider, you must invest your entire Contract Value in an asset allocation program or in Investment Options we make available for these Riders. See the OTHER OPTIONAL RIDERS— General Information— Investment Allocation Requirements section in this Prospectus.

Some optional riders allow for owner elected Resets/Step-Ups. If you elect to Reset/Step-Up, your election must be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within 60 days after the Contract Anniversary (“60 day period”) on which the Reset/Step-Up is effective. We may, at our sole discretion, allow Resets/Step-Ups after the 60 day period. We reserve the right to refuse a Reset/Step-Up request after the 60 day period regardless of whether we may have allowed you or others to Reset/Step-Up in the past. Each Contract Anniversary starts a new 60 day period in which a Reset/Step-Up may be elected.

There may be adverse consequences to taking a loan while an optional Rider is in effect. If you have an existing loan on your Contract, you should carefully consider whether an optional Rider is appropriate for you.

This optional Rider lets you, before the Annuity Date, withdraw up to 5% of your Protected Payment Base per year, lock in market gains, and provides the potential to receive 5% of a Protected Payment Base for life. This Rider also provides an Annual Credit of 10% added to your Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance for up to a 10 year period (provided you do not take any withdrawals and your Remaining Protected Balance is less than your Maximum Credit Base) which can increase the amount you may withdraw in future years. The Annual Credit is not added to your Contract Value. If your total withdrawals in a Contract Year exceed the annual withdrawal amount allowed under the Rider, then the Protected Payment Base may decrease and the amount you may withdraw in the future under the Rider may be reduced.

Beginning with the first (1^st) anniversary of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, the Rider provides for Automatic Resets or Owner-Elected Resets of the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value. Any reset may include an increase in the annual charge percentage (up to a maximum of 1.50%) associated with the Rider. (Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance, Annual Credit, Maximum Credit Base, Automatic Reset, Owner-Elected Reset and Reset Date are described in the OTHER OPTIONAL RIDERS—Foundation 10 Rider section in this Prospectus.)

This Rider is called the Guaranteed Withdrawal Benefit II Rider in the Contract’s Rider.

This optional Rider lets you, before the Annuity Date, withdraw up to 5% of your Protected Payment Base per year, lock in market gains, and provides the potential to receive 5% of a Protected Payment Base for life. This Rider also provides an Annual Credit of 6% to your Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance, for up to a ten (10) year period (provided you do not take any withdrawals during this period), which can increase the amount you may withdraw in future years. The Annual Credit is not added to your Contract Value. If your total withdrawals in a Contract Year exceed the annual withdrawal amount allowed under the Rider, then the Protected Payment Base may decrease and the amount you may withdraw in the future under the Rider may be reduced.

Beginning with the first (1st) anniversary of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, the Rider provides for Automatic Resets or Owner-Elected Resets of the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value. Any reset may include an increase in the annual charge percentage (up to a maximum of 1.20%) associated with the Rider. (Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance, Annual Credit, Automatic Reset, Owner-Elected Reset and Reset Date are described in the OTHER OPTIONAL RIDERS—Flexible Lifetime Income Rider (Single) section of this Prospectus.)

This Rider is called the 5% Guaranteed Withdrawal Benefit Rider in the Contract’s Rider.

You will find more information about the Flexible Lifetime Income Rider (Single) starting on page 37.

This optional Rider lets you, before the Annuity Date, withdraw up to 5% of your Protected Payment Base per year, lock in market gains, and provides the potential to receive up to the Protected Payment Amount, regardless of market performance, until the death of all Designated Lives eligible for lifetime benefits. This Rider also provides an Annual Credit of 6% to your Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance, for up to a 10 year period (provided you do not take any withdrawals during this period), which can increase the amount you may withdraw in future years. The Annual Credit is not added to your Contract Value. If your total withdrawals in a Contract Year exceed the annual withdrawal amount allowed under the Rider, then the Protected Payment Base may decrease and the amount you may withdraw in the future under the Rider may be reduced.

maximum of 1.20%) associated with the Rider. (Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance, Designated Lives, Annual Credit, Automatic Reset, Owner-Elected Reset and Reset Date are described in the OTHER OPTIONAL RIDERS— Flexible Lifetime Income Rider (Joint) section in this Prospectus.)

Changes to the Contract Owner, Annuitant and/or Beneficiary designations and changes in marital status may adversely affect the benefits of this Rider (see the Flexible Lifetime Income Rider (Joint)— Ownership and Beneficiary Changes section in this Prospectus.

This Rider is called the Joint Life 5% Guaranteed Withdrawal Benefit Rider in the Contract’s Rider.

You will find more information about the Flexible Lifetime Income Rider (Joint) starting on page 42.

This optional Rider allows for an additional amount that may be added to your Contract Value at the end of a 10-year period (the “Term”). The Rider also provides for an additional option (the “Step-Up”) on any Contract Anniversary beginning with the 3rd anniversary of the Rider Effective Date and before the Annuity Date. If the Step-Up is elected, your 10-year Term would begin again as of the effective date of the Step-Up election, and may include an increase in the annual charge percentage (up to a maximum of 1.00%) associated with the Rider.

This optional Rider allows for an additional amount that may be added to your Contract Value at the end of a 10-year period (the “Term”). The Rider also provides for an additional option (the “Step-Up”) on any Contract Anniversary beginning with the 5^th anniversary of the Effective Date of the Rider and before the Annuity Date. If the Step-Up is elected, your 10-year Term would begin again as of the effective date of the Step-Up election, and may include an increase in the annual charge percentage (up to a maximum of 0.75%) associated with the Rider.

The optional Rider offers a guaranteed income annuity option, a minimum fixed income payout, the ability to lock in market gains, and withdraw money each year.

The GIA Plus Rider is called the Guaranteed Income Annuity (GIA) Rider in the Contract’s Rider.

This section of the overview explains the fees and expenses associated with your Pacific Journey Contract.

The following describes the transaction fees and expenses that you will pay when owning your Contract. Expenses are fixed under the terms of your Contract. Premium taxes and/or other taxes may also apply to your Contract. We generally charge premium taxes and/or other taxes when you annuitize your Contract, but there are other times when we charge them to your Contract instead. Please see your Contract for details.

The following describes the fees and expenses that you will pay periodically during the time you own your Contract not including Portfolio fees and expenses.


	Separate Account A Annual Expenses (as a percentage of the average daily Account Value³) (See TERMS USED IN THIS PROSPECTUS on page 73):


	Optional Rider⁷ Annual Expenses (calculated as a percentage of Contract Value³ except for the Foundation 10, Flexible Lifetime Income (Single and Joint), GPA 3 and GIA Plus Riders) (See TERMS USED IN THIS PROSPECTUS on page 73):

You will find more about the underlying Funds starting on page 12, and in each underlying Fund Prospectus which accompanies this Prospectus.

This table shows the minimum and maximum total annual operating expenses paid by the Portfolios that you indirectly pay during the time you own the Contract. This table shows the range (minimum and maximum) of fees and expenses paid by any of the Portfolios, expressed as an annual percentage of average daily net assets. The amounts are based on expenses paid in the year ended December 31, 2007, adjusted to reflect anticipated changes in fees and expenses, or, for new Portfolios, are based on estimates for the current fiscal year.

Each Variable Account of the Separate Account purchases shares of the corresponding Funds’ Portfolio at net asset value. The net asset value reflects the investment advisory fees and other expenses that are deducted from the assets of the Portfolio. The advisory fees and other expenses are not fixed or specified under the terms of the Contract, and they may vary from year to year. These fees and expenses are described in each Fund Prospectus.

The following examples are intended to help you compare the cost of investing in your Contract with the cost of investing in other variable annuity contracts. The maximum amounts reflected below include the maximum periodic Contract expenses, Separate Account annual expenses and the Portfolio with the highest fees and expenses for the year ended December 31, 2007. The maximum amounts also include the combination of optional Riders whose cumulative maximum charge expenses totaled more than any other optional Rider combination. The optional Riders included are the SDBR, Foundation 10, GPA 3 and GIA Plus Riders. The minimum amounts reflected below include the minimum periodic Contract expenses, Separate Account annual expenses and the Portfolio with the lowest fees and expenses for the year ended December 31, 2007. The minimum amounts do not include any optional Riders.

The examples assume that you invest $10,000 in the Contract for the time periods indicated. They also assume that your Investment has a 5% return each year and assumes the maximum and minimum fees and expenses of all of the Investment Options available. Although your actual costs may be higher or lower, based on these assumptions, your maximum and minimum costs would be:

You may choose among the different Variable Investment Options and the DCA Plus Fixed Option.

Each Variable Investment Option invests in a separate Portfolio of a Fund. For your convenience, the following chart summarizes some basic data about each Portfolio. This chart is only a summary. For more complete information on each Portfolio, including a discussion of the Portfolio’s investment techniques and the risks associated with its investments, see the applicable Fund Prospectus. No assurance can be given that a Portfolio will achieve its investment objective. YOU SHOULD READ EACH FUND PROSPECTUS CAREFULLY BEFORE INVESTING.

Pacific Life Fund Advisors LLC (PLFA) is the investment adviser for the Pacific Select Fund. PLFA and the Pacific Select Fund’s Board of Trustees oversee the management of all the Pacific Select Fund’s portfolios. PLFA, a subsidiary of Pacific Life Insurance Company, also does business under the name “Pacific Asset Management” (PAM) and manages the Pacific Select Fund’s Money Market and High Yield Bond portfolios under the PAM name.

AllianceBernstein L.P. is the investment adviser for the AllianceBernstein Variable Products Series Fund, Inc.

BlackRock Advisors, LLC is the investment adviser for the BlackRock Variable Series Funds, Inc. and has retained various sub-advisors for its portfolios.

Franklin Templeton Services, LLC is the fund administrator for the Franklin Templeton VIP Founding Funds Allocation Fund of the Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust.

The fixed option offers you a guaranteed minimum interest rate on amounts that you allocate to this option. Amounts you allocate to this option, and your earnings credited are held in our General Account. For more detailed information about this option, see THE GENERAL ACCOUNT section in this Prospectus.

To purchase a Contract, you must work with your registered representative to fill out an application and submit it along with your initial Investment to Pacific Life & Annuity Company at P.O. Box 2736, Omaha, Nebraska 68103-2736. Your registered representative’s broker-dealer firm has up to 7 business days to review and approve your application before the application is sent to us. In those instances when we receive electronic transmission of the information on the application from your representative’s broker-dealer firm and our administrative procedures with your broker-dealer so provide, we consider the application to be received on the Business Day we receive the transmission. If the address on your Contract specification pages is different and our administrative procedures with your broker-dealer so provide, in those instances when information regarding your Investment is electronically transmitted to us by the broker-dealer, we will consider the Investment to be received by us on the Business Day we receive the transmission of the information. If your application and Investment are complete when received, or once they have become complete, we will issue your Contract within 2 Business Days. If some information is missing from your application, we may delay issuing your Contract while we obtain the missing information. However, we will not hold your initial Investment for more than 5 Business Days without your permission. In any case, we will not hold your initial Investment after 20 Business Days.

You may also purchase a Contract by exchanging your existing annuity. You must submit all contracts to be exchanged when you submit your application. Call your registered representative, or call us at 1-800-748-6907, if you are interested in this option.

We reserve the right to reject any application or Investment for any reason, subject to any applicable nondiscrimination laws and to our own standards and guidelines. On your application, you must provide us with a valid U.S. tax identification number for federal and state tax reporting purposes.

The maximum age of a Contract Owner/Annuitant, including Joint and Contingent Owners/Annuitants, for which a Contract will be issued is 85. The Contract Owner’s age is calculated as of his or her last birthday. If any Contract Owner or any sole Annuitant named in the application for a Contract dies and we are notified of the death before we issue the Contract, then we will return the amount we received. If we are not notified of the death and we issue the Contract, then the application for the Contract and/or any Contract issued will be deemed cancelled and a refund will be issued. The amount of the refund may be more or less than the initial Investment received, or any other Investment we received in connection with an exchange or transfer. The refund will be the Contract Value based upon the next determined Accumulated Unit Value (AUV) after we receive proof of death, in proper form, of the Contract Owner or Annuitant, plus a refund of any amount used to pay premium taxes and/or any other taxes. If there are Joint Owners named on the Contract, the Contract will be owned as Joint Tenants with Right of Survivorship and not as Tenants in Common. Any refund may subject the refunded assets to probate.

Your initial Investment must be at least $5,000 if you are buying a Non-Qualified Contract, and at least $2,000 if you are buying a Qualified Contract. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum initial Investment on Qualified Contracts but we reserve the right to enforce the minimum initial Investment on Qualified Contracts in the future. For Non-Qualified Contracts, if the entire minimum initial Investment is not included when you submit your application, you must submit a portion of the required Contract minimum and/or establish a pre-authorized checking plan (PAC). A PAC allows you to pay the remainder of the required initial Investment in equal installments over the first year. Further requirements for PAC are discussed in the PAC form. We also call each Investment you make a Purchase Payment.

You must obtain our consent before making an initial or additional Investment that will bring your aggregate Investments over $1,000,000.

If your Contract is Non-Qualified, you may choose to invest additional amounts in your Contract at any time. If your Contract is Qualified, the method of contribution and contribution limits may be restricted by the Qualified Plan or the Internal Revenue Code (“the Code”). Each additional Investment must be at least $250 for Non-Qualified Contracts and $50 for Qualified Contracts. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum additional Investment amounts but we reserve the right to enforce the minimum additional Investment amounts in the future.

Your initial and additional Investments may be sent by personal or bank check or by wire transfer. Investments must be made in a form acceptable to us before we can process it. Acceptable forms of Investments are:


	•	personal checks or cashier’s checks drawn on a U.S. bank,

	•	money orders and traveler’s checks in single denominations of more than $10,000 if they originate in a U.S. bank,


	•	third party payments when there is a clear connection of the third party to the underlying transaction, and


	•	wire transfers that originate in U.S. banks.


	•	cash,

	•	credit cards or checks drawn against a credit card account,

	•	money orders or traveler’s checks in single denominations of $10,000 or less,

	•	cashier’s checks, money orders, traveler’s checks or personal checks drawn on non-U.S. banks, even if the payment may be effected through a U.S. bank,


	•	third party payments if there is not a clear connection of the third party to the underlying transaction, and


	•	wire transfers that originate from foreign bank accounts.

All unacceptable forms of Investments will be returned to the payor along with a letter of explanation. We reserve the right to reject or accept any form of payment. If you make Investments by check other than a cashier’s check, your payment of any withdrawal proceeds and any refund during the “Right to Cancel” period may be delayed until we receive confirmation in our Annuities administrative office that your check has cleared.

You may allocate your Investments among any of the available Investment Options. Allocations of your initial Investment to the Investment Options you selected will be effective on your Contract Date. Each additional Investment will be allocated to the Investment Options according to your allocation instructions in your application, or most recent instructions, if any, subject to the terms described in the WITHDRAWALS— Right to Cancel (“Free Look”) section in this Prospectus. We reserve the right

to require that your allocation to any particular Investment Option must be at least $500. We also reserve the right to transfer any remaining Account Value that is not at least $500 to your other Investment Options on a pro rata basis relative to your most recent allocation instructions.

If your Contract is issued in exchange for another annuity contract or a life insurance policy, our administrative procedures may vary.

The Service. Portfolio Optimization is an asset allocation service that is offered at no additional charge for use within this variable annuity. Asset allocation refers to the manner that investments are distributed among asset classes to help attain an investment goal. For your variable annuity, Portfolio Optimization can help with decisions about how you should allocate your Contract Value among available Investment Options. The theory behind Portfolio Optimization is that diversification among asset classes can help reduce volatility over the long term.

As part of the Portfolio Optimization service, several asset allocation models have been developed (“Portfolio Optimization Models” or “Models”), each based on different profiles of an investor’s willingness to accept investment risk. If you decide to subscribe to the Portfolio Optimization service and select one of the Portfolio Optimization Models, your initial Purchase Payment (in the case of a new application) or Contract Value, as applicable, will be allocated to the Investment Options according to the Model you select. Subsequent Purchase Payments, if allowed under your Contract, will also be allocated accordingly, unless you instruct us otherwise. If you choose, you can rebalance your Contract Value quarterly, semi-annually, or annually, to maintain the current allocations of your Portfolio Optimization Model, since changes in the net asset values of the underlying Portfolios within each Model will alter your asset allocation over time. If you also allocate part of your Purchase Payment or Contract Value that is not currently included in your Model and you elect periodic rebalancing, such amounts will not be considered when rebalancing. If you subscribe to Portfolio Optimization and elect periodic rebalancing, only the Investment Options within your Model will be rebalanced.

If you subscribe to Portfolio Optimization, Pacific Life Fund Advisors LLC (Adviser), an affiliate of PL&A, will serve as your investment adviser for the service solely for purposes of development of the Portfolio Optimization Models and periodic updates of the Models.

On a periodic basis (typically annually), the Portfolio Optimization Models are evaluated and the Models are updated, as discussed below. If you subscribe to Portfolio Optimization, your Contract Value or subsequent Purchase Payments, as applicable, will automatically be reallocated in accordance with the Model you select as it is updated from time to time based on discretionary authority that you grant to the Adviser, unless you instruct otherwise. For more information on the role of the investment adviser for the Portfolio Optimization service, please see the brochure from the Adviser’s Form ADV, the SEC investment adviser registration form, which will be delivered to Contract Owners at the time they apply for a Contract. Please contact us if you would like to receive a copy of this brochure. In developing and periodically updating the Portfolio Optimization Models, the Adviser currently relies on the recommendations of an independent third-party analytical firm. The Adviser may change the firm that it uses from time to time, or, to the extent permissible under applicable law, use no independent firm at all.

The Portfolio Optimization Models. Five asset allocation models are offered, each comprised of a carefully selected combination of Investment Options (reflecting the underlying Portfolios of Pacific Select Fund). Development of the Portfolio Optimization models is a multi-step process. First, an optimization analysis is performed to determine the breakdown of asset classes. Optimization analysis requires forecasting returns, standard deviations and correlation coefficients of asset classes over the desired investing horizon and an analysis using a state-of-the art program and a statistical analytical technique known as “mean-variance optimization”. Next, after the asset class exposures are known, a determination is made of how available Investment Options (underlying Portfolios) can be used to implement the asset class level allocations. The Investment Options are selected by evaluating the asset classes represented by the underlying Portfolios and combining Investment Options to arrive at the desired asset class exposures. The Portfolio-specific analysis uses historical returns-based style analysis and asset performance and regression and attribution analyses. It may also include portfolio manager interviews. Based on this analysis, Investment Options are selected in a way intended to optimize potential returns for each Model, given a particular level of risk tolerance. This process could, in some cases, result in the inclusion of an Investment Option in a Model based on its specific asset class exposure or other specific optimization factors, even where another Investment Option may have better historical performance.

Periodic Updates of the Portfolio Optimization Model and Notices of Updates. Each of the Portfolio Optimization Models are evaluated periodically (generally, annually) to assess whether the combination of Investment Options within each Model should

be changed to better seek to optimize the potential return for the level of risk tolerance intended for the Model. As a result of the periodic analysis, each Model may change and Investment Options may be added to a Model (including Investment Options not currently available), or Investment Options may be deleted from a Model.

When your Portfolio Optimization Model is updated, your Contract Value (and Subsequent Purchase Payments, if applicable) will automatically be reallocated in accordance with any changes to the Model you have selected. This means the allocation of your Contract Value, and potentially the Investment Options in which you are invested, will automatically change and your Contract Value (and Subsequent Purchase Payments, if applicable) will automatically be reallocated among the Investment Options in your updated Model (independently of any automatic rebalancing you may have selected). The Adviser requires that you grant it discretionary investment authority to periodically reallocate your Contract Value (and Subsequent Purchase Payments, if applicable) in accordance with the updated version of the Portfolio Optimization Model you have selected, if you wish to participate in Portfolio Optimization.

When the Adviser updates the Portfolio Optimizations Models, a written notice of the updated Models will be sent to participants at least 30 days in advance of the date the Adviser intends the updated version of the Model to be effective. You should carefully review these notices. If you wish to accept the changes in your selected Model, you will not need to take any action, as your Contract Value (or Subsequent Purchase Payments, if applicable) will automatically be reallocated in accordance with the updated Model. If you do not wish to accept the changes to your selected Model, you can change to a different Model or withdraw from the Portfolio Optimization service. Some of the riders available under the Contract may require you to participate in an asset allocation service. If you purchased any of these riders, such riders may terminate if you withdraw from the Portfolio Optimization service or allocate any portion of your subsequent Purchase Payments or Contract Value to an Investment Option that is not currently included in your Model (as more fully described in each rider).

Selecting a Portfolio Optimization Model. If you choose to subscribe to the Portfolio Optimization service, you need to determine which Portfolio Optimization Model is best for you. Neither the Adviser nor its affiliates will make this decision. You should consult with your registered representative on this decision. Your registered representative can help you determine which Model is best suited to your financial needs, investment time horizon, and willingness to accept investment risk. You should periodically review these factors with your registered representative to determine if you should change Models to keep up with changes in your personal circumstances. Your registered representative can assist you in completing the proper forms to subscribe to the Portfolio Optimization service or to change to a different Model. You may, in consultation with your registered representative, utilize analytical tools made available by the Adviser, including an investor profile questionnaire, which asks questions intended to help you or your registered representative assess your financial needs, investment time horizon, and willingness to accept investment risk. Your responses can be analyzed using the service available on our website. While the information from our website may assist you, it is your decision, in consultation with your registered representative, to select a Model or to change to a different Model, and the Adviser and its affiliates bear no responsibility for this decision. You may change to a different Model at any time, subject to transfer and market timing restrictions, with a proper written request or by telephone or electronic instructions provided a valid telephone/electronic authorization is on file with us.

Periodic Reports. Participants in the Portfolio Optimization service will periodically be sent performance information regarding the Investment Options within a selected Model. This information may also be accessed online. Information concerning the current Models is described below.

Risks. Although the Models are designed to optimize returns given the various levels of risk, there is no assurance that a Model portfolio will not lose money or that investment results will not experience volatility. Investment performance of your Contract Value could be better or worse by participating in a Portfolio Optimization Model than if you had not participated. A Model may perform better or worse than any single Investment Option or asset class or other combinations of Investment Options or asset classes. Model performance is dependent upon the performance of the component Investment Options (and their underlying Portfolios). The timing of your investment and the frequency of automatic rebalancing may affect performance. Your Contract Value will fluctuate, and when redeemed, may be worth more or less than the original cost.

A Portfolio Optimization Model may not perform as intended. Although the Models are intended to optimize returns given various levels of risk tolerance, portfolio, market and asset class performance may differ in the future from the historical performance and assumptions upon which the Models are based, which could cause the Models to be ineffective or less effective in reducing volatility.

Periodic updating of the Portfolio Optimization Models can cause the underlying Portfolios to incur transactional expenses to raise cash for money flowing out of the Portfolios or to buy securities with money flowing into the Portfolios. These expenses can adversely affect performance of the pertinent Portfolios and the Models.

The Adviser may be subject to competing interests that have the potential to influence its decision making with regard to Portfolio Optimization. For example, one Portfolio may provide a higher advisory fee to the Adviser than another Portfolio, and provide the Adviser with incentive to use the Portfolio with the higher fee as part of a Portfolio Optimization Model. In addition, the Adviser may believe that certain Portfolios may benefit from additional assets or could be harmed by redemptions. As adviser to Pacific Select Fund, the Adviser monitors the Portfolios, and may, from time to time, recommend to the Pacific Select Fund’s Board of Trustees a change in portfolio management firm or strategy or the closure or merger of a Portfolio, all of which could impact a Model. All Pacific Select Fund Portfolios, except those expected to be liquidated or merged, are analyzed by the independent third party analytical firm. The third party analytical firm determines the number of Portfolios in a Model, the percent that any Portfolio represents in a Model, and which Portfolios may be selected. The Adviser will work with the analytical firm to resolve any investment related matters derived from the analytical firm’s recommendations. The Adviser believes that its reliance on the recommendations of an independent third-party analytical firm to develop and update the Models (as described above) reduces or eliminates the potential for the Adviser to be influenced by these competing interests, but there can be no assurance of this.

The Adviser and its affiliates are under no contractual obligation to continue this service and have the right to terminate or change the Portfolio Optimization service at any time.

The Models. Information concerning the Portfolio Optimization Models is described below. These Models are available effective May 2, 2008. For information regarding the Portfolio Optimization Models available until May 2, 2008, see APPENDIX F in this Prospectus. You should review this information carefully with your registered representative before selecting or changing a Model.

Each time you allocate your Investment to a Variable Investment Option, your Contract is credited with a number of “Subaccount Units” in that Subaccount. The number of Subaccount Units credited is equal to the amount you have allocated to that Subaccount, divided by the “Unit Value” of one Unit of that Subaccount.


	Example: You allocate $600 to the Inflation Managed Subaccount. At the end of the Business Day on which your allocation is effective, the value of one Unit in the Inflation Managed Subaccount is $15. As a result, 40 Subaccount Units are credited to your Contract for your $600 ($600/$15 = 40).

After we credit your Contract with Subaccount Units, the value of those Units will usually fluctuate. This means that, from time to time, your Investment allocated to the Variable Investment Options may be worth more or less than the original Investments to which those amounts can be attributed. Fluctuations in Subaccount Unit Value will not change the number of Units credited to your Contract.

Subaccount Unit Values will vary in accordance with the investment performance of the corresponding Portfolio. For example, the value of Units in the Managed Bond Subaccount will change to reflect the performance of the Managed Bond Portfolio (including that Portfolio’s investment income, its capital gains and losses, and its expenses). Subaccount Unit Values are also adjusted to reflect the Administrative Fee and applicable Risk Charge imposed on the Separate Account.

We calculate the Unit Value of the Subaccount Units in each Variable Investment Option at the close of the New York Stock Exchange which usually closes at 4:00 p.m. Eastern Time on each Business Day. At the end of each Business Day, the Unit Value for a Subaccount is equal to:

The “Net Investment Factor” for a Subaccount for any valuation period is equal to:

Your initial Investment is effective on the day we issue your Contract. Any additional Investment is effective on the day we receive it in proper form. See the ADDITIONAL INFORMATION— Inquiries and Submitting Forms and Requests section in this Prospectus.

The day your Investment is effective determines the Unit Value at which Subaccount Units are attributed to your Contract. In the case of transfers or withdrawals, the effective day determines the Unit Value at which affected Subaccount Units are debited and/or credited under your Contract. That Unit Value is the value of the Subaccount Units next calculated after your transaction is effective. Your Variable Account Value begins to reflect the investment performance results of your new allocations on the day after your transaction is effective.

Transfers are allowed 30 days after the Contract Date. Currently, we are not enforcing this restriction but we reserve the right to enforce it in the future. Once your Investments are allocated to the Investment Options you selected, you may transfer your Account Value less Loan Account Value from any Investment Option to any other Investment Option, except the DCA Plus Fixed Option. Transfers are limited to 25 for each calendar year. Only 2 transfers in any calendar month may involve any of the following Investment Options: International Value, International Small-Cap, International Large-Cap, or Emerging Markets. In addition, only 2 transfers into or out of the American Funds Growth or American Funds Growth-Income Investment Options may occur in any calendar month.

Transfers to or from a Variable Investment Option cannot be made before the seventh calendar day following the last transfer to or from the same Variable Investment Option. If the seventh calendar day is not a Business Day, then a transfer may not occur until the next Business Day. The day of the last transfer is not considered a calendar day for purposes of meeting this requirement. For example, if you make a transfer into the Diversified Research Variable Investment Option on Monday, you may not make any transfers to or from that Variable Investment Option before the following Monday. Transfers to or from the Money Market Variable Investment Option are excluded from this limitation.

For the purpose of applying the limitations, multiple transfers that occur on the same day are considered 1 transfer. A transfer of Account Value from the Loan Account back into your Investment Options following a loan repayment is not considered a transfer under these limitations. Transfers that occur as a result of the DCA Plus program, the dollar cost averaging program, the portfolio rebalancing program, the earnings sweep program, approved corporate owned life insurance policy rebalancing programs or an approved asset allocation service are excluded from these limitations. Also, allocations of Purchase Payments are not subject to these limitations.

If you have used all 25 transfers available to you in a calendar year, you may no longer make transfers between the Investment Options until the start of the next calendar year. However, you may make 1 transfer of all or a portion of the Account Value remaining in the Variable Investment Options into the Money Market Investment Option prior to the start of the next calendar year.

There are no exceptions to the above transfer limitations in the absence of an error by us, a substitution of Investment Options, or reorganization of underlying Portfolios, or other extraordinary circumstances.

If we deny a transfer request, we will notify your registered representative via telephone. If you (or your registered representative) request a transfer via telephone that exceeds the above limitations, we will notify you (or your registered representative) immediately.

Certain restrictions apply to any available fixed option. See THE GENERAL ACCOUNT section in this Prospectus. Transfer requests are generally effective on the Business Day we receive them in proper form, unless you request a date in the future or a systematic transfer program.

We have the right, at our option (unless otherwise required by law), to require certain minimums in the future in connection with transfers. These may include a minimum transfer amount and a minimum Account Value, if any, for the Investment Option from which the transfer is made or to which the transfer is made. If your transfer request results in your having a remaining Account Value in an Investment Option that is less than $500 immediately after such transfer, we may transfer that Account Value to your other Investment Options on a pro rata basis, relative to your most recent allocation instructions.

We reserve the right (unless otherwise required by law) to limit the size of transfers, to restrict transfers, to require that you submit any transfer requests in writing, to suspend transfers, and to impose further limits on the number and frequency of

transfers you can make. We also reserve the right to reject any transfer request. Any policy we may establish with regard to the exercise of any of these rights will be applied uniformly to all Contract Owners.

The Contract is not designed to serve as a vehicle for frequent trading in response to short-term fluctuations in the market. Accordingly, organizations or individuals that use market-timing investment strategies and make frequent transfers should not purchase the Contract. Such frequent trading can disrupt management of the underlying Portfolios and raise expenses. The transfer limitations set forth above are intended to reduce frequent trading. In addition, we monitor certain large transaction activity in an attempt to detect trading that may be disruptive to the Portfolios. In the event transfer activity is found to be disruptive, certain future transactions by such Contract Owners, or by a registered representative or other party acting on behalf of one or more Contract Owners, will require preclearance. Frequent trading and large transactions that are disruptive to portfolio management can have an adverse effect on Portfolio performance and therefore your Contract’s performance. Such trading may also cause dilution in the value of the Investment Options held by long-term Contract Owners. While these issues can occur in connection with any of the underlying Portfolios, Portfolios holding securities that are subject to market pricing inefficiencies are more susceptible to abuse. For example, Portfolios holding international securities may be more susceptible to time-zone arbitrage which seeks to take advantage of pricing discrepancies occurring between the time of the closing of the market on which the security is traded and the time of pricing of the Portfolios.

Our policies and procedures which limit the number and frequency of transfers and which may impose preclearance requirements on certain large transactions are applied uniformly to all Contract Owners. However, there is a risk that these policies and procedures will not detect all potentially disruptive activity or will otherwise prove ineffective in whole or in part. Further, we and our affiliates make available to our variable annuity and variable life insurance Contract Owners underlying funds not affiliated with us. We are unable to monitor or restrict the trading activity with respect to shares of such funds not sold in connection with our Contracts. In the event the Board of Trustees/Directors of any underlying fund imposes a redemption fee or trading (transfer) limitations, we will pass them on to you.

We reserve the right to restrict, in our sole discretion and without prior notice, transfers initiated by a market timing organization or individual or other party authorized to give transfer instructions on behalf of multiple Contract Owners. Such restrictions could include:


	•	not accepting transfer instructions from a registered representative acting on behalf of more than one Contract Owner, and

	•	not accepting preauthorized transfer forms from market timers or other entities acting on behalf of more than one Contract Owner at a time.

We further reserve the right to impose, without prior notice, restrictions on transfers that we determine, in our sole discretion, will disadvantage or potentially hurt the rights or interests of other Contract Owners; or to comply with any applicable federal and state laws, rules and regulations.

Exchanges of Annuity Units in any Subaccount(s) to any other Subaccount(s) after the Annuity Date are limited to 4 in any 12-month period. See THE GENERAL ACCOUNT section in the Prospectus and THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT section in the SAI.

We offer 4 systematic transfer options: dollar cost averaging, DCA Plus, portfolio rebalancing, and earnings sweep. There is no charge for these options and transfers under these options are not counted towards your total transfers in a Calendar Year. However, they are subject to the same requirements and restrictions as non-systematic transfers. You can have only one DCA Plus, dollar cost averaging, or earnings sweep program in effect at one time. The systematic transfer options are not available after you annuitize.

Dollar cost averaging is a method in which you buy securities in a series of regular purchases instead of in a single purchase. This allows you to average the securities’ prices over time, and may permit a “smoothing” of abrupt peaks and drops in price. Prior to your Annuity Date, you may use dollar cost averaging to transfer amounts, over time, from any Investment Option

with an Account Value of at least $5,000 to one or more Variable Investment Options. Each transfer must be for at least $250. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum Account Value and/or transfer amounts but we reserve the right to enforce such minimum amounts in the future. Detailed information appears in the SAI.

DCA Plus provides a way to transfer amounts monthly from the DCA Plus Fixed Option to one or more Variable Investment Option(s) over a period of up to one year. The initial minimum amount that you may allocate to the DCA Plus Fixed Option is $5,000. The minimum amount for the monthly transfer is $250. Currently, we are not enforcing the initial minimum amount and/or the minimum transfer amount but we reserve the right to enforce such minimum amounts in the future. Amounts allocated to the DCA Plus Fixed Option are held in our General Account and receive interest at rates declared periodically by us, but not less than an annual rate of 3% (the “Guaranteed Interest Rate”). The DCA Plus program can also be used with an asset allocation program established and maintained by us to qualify for certain optional benefit riders offered under your Contract. See THE GENERAL ACCOUNT section in this Prospectus.

You may instruct us to maintain a specific balance of Variable Investment Options under your Contract (e.g., 30% in the Equity Index Subaccount, 40% in the Managed Bond Subaccount, and 30% in the Growth LT Subaccount) prior to your Annuity Date. Periodically, we will “rebalance” your values in the elected Subaccounts to the percentages you have specified. Rebalancing may result in transferring amounts from a Subaccount earning a relatively higher return to one earning a relatively lower return. You may choose to have rebalances made quarterly, semi-annually or annually until your Annuity Date. Portfolio rebalancing is not available after you annuitize. Only Variable Investment Options are available for rebalancing. Detailed information appears in the SAI.

You may instruct us to make automatic periodic transfers of your earnings from the Money Market Subaccount to one or more Variable Investment Options (other than the Money Market Subaccount). Detailed information appears in the SAI.

No sales charge is imposed on any Purchase Payment which means the entire amount of your Purchase Payment is allocated to the Investment Options you selected. Your Purchase Payments may, however, be subject to a withdrawal charge. This charge may apply to amounts you withdraw under your Contract prior to the Annuity Date, depending on the length of time each Purchase Payment has been invested and on the amount you withdraw. This amount is deducted proportionately among all Investment Options from which the withdrawal occurs. See the Choosing Your Annuity Option— Annuity Options section for withdrawal charges that may apply to redemptions after the Annuity Date. No withdrawal charge is imposed on:


	•	the free withdrawal amount (see WITHDRAWALS— Withdrawals Free of a Withdrawal Charge),

	•	amounts converted after the first Contract Anniversary to a life contingent Annuity Option or an Annuity Option with a period certain of at least 5 years that is offered under the Contract, unless guaranteed variable annuity payments under Annuity Option 2 or 4 are subsequently redeemed (See the ANNUITIZATION—Choosing Your Annuity Option section in this Prospectus),

	•	death benefit proceeds, except as provided under the DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS— Non-Natural Owner section for certain Non-Natural Owners,

	•	withdrawals by Owners to meet the minimum distribution rules for Qualified Contracts as they apply to amounts held under the Contract, or

	•	withdrawals after the first Contract Anniversary, if the Owner or Annuitant has been diagnosed with a medically determinable condition that results in a life expectancy of 12 months or less and we are provided with medical evidence satisfactory to us.

If you annuitize your Contract by electing the GIA Plus Annuity Option, the waiver of withdrawal charges described above will not apply.

Transfers of all or part of your Account Value from one Investment Option to another are not considered a withdrawal of an amount from your Contract, so no withdrawal charge is imposed at the time of transfer. See the HOW YOUR INVESTMENTS ARE ALLOCATED— Transfers and Market-timing Restrictions and THE GENERAL ACCOUNT sections in this Prospectus.

The amount of the withdrawal charge depends on how long each Purchase Payment was held under your Contract. Each Purchase Payment you make is considered to have a certain “age,” depending on the length of time since that Purchase Payment was effective. A Purchase Payment is “one year old” or has an “age of one” from the day it is effective until the beginning of the day preceding your next Contract Anniversary. Beginning on the day preceding that Contract Anniversary, your Purchase Payment will have an “age of two” and increases in age on the day preceding each Contract Anniversary. When you withdraw an amount subject to the withdrawal charge, the “age” of the Purchase Payment you withdraw determines the level of withdrawal charge as follows:

We calculate your withdrawal charge by assuming that your Earnings are withdrawn first, followed by amounts attributed to Purchase Payments with the “oldest” Purchase Payment withdrawn first and before any deduction for other charges due or taxes are made. The withdrawal charge will be deducted proportionately among all Investment Options from which your withdrawal occurs. Unless you specify otherwise, a partial withdrawal amount requested will be processed as a “gross” amount, which means that applicable charges and taxes will be deducted from the requested amount. If a partial withdrawal amount is requested to be a “net” amount, applicable charges and taxes will be added to the requested amount and the withdrawal charges and taxes will be calculated on the grossed up amount. See THE GENERAL ACCOUNT section in this Prospectus.

Example: You make an initial Purchase Payment of $10,000 in Contract Year 1 and make an additional Purchase Payment of $7,000 in Contract Year 2. With Earnings, your Contract Value in Contract Year 3 is $19,000. In Contract Year 3 you make a withdrawal of $9,000. At this point, total Purchase Payments equal $17,000, Earnings equal $2,000, and the “age” of the applicable Purchase Payments withdrawn is 3 Years. Earnings ($2,000) and 10% of all remaining Purchase Payments made ($1,700) may be withdrawn free of a withdrawal charge per Contract year. The amount of the withdrawal charge applied would be $318 ($9,000-$2,000-$1,700=$5,300; $5,300*6%=$318).

The withdrawal charge is designed to reimburse us for sales commissions and other expenses associated with the promotion and solicitation of offers for the Contracts, although our actual expenses may be greater or less than the amount of the withdrawal charge. See the ADDITIONAL INFORMATION— Distribution Arrangements section in this Prospectus for information regarding commissions and other amounts paid to broker-dealers in connection with distribution of the Contracts.

We assess a charge against the assets of each Subaccount to compensate for certain mortality and expense risks that we assume under the Contract (the “Risk Charge”). The risk that an Annuitant will live longer (and therefore receive more annuity payments) than we predict through our actuarial calculations at the time the Contract is issued is “mortality risk.” We also bear mortality risk in connection with death benefit payable under the Contract. The risk that the expense charges and fees under the Contract and Separate Account are less than our actual administrative and operating expenses is called “expense risk.”

This Risk Charge is assessed daily at an annual rate equal to 0.90% of each Subaccount’s assets. This charge may not be increased for the duration of your Contract.

The Risk Charge will stop at the Annuity Date if you select fixed annuity payments. The base Risk Charge will continue after the Annuity Date if you choose variable annuity payments, even though we do not bear mortality risk if your Annuity Option is Period Certain Only.

We will realize a gain if the Risk Charge exceeds our actual cost of expenses and benefits, and will suffer a loss if such actual costs exceed the Risk Charge. Any gain will become part of our General Account. We may use it for any reason, including covering sales expenses on the Contracts.

We increase your Risk Charge by an annual rate equal to 0.20% of each Subaccount’s assets if you purchase the Stepped-Up Death Benefit Rider (SDBR). The total Risk Charge annual rate will be 1.10% if the SDBR is purchased. Any increase in your Risk Charge will not continue after the Annuity Date. See the DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS— Death Benefits section in this Prospectus.

We charge an Administrative Fee as compensation for costs we incur in operating the Separate Account, issuing and administering the Contracts, including processing applications and payments, and issuing reports to you and to regulatory authorities.

The Administrative Fee is assessed daily at an annual rate equal to 0.15% of the assets of each Subaccount. This rate is guaranteed not to increase for the life of your Contract. A correlation will not necessarily exist between the actual administrative expenses attributable to a particular Contract and the Administrative Fee paid in respect of that particular Contract. The Administrative Fee will continue after the Annuity Date if you choose any variable annuity. We do not intend to realize a profit from this fee.

We will charge you an Annual Fee of $30 on each Contract Anniversary prior to the Annuity Date, and at the time you withdraw your entire Net Contract Value (on a pro rated basis for that Contract Year) if your Net Contract Value is less than $50,000 on that date. The fee is not imposed on amounts you annuitize or on payment of death benefit proceeds. The fee reimburses certain costs in administering the Contracts and the Separate Account. We do not intend to realize a profit from this fee. This fee is guaranteed not to increase for the life of your Contract.

Your Annual Fee will be charged proportionately against your Investment Options. Assessments against your Variable Investment Options are made by debiting some of the Subaccount Units previously credited to your Contract. That is, assessment of the Annual Fee does not change the Unit Value for those Subaccounts. Any portion of the Annual Fee we deduct from any of our fixed options (if available under the Contract) will not be greater than the annual interest credited in excess of that fixed option’s minimum guaranteed interest rate.

If you purchase an optional Rider listed below, we will deduct the annual charge for the Rider from your Investment Options on a proportionate basis on each Contract Anniversary that the Rider remains in effect following the Effective Date of the Rider, if the Rider is terminated, and for some Riders on the Annuity Date.

The Rider charge for a Contract Year will be deducted on the Contract Anniversary following that Contract Year. The charge is the annual charge percentage, indicated in the table below, multiplied by the Contract Value, except for the Foundation 10 Rider and Flexible Lifetime Income Rider (Single or Joint), which is the annual charge percentage multiplied by the Protected Payment Base, the GPA 3 Rider, which is the annual charge percentage multiplied by the Guaranteed Protection Amount and the GIA Plus Rider, which is the annual charge percentage multiplied by the greater of the Guaranteed Income Base or the Contract Value.

If you terminate a Rider on a Contract Anniversary, the full charge will be deducted from the Contract Value. If the Rider terminates on a day other than a Contract Anniversary, a prorated charge will be deducted and will be based on the Contract Value, except for the Foundation 10, Flexible Lifetime Income (Single or Joint), GPA 3 and GIA Plus Riders as noted above, on the day the Rider terminates. The charge will be deducted on the earlier of the day your Contract terminates or the Contract Anniversary following the day the Rider terminates.

Any portion of the Rider’s charge we deduct from any fixed option will not be greater than the annual interest credited in excess of 3%. If you make a full withdrawal of the amount available for withdrawal during a Contract Year, we will deduct the charge from the final payment made to you.

An optional Rider charge may change if a Step-Up/ Reset occurs under the provisions of a Rider, but will never be more than the charge being charged under the then current terms and conditions of the Rider and will not be more than the maximum charge percentage, indicated in the table below, for the applicable Rider. If a Step-Up/ Reset does not occur, your annual charge percentage will remain the same as it was on the Effective Date of the Rider.

See the Mortality and Expense Risk Charge section for the Stepped-Up Death Benefit Rider charge information.

A tax may be imposed on your Investments (“premium tax”) at the time your Investment is made, at the time of a partial or full withdrawal, at the time any death benefit proceeds are paid, at annuitization or at such other time as taxes may be imposed. Currently, the state of New York does not impose premium taxes on the sale of this type of product. However, future changes in facts or state law may require premium tax charges. Tax rates ranging from 0% to 3.5% are currently in effect, but may also change in the future.

If we pay any premium taxes attributable to Investments, we will impose a similar charge against your Contract Value. We normally will charge you when you annuitize some or all of your Contract Value. We reserve the right to impose this charge for applicable premium taxes and/or other taxes when you make a full or partial withdrawal, at the time any death benefit proceeds are paid, or when those taxes are incurred. For these purposes, “premium taxes” include any state or local premium or retaliatory taxes and, where approval has been obtained, federal premium taxes and any federal, state or local income, excise, business or any other type of tax (or component thereof) measured by or based upon, directly or indirectly, the amount of Investments we have received. We will base this charge on the Contract Value, the amount of the transaction, the aggregate amount of Investments we receive under your Contract, or any other amount, that in our sole discretion we deem appropriate.

We may also charge the Separate Account or your Contract Value for taxes attributable to the Separate Account or the Contract, including income taxes attributable to the Separate Account or to our operations with respect to the Contract, or taxes attributable, directly or indirectly, to Investments. Currently, we do not impose any such charges.

We may agree to waive or reduce charges under our Contracts, in situations where selling and/or maintenance costs associated with the Contracts are reduced, such as the sale of several Contracts to the same Contract Owner(s), sales of large Contracts, sales of Contracts in connection with a group or sponsored arrangement or mass transactions over multiple Contracts.

We will only waive or reduce such charges on any Contract where expenses associated with the sale or distribution of the Contract and/or costs associated with administering and maintaining the Contract are reduced. We reserve the right to terminate waiver and reduced charge programs at any time, including for issued Contracts.

Your Variable Account Value reflects advisory fees and other expenses incurred by the various Portfolios of the Funds, net of any applicable reductions and/or reimbursements. These fees and expenses may vary. Each Fund is governed by its own Board

of Trustees, and your Contract does not fix or specify the level of expenses of any Portfolio. A Fund’s fees and expenses are described in detail in the applicable Fund Prospectus and SAI.

When you submit the application for your Contract, you must choose a sole Annuitant or Joint Annuitants. If you are buying a Qualified Contract, you must be the sole Annuitant. If you are buying a Non-Qualified Contract you may choose yourself and/or another person as Annuitant. Whether you have a sole or Joint Annuitants, you may choose a Contingent Annuitant. The Contingent Annuitant will not have any Contract benefits, including death benefit proceeds, until becoming the sole surviving Annuitant. You will not be able to add or change a sole or Joint Annuitant after your Contract is issued. However, if you are buying a Qualified Contract, you may add a Joint Annuitant on the Annuity Date. You will be able to add or change a Contingent Annuitant until your Annuity Date or the death of your sole Annuitant or both Joint Annuitants, whichever occurs first. However, once your Contingent Annuitant has become the Annuitant under your Contract, no additional Contingent Annuitant may be named. No Annuitant (Primary, Joint or Contingent) may be named upon or after reaching his or her 86^th birthday. We reserve the right to require proof of age or survival of the Annuitant(s).

Annuitization occurs on the Annuity Date when you convert your Contract from the accumulation phase to the annuitization (income) phase. You may choose both your Annuity Date and your Annuity Option. At the Annuity Date, you may elect to annuitize some or all of your Net Contract Value, less any applicable charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes, (the “Conversion Amount”), as long as such Conversion Amount annuitized is at least $2,000. We will send the annuity payments to the payee that you designate.

If you annuitize only a portion of this available Contract Value, you may have the remainder distributed, less any applicable charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes, any applicable withdrawal charge, any Annual Fee, and any applicable optional Rider charge. This option of distribution may or may not be available, or may be available only for certain types of contracts. Currently, we only allow this option on Qualified Contracts but we reserve the right to make it available on other contract types in the future. Any such distribution will be made to you in a single sum if the remaining Conversion Amount is less than $2,000 on your Annuity Date. Distributions under your Contract may have tax consequences. You should consult a qualified tax adviser for information on full or partial annuitization.

If you annuitize only a portion of your Net Contract Value on your Annuity Date, you may, at that time, have the option to elect not to have the remainder of your Contract Value distributed, but instead to continue your Contract with that remaining Contract Value (a “continuing Contract”). If this option is available, you would then choose a second Annuity Date for your continuing Contract, and all references in this Prospectus to your “Annuity Date” would, in connection with your continuing Contract, be deemed to refer to that second Annuity Date. The second Annuity Date may not be later than the date specified in the Choosing Your Annuity Date section of this Prospectus. This option may not be available, or may be available only for certain types of Contracts. You should be aware that some or all of the payments received before the second Annuity Date may be fully taxable. We recommend that you contact a qualified tax adviser for more information if you are interested in this option.

You should choose your Annuity Date when you submit your application or we will apply a default Annuity Date to your Contract. You may change your Annuity Date by notifying us, in proper form, at least ten Business Days prior to the earlier of your current Annuity Date or your new Annuity Date. Your Annuity Date cannot be earlier than your first Contract Anniversary. Adverse federal tax consequences may result if you choose an Annuity Date that is prior to an Annuitant’s attained age 59 1/2. See the FEDERAL TAX ISSUES section in this Prospectus.

If you have a sole Annuitant, your Annuity Date must occur on or before the later of his or her 90^th birthday or the tenth (10^th) Contract Anniversary. If you have Joint Annuitants, your Annuity Date must occur on or before the later of your younger Joint Annuitant’s 90^th birthday or the tenth (10^th) Contract Anniversary. Different requirements may apply as required by the Code. We may, at our sole discretion, allow you to extend your Annuity Date. We reserve the right, at any time, to not offer any extension to your Annuity Date regardless of whether we may have granted any extensions to you or to any others in the past. Some Broker/Dealers may not allow their clients to extend the Annuity Date beyond age 95.

If your Contract is a Qualified Contract, you may also be subject to additional restrictions. In order to meet the Code minimum distribution rules, your Required Minimum Distributions (RMDs) may begin earlier than your Annuity Date. For instance, under Section 401 of the Code (for Qualified Plans) and Section 408 of the Code (for IRAs), the entire interest under the Contract must be distributed to the Owner/ Annuitant not later than the Owner/ Annuitant’s Required Beginning Date (“RBD”), or distributions over the life of the Owner/ Annuitant (or the Owner/ Annuitant and his Beneficiary) must begin no later than the RBD. For more information see the FEDERAL TAX ISSUES section in this Prospectus.

If you have a Non-Qualified Contract and you do not choose an Annuity Date when you submit your application, your Annuity Date will be the later of your Annuitant’s 90^th birthday or the tenth (10^th) Contract Anniversary. In the case of Joint Annuitants, your Annuity Date will be the later of the younger Joint Annuitant’s 90^th birthday or the tenth (10^th ) Contract Anniversary. Certain Qualified Contracts may require distributions to occur at an earlier age.

If you have not specified an Annuity Option or do not instruct us otherwise, at your Annuity Date your Net Contract Value, less any charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes, will be annuitized (if this net amount is at least $2,000) as follows:


	•	the net amount from a fixed option will be converted into fixed annuity payments and

	•	the net amount from your Variable Account Value will be converted into variable annuity payments directed to the Subaccounts proportionate to your Account Value in each.

If the net amount is less than $2,000, the entire amount will be distributed. If you have a Non-Qualified Contract, or if you have a Qualified Contract and are not married, your default Annuity Option will be Life with a ten year Period Certain. If you have a Qualified Contract and you are married, your default Annuity Option will be Joint and Survivor Life with survivor payments of 50%; your spouse will automatically be named your Joint Annuitant.

You should carefully review the Annuity Options with a qualified tax adviser, and, for Qualified Contracts, reference should be made to the terms of the particular plan and the requirements of the Code for pertinent limitations regarding annuity payments, Required Minimum Distributions (“RMDs”), and other matters.

You may make three basic decisions about your annuity payments. First, you may choose whether you want those payments to be a fixed-dollar amount and/or a variable-dollar amount. Second, you may choose the form of annuity payments (see Annuity Options below). Third, you may decide how often you want annuity payments to be made (the “frequency” of the payments). You may not change these selections after the Annuity Date.

You may choose fixed annuity payments based on a fixed rate and the 1983a Annuity Mortality Table with the ages set back ten (10) years, variable annuity payments that vary with the Investment results of the Subaccounts you select, or you may choose both, converting one portion of the net amount you annuitize into fixed annuity payments and another portion into variable annuity payments.

If you select fixed annuity payments, each periodic annuity payment received will be equal to the initial annuity payment, unless you select a Joint and Survivor Life annuity with reduced survivor payments when the Primary Annuitant dies. Any net amount you convert to fixed annuity payments will be held in our General Account (but not under any fixed option).

If you select variable annuity payments, you may choose as many Variable Investment Options as you wish. The amount of the periodic annuity payments will vary with the investment results of the Variable Investment Options selected and may be more or less than a fixed payment option. After the Annuity Date, Annuity Units may be exchanged among available Variable Investment Options up to four times in any twelve-month period. How your Contract converts into variable annuity payments is explained in more detail in THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT section in the SAI.

Four Annuity Options are currently available under the Contract, although additional options may become available in the future. For other Annuity Options see the OTHER OPTIONAL RIDERS section in this Prospectus.


	1.	Life Only. Periodic payments are made to the designated payee during the Annuitant’s lifetime. Payments stop when the Annuitant dies.

	2.	Life with Period Certain. Periodic payments are made to the designated payee during the Annuitant’s lifetime, with payments guaranteed for a specified period. You may choose to have payments guaranteed for anywhere from 5 through 30 years (in full years only).

		If a Life with Period Certain annuity option provides for payments of the same amount for different Periods Certain at some ages, we will assume that your selection was for the longest Period Certain available for your age.

	3.	Joint and Survivor Life. Periodic payments are made to the designated payee during the lifetime of the Primary Annuitant. After the death of the Primary Annuitant, periodic payments will continue to be made during the lifetime of the secondary Annuitant named in the election. You may choose to have the payments to the surviving secondary Annuitant equal 50%, 66 2/3% or 100% of the original amount payable made during the lifetime of the Primary Annuitant (you must make this election when you choose your Annuity Option). If you elect a reduced payment based on the life of the secondary Annuitant, fixed annuity payments will be equal to 50% or 66 2/3% of the original fixed payment payable during the lifetime of the Primary Annuitant; variable annuity payments will be determined using 50% or 66 2/3%, as applicable, of the number of Annuity Units for each Subaccount credited to the Contract as of the date of death of the Primary Annuitant. Payments stop when both Annuitants have died.

	4.	Period Certain Only. Periodic payments are made to the designated payee over a specified period. You may choose to have payments continue for anywhere from 5 through 30 years (in full years only).

Periodic payment amounts will differ based on the Annuity Option selected. Generally, the longer the possible payment period, the lower the payment amount.

Additionally, if variable payments are elected under Annuity Options 2 and 4, you may redeem all remaining guaranteed variable payments after the Annuity Date. Also, under Option 4, partial redemptions of remaining guaranteed variable payments after the Annuity Date are available. The amount available upon full redemption would be the present value of any remaining guaranteed variable payments at the assumed investment return. Any applicable withdrawal charge will be deducted from the present value as if you made a full withdrawal, or if applicable, a partial withdrawal. For purposes of calculating the withdrawal charge and Free Withdrawal amount, it will be assumed that the Contract was never converted to provide annuity payments and any prior variable annuity payments in that Contract Year will be treated as if they were partial withdrawals from the Contract (See the CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS—Withdrawal Charge section in this Prospectus).

For example, assume that a Contract was issued with a single investment of $10,000 and in Contract Year 4 the Owner elects to receive variable annuity payments under Annuity Option 4. In Contract Year 5, the Owner elects to make a partial redemption of $5,000. The withdrawal charge as a percentage of the Purchase Payments with an age of 5 years is 3%. Assuming the Free Withdrawal amount immediately prior to the partial redemption is $300, the withdrawal charge for the partial redemption will be $141 ($5,000 - $300) * 3%). No withdrawal charge will be imposed on a redemption if:


	•	the Annuity Option is elected as the form of payments of death benefit proceeds, or

	•	the Annuitant dies before the period certain has ended and the Beneficiary requests a redemption of the variable annuity payments.

Full or partial redemptions of remaining guaranteed variable payments are explained in more detail in the SAI under THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT.

If the Annuitant dies before the guaranteed payments under Annuity Options 2 and 4 are completed, we will pay the remainder of the guaranteed payments to the first person among the following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity or corporation entitled to receive the remainder of the guaranteed payments:

If none are living (or if there is no entity or corporation entitled to receive the remainder of the guaranteed payments), we will pay the remainder of the guaranteed payments to the Owner’s estate.

If the Owner dies on or after the Annuity Date, but payments have not yet been completed, then distributions of the remaining amounts payable under the Contract must be made at least as rapidly as the method of distribution that was being used at the date of the Owner’s death. All of the Owner’s rights granted by the Contract will be assumed by the first among the following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity or corporation entitled to assume the Owner’s rights granted by the Contract:


	•	the Joint Owner;

	•	the Contingent Owner;

	•	the Beneficiary; or

	•	the Contingent Beneficiary.

If none are living (or if there is no entity or corporation entitled to assume the Owner’s rights granted by the Contract), all of the Owner’s rights granted by the Contract will be assumed by the Owner’s estate.

For Qualified Contracts, please refer to the Choosing Your Annuity Date section in this Prospectus. If your Contract was issued in connection with a Qualified Plan subject to Title I of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (“ERISA”), your spouse’s consent may be required when you seek any distribution under your Contract, unless your Annuity Option is Joint and Survivor Life with survivor payments of at least 50%, and your spouse is your Joint Annuitant.

You may choose to have annuity payments made monthly, quarterly, semi-annually, or annually. The amount of a variable payment will be determined in each period on the date corresponding to your Annuity Date, and payment will be made on the next succeeding day.

Your initial annuity payment must be at least $20. Depending on the net amount you annuitize, this requirement may limit your options regarding the period and/or frequency of annuity payments.

Your Contract contains tables that we use to determine the amount of the first annuity payment under your Contract, taking into consideration the annuitized portion of your Net Contract Value at the Annuity Date. This amount will vary, depending on the annuity period and payment frequency you select. This amount will be larger in the case of shorter Period Certain annuities and smaller for longer Period Certain annuities. Similarly, this amount will be greater for a Life Only annuity than for a Joint and Survivor Life annuity, because we will expect to make payments for a shorter period of time on a Life Only annuity. If you do not choose the Period Certain Only annuity, this amount will also vary depending on the age of the Annuitant(s) on the Annuity Date and, for some Contracts, the sex of the Annuitant(s).

For fixed annuity payments, the guaranteed income factors in our tables are based on an annual interest rate of 3% and the 1983a Annuity Mortality Table with the ages set back 10 years. If you elect a fixed annuity, fixed annuity payments will be based on the periodic income factors in effect for your Contract on the Annuity Date which are at least the guaranteed income factors under the Contract.

For variable annuity payments, the tables are based on an assumed annual investment return of 4% and the 1983a Annuity Mortality Table with the ages set back 10 years. If you elect a variable annuity, your initial variable annuity payment will be based on the applicable variable annuity income factors in effect for your Contract on the Annuity Date which are at least the variable annuity income factors under the Contract. You may choose any other annuity option we may offer on the option’s effective date. A higher assumed investment return would mean a larger first variable annuity payment, but subsequent payments would increase only when actual net investment performance exceeds the higher assumed rate and would fall when actual net investment performance is less than the higher assumed rate. A lower assumed rate would mean a smaller first payment and a more favorable threshold for increases and decreases. If the actual net investment performance is a constant 4%

annually, annuity payments will be level. The assumed investment return is explained in more detail in the SAI under THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT.

Death benefit proceeds may be payable before the Annuity Date on proof of death of the sole surviving Annuitant or of any Contract Owner while the Contract is in force.

Any death benefit payable will be calculated on the “Notice Date”, which is the day on which we receive, in proper form, proof of death and instructions regarding payment of death benefit proceeds. If a Contract has multiple recipients, death benefit proceeds will be calculated when we first receive proof of death and instructions, in proper form, from any recipient. The death benefit proceeds still remaining to be paid to other recipients will fluctuate with the performance of the underlying Investment Options.

Death benefit proceeds will be payable on the Notice Date. Such proceeds will be reduced by any charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes and any Contract Debt. The death benefit proceeds may be payable in a single sum, as an Annuity Option available under the Contract, towards the purchase of any other Annuity Option we then offer, or in any other manner permitted by the IRS and approved by us. The Owner’s spouse may continue the Contract (see the Death Benefits— Spousal Continuation section of this Prospectus). In addition, there may be legal requirements that limit the recipient’s Annuity Options and the timing of any payments. A recipient should consult a qualified tax adviser before making a death benefit election.

The death benefit proceeds will be paid to the first among the following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity or corporation entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds, in the following order:


	•	Owner,

	•	Joint Owner,

	•	Contingent Owner,

	•	Beneficiary, or

	•	Contingent Beneficiary.

If none are living (or if there is no entity or corporation entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds), the proceeds will be payable to the Owner’s Estate.

The Death Benefit Amount as of any Business Day before the Annuity Date is equal to the greater of:


	•	your Contract Value as of that day, or

	•	your aggregate Purchase Payments reduced by an amount for each withdrawal, which is calculated by multiplying the aggregate Purchase Payments received before each withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of the withdrawal, including any withdrawal charge, to the Contract Value immediately prior to each withdrawal.

We calculate the Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date and the death benefit will be paid in accordance with the Death Benefit Proceeds section above.

See the APPENDIX E: DEATH BENEFIT AMOUNT AND STEPPED-UP DEATH BENEFIT RIDER (SDBR) SAMPLE CALCULATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Generally, a sole designated recipient who is the Owner’s spouse may elect to become the Owner (and sole Annuitant if the deceased Owner had been the Annuitant) and continue the Contract until the earliest of the spouse’s death, the death of the Annuitant, or the Annuity Date, except in the case of a Qualified Contract issued under section 403 of the Code. On the

Notice Date, if the surviving spouse is deemed to have continued the Contract, we will set the Contract Value equal to the death benefit proceeds that would have been payable to the spouse as the deemed Beneficiary/ designated recipient of the death benefit proceeds (“Add-In Amount”). The Add-In Amount will be added to the Contract Value on the Notice Date. There will not be an adjustment to the Contract Value if the Contract Value is equal to or greater than the death benefit proceeds as of the Notice Date. The Add-In Amount will be allocated among Investment Options in accordance with the current allocation instructions for the Contract and may be, under certain circumstances, considered earnings. A Joint or Contingent Owner who is the designated recipient, but not the Owner’s spouse, may not continue the Contract.

Example: On the Notice Date, the Owner’s surviving spouse elects to continue the Contract. On that date, the death benefit proceeds were $100,000 and the Contract Value was $85,000. Since the surviving spouse elected to continue the Contract in lieu of receiving the death benefit proceeds, we will increase the Contract Value by an Add-In Amount of $15,000 ($100,000-$85,000=$15,000). If the Contract Value on the Notice Date was $100,000 or higher, then nothing would be added to the Contract Value.

If a sole surviving Annuitant dies before the Annuity Date, the amount of the death benefit will be equal to the Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date and will be paid in accordance with the Death Benefit Proceeds section.

If there is more than one Annuitant and an Annuitant who is not an Owner dies, no death benefit proceeds will be payable. The designated sole Annuitant will then be the first living person in the following order:

The amount of the death benefit will be the Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date and will be paid in accordance with the Death Benefit Proceeds section if:


	•	a Contract Owner who is an Annuitant dies before the Annuity Date, or

	•	a Contract Owner who is not an Annuitant and the Contract Owner and Annuitant die simultaneously.

If a Contract Owner who is not an Annuitant dies before the Annuity Date, the death benefit proceeds will be equal to your Contract Value as of the Notice Date and will be paid in accordance with the Death Benefit Proceeds section.

If you are a Non-Natural Owner of a Contract other than a Contract issued under a Qualified Plan as defined in Section 401 or 403 of the Code, the Primary Annuitant will be treated as the Owner of the Contract for purposes of the Nonqualified Contract Distribution Rules. If there are Joint or Contingent Annuitants, the death benefit proceeds will be payable on proof of death of the first annuitant. If there is a change in the Primary Annuitant prior to the Annuity Date, such change will be treated as the death of the Owner. The Death Benefit Amount will be: (a) the Contract Value, if the Non-Natural Owner elects to maintain the Contract and reinvest the Contract Value into the contract in the same amount as immediately prior to the distribution; or (b) the Contract Value, less any annual fee, withdrawal charge and charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes, if the Non-Natural Owner elects a cash distribution.

The Contract is intended to comply with all applicable provisions of Code Section 72(s) and any successor provision, as deemed necessary by us to qualify the Contract as an annuity contract for federal income tax purposes. If an Owner of a Non-Qualified Contract dies before the Annuity Date, distribution of the death benefit proceeds must begin within 1 year after the Owner’s death or complete distribution within 5 years after the Owner’s death. In order to satisfy this requirement, the designated recipient must receive a final lump sum payment by the fifth anniversary of the death of the Contract Owner, or elect to receive an annuity for life or over a period that does not exceed the life expectancy of the designated recipient with annuity payments that start within 1 year after the Owner’s death or, if permitted by the IRS, elect to receive a systematic distribution over a period not exceeding the beneficiary’s life expectancy using a method that would be acceptable for purposes of calculating the minimum distribution required under section 401(a)(9) of the Code. If an election to receive an annuity is not made within 60 days of our receipt of proof, in proper form, of the Owner’s death or, if earlier, 60 days (or shorter period

as we permit) prior to the first anniversary of the Owner’s death, the lump sum option will be deemed elected, unless otherwise required by law. If the lump sum option is deemed elected, we will consider that deemed election as receipt of instructions regarding payment of the death benefit proceeds. If a Non-Qualified Contract has Joint Owners, this requirement applies to the first Contract Owner to die.

The Owner may designate that the Beneficiary will receive death benefit proceeds through annuity payments for life or life with Period Certain. The Owner must designate the payment method in writing in a form acceptable to us. The Owner may revoke the designation only in writing and only in a form acceptable to us. Once the Owner dies, the Beneficiary cannot revoke or modify the Owner’s designation.

If the Owner is a Non-Natural Owner, the rules set forth in these Nonqualified Contract Distribution Rules apply in the event of the death or change of the Primary Annuitant.

Under Internal Revenue Service regulations and our administrative procedures, if the Contract is owned under a Qualified Plan pursuant to Sections 401, 403 or Sections 408, or 408A of the Code and the Annuitant dies before the Required Beginning Date, the payment of any death benefit proceeds must be made to the designated recipient in accordance with one of two rules. One rule generally requires the death benefit proceeds to commence distribution by December 31 of the calendar year following the calendar year of the Annuitant’s death and continue over the life of his or her Beneficiary (the “life expectancy method”). The second rule requires distribution of the entire death benefit proceeds no later than December 31 of the calendar year in which the fifth anniversary of the Annuitant’s death falls (the “five-year rule”).

However, the life expectancy method and the five-year rule are modified if the sole primary Beneficiary is a surviving spouse. If the surviving spouse elects to continue the Contract and not do an eligible rollover to an IRA or another existing eligible plan in his or her name, then he or she will be subject to the five-year rule. However, the surviving spouse may waive the five-year requirement and elect to take distributions over his or her life expectancy, and if the surviving spouse elects to defer the commencement of required distributions beyond the first anniversary of the Annuitant’s death, the surviving spouse will be deemed to continue the Contract. In this instance, the surviving spouse may defer required distributions until the later of:


	•	December 31 of the year following the year the Annuitant died, or

	•	December 31 of the year in which the deceased Annuitant would have turned 70 1/2.

Further, under our administrative procedures, if the required distributions election is not received by us in good order by December 31 of the year following the Annuitant’s death or by December 31 of the year in which the Annuitant would have attained age 70 1/2, the lump sum option will be deemed by us to have been elected, unless otherwise required by law. If the lump sum option is deemed elected, we will treat that deemed election as receipt of instructions regarding payment of death benefit proceeds.

If the Annuitant dies after the commencement of RMDs (except in the case of a Roth IRA when RMDs do not apply) but before the Annuitant’s entire interest in the Contract (other than a Roth IRA) has been distributed, the remaining interest in the Contract must be distributed to the designated recipient at least as rapidly as under the distribution method in effect at the time of the Annuitant’s death.

You may purchase this optional Rider at the time your application is completed. You may not purchase the SDBR after the Contract Date. The SDBR may only be purchased if the age of each Annuitant is 75 or younger on the Contract Date.

If you purchase the SDBR at the time your application is completed, upon the death of the sole surviving Annuitant, or the first Owner who is also an Annuitant, prior to the Annuity Date, the death benefit proceeds will be equal to the greater of (a) or (b) below:


	The Death Benefit Amount as of any day before the Annuity Date is equal to the greater of:


	•	your Contract Value as of that day, or

	•	your aggregate Purchase Payments reduced by an amount for each withdrawal, which is calculated by multiplying the aggregate Purchase Payments received before each withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of the withdrawal, including any withdrawal charge, to the Contract Value immediately prior to each withdrawal.


	The actual Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount is calculated only when death benefit proceeds become payable as a result of the death of the sole surviving Annuitant, or the first death of an Owner who is also an Annuitant, prior to the Annuity Date and is determined as follows:

	First we calculate what the Death Benefit Amount would have been as of your first Contract Anniversary and each subsequent Contract Anniversary that occurs while the Annuitant is living and before the Annuitant reaches his or her 81^st birthday (each of these Contract Anniversaries is a “Milestone Date”).

	We then adjust the Death Benefit Amount for each Milestone Date by:


	•	adding the aggregate amount of any Purchase Payments received by us since the Milestone Date, and

	•	subtracting an amount for each withdrawal that has occurred since that Milestone Date, which is calculated by multiplying the Death Benefit Amount before the withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of each withdrawal that has occurred since that Milestone Date, including any withdrawal charge, to the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal.

The highest of these adjusted Death Benefit Amounts for each Milestone Date, as of the Notice Date, is your Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount if you purchase the SDBR. Calculation of any actual Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount is only made once death benefit proceeds become payable under your Contract.

Any death benefit paid under this Rider will be paid in accordance with the Death Benefit Proceeds section above.

See the APPENDIX E: DEATH BENEFIT AMOUNT AND STEPPED-UP DEATH BENEFIT RIDER (SDBR) SAMPLE CALCULATIONS section in this Prospectus.


	•	the date a full withdrawal of the amount available for withdrawal is made under the Contract,

	•	the date death benefit proceeds become payable under the Contract,

	•	the date the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract, or

	•	the Annuity Date.

You may, on or prior to your Annuity Date, withdraw all or a portion of the amount available under your Contract while the Annuitants are living and your Contract is in force. You may surrender your Contract and make a full withdrawal at any time. If you surrender your Contract it will be terminated as of the Effective Date of the withdrawal. Beginning 30 days after your Contract Date, you also may make partial withdrawals from your Investment Options at any time. Currently, we are not

requiring the 30-day waiting period on partial withdrawals, but we reserve the right to require a 30-day waiting period on partial withdrawals in the future. You may request to withdraw a specific dollar amount or a specific percentage of an Account Value or your Net Contract Value. You may choose to make your withdrawal from specified Investment Options. If you do not specify Investment Options, your withdrawal will be made from all of your Investment Options proportionately. Each partial withdrawal must be for $500 or more. Pre-authorized partial withdrawals must be at least $250, except for pre-authorized withdrawals distributed by Electronic Funds Transfer (EFT), which must be at least $100. If your partial withdrawal from an Investment Option would leave a remaining Account Value in that Investment Option of less than $500, we also reserve the right, at our option, to transfer that remaining amount to your other Investment Options on a proportionate basis relative to your most recent allocation instructions. If your partial withdrawal leaves you with a Net Contract Value of less than $1,000, or if your partial withdrawal request is for an amount exceeding the amount available for withdrawal, as described in the Amount Available for Withdrawal section below, we have the right, at our option, to terminate your Contract and send you the withdrawal proceeds. Partial withdrawals from any fixed option in any Contract Year may be subject to restrictions.

The amount available for withdrawal is your Net Contract Value (Contract Value less Contract Debt) at the end of the Business Day on which your withdrawal request is effective, less any applicable Annual Fee, optional Rider Charges, withdrawal charge, and any charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes. The amount we send to you (your “withdrawal proceeds”) will also reflect any required or requested federal and state income tax withholding. See the FEDERAL TAX ISSUES and THE GENERAL ACCOUNT sections in this Prospectus.

You assume investment risk on Purchase Payments in the Subaccounts. As a result, the amount available to you for withdrawal from any Subaccount may be more or less than the total Purchase Payments you have allocated to that Subaccount.

Subject to the amount available for withdrawal provisions described above, during a Contract Year you may withdraw your Earnings plus your “eligible Purchase Payments” without incurring a withdrawal charge. Eligible Purchase Payments include 10% of all remaining Purchase Payments at the beginning of a Contract Year that have an “age” of less than 7 years, plus 10% of any Purchase Payments received during the Contract Year. Our calculations of the withdrawal charge deduct this “free 10%” from your “oldest” Purchase Payment that is still subject to the withdrawal charge. For purposes of determining the free withdrawal amounts, withdrawal of mandatory required minimums from certain Qualified Plans are included within the calculations.

Example: You make an initial Purchase Payment of $10,000 in Contract Year 1, and make additional Purchase Payments of $1,000 and $6,000 in Contract Year 2. With Earnings, your Contract Value in Contract Year 3 is $19,000. In Contract Year 3, you may withdraw $3,700 free of the withdrawal charge (your total Purchase Payments were $17,000, so 10% of that total equals $1,700, plus you had $2,000 of Earnings). After this withdrawal, your Contract Value is $15,300 (all attributable to Purchase Payments). In Contract Year 4, your Contract Value falls to $12,500; you may withdraw $1,530 (10% of $15,300) free of any withdrawal charges.

See the Choosing Your Annuity Option — Annuity Options section for Free Withdrawal amounts that apply to redemptions after the Annuity Date.

Qualified Contracts have special restrictions on withdrawals. For purposes of determining the free withdrawal amounts, withdrawal of mandatory required minimums from certain Qualified Contracts are included within the calculations. For additional information, see Special Restrictions Under Qualified Plans below. For those Contracts issued to a Charitable Remainder Trust (CRT), the amount available for withdrawal free of withdrawal charges during a Contract Year includes all eligible Purchase Payments plus all earnings even if all Purchase Payments have not been deemed withdrawn.

If your Contract Value is at least $5,000, you may select the pre-authorized withdrawal option, and you may choose monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual withdrawals. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum Contract Value amount but we reserve the right to enforce the minimum amount in the future. Each withdrawal must be for at least $250, except for withdrawals distributed by Electronic Funds Transfer (EFT), which must be at least $100. Each pre-authorized withdrawal is subject to federal income tax on its taxable portion and may be subject to a tax penalty of 10% if you have not reached age 59 1/2. Pre-authorized withdrawals cannot be used to continue the Contract beyond the Annuity Date. See the FEDERAL

TAX ISSUES and THE GENERAL ACCOUNT sections in this Prospectus. Additional information and options are set forth in the SAI.

If you wish to withdraw the entire amount available under your Contract, you must either return your Contract to us or sign and submit a Withdrawal Request form or a Lost Contract Affidavit if no Withdrawal Request form is completed.

Qualified Plans may have additional rules regarding withdrawals from a Contract purchased under such a Plan. In general, if your Contract was issued under certain Qualified Plans, you may not withdraw amounts attributable to contributions made pursuant to a salary reduction agreement (as defined in Section 402(g)(3)(A) of the Code) or to transfers from a custodial account (as defined in Section 403(b)(7) of the Code) except in cases of your:


	•	severance from employment,

	•	death,

	•	disability as defined in Section 72(m)(7) of the Code,

	•	reaching age 59 1/2, or

	•	hardship as defined for purposes of Section 401 of the Code.

These limitations do not affect certain rollovers or exchanges between Qualified Plans, and do not apply to rollovers from these Qualified Plans to an individual retirement account or individual retirement annuity. In the case of a 403(b) plan, these limitations do not apply to certain salary reduction contributions made, and investment results earned, prior to dates specified in the Code.

Hardship withdrawals under the exception provided above are restricted to amounts attributable to salary reduction contributions, and do not include investment results. This additional restriction does not apply to salary reduction contributions made, or investment results earned, prior to dates specified in the Code.

Certain distributions, including rollovers, may be subject to mandatory withholding of 20% for federal income tax and to a tax penalty of 10% if the distribution is not transferred directly to the trustee of another Qualified Plan, or to the custodian of an individual retirement account or issuer of an individual retirement annuity. See the FEDERAL TAX ISSUES section in this Prospectus. Distributions may also trigger withholding for state income taxes. The tax and ERISA rules relating to withdrawals from Contracts issued to Qualified Plans are complex. We are not the administrator of any Qualified Plan. You should consult your qualified tax adviser and/or your Plan Administrator before you withdraw any portion of your Contract Value.

Withdrawal requests are normally effective on the Business Day we receive them in proper form. If you make Purchase Payments by check and submit a withdrawal request immediately afterwards, payment of your withdrawal proceeds may be delayed until we receive confirmation in our Annuities administrative office that your check has cleared.

All withdrawals, including pre-authorized withdrawals, will generally have federal income tax consequences, which could include tax penalties. You should consult with a qualified tax adviser before making any withdrawal or selecting the pre-authorized withdrawal option. See the FEDERAL TAX ISSUES section in this Prospectus.

You may return your Contract for cancellation and a refund during your Free Look period. Your Free Look period is usually the 10-day period beginning on the day you receive your Contract. If you are replacing another annuity contract or life insurance policy, the Free Look period ends 60 days after you receive your Contract.

The amount of your refund may be more or less than the Purchase Payments you’ve made. If you return your Contract, it will be cancelled as of the date we receive your Contract. You will then receive a refund of your Contract Value, based upon the

next determined Accumulated Unit Value (AUV) after we receive your Contract for cancellation, plus a refund of any amounts that may have been deducted as Contract fees and charges.

If your Contract was issued as an IRA and you return your Contract within 7 days after you receive it, we will return the greater of your Purchase Payments (less any withdrawals made) or the Contract Value.

Your Purchase Payments are allocated to the Investment Options you indicated on your application, unless otherwise required by state law. If state law requires that your Purchase Payments must be allocated to Investment Options different than you requested, we will comply with state requirements. At the end of the Free Look period, we will allocate your Purchase Payments based on your allocation instructions.

You will find a complete description of the Free Look period and amount to be refunded that applies to your Contract on the Contract’s cover page.

Optional Riders are subject to availability. Before purchasing any optional Rider, make sure you understand all of the terms and conditions and consult with a qualified investment professional for advice on whether an optional Rider is appropriate for you. We reserve the right to restrict the purchase of an optional living benefit Rider to only Contract issue in the future.

Some broker/dealers may limit their clients from purchasing some optional benefits based upon the client’s age or other factors. You should work with your investment professional to decide whether an optional benefit is appropriate for you.

At initial purchase and during the entire time that you own an optional living benefit Rider, you must allocate your entire Contract Value to an asset allocation program or Investment Options we make available for these Riders. You may allocate your Contract Value according to the following requirements:

Currently, the allowable Asset Allocation Models and Investment Options are as follows:

You may also use the DCA Plus program in conjunction with an Asset Allocation Model or among the Investment Options listed above. You may transfer your entire Contract Value between an allowable Asset Allocation Model and allowable Investment Options.

Allowable Asset Allocation Models. You may transfer your entire Contract Value to a different Asset Allocation Model without affecting your Rider. However, if you change the allocation percentages within the Model you have selected, you will no longer be participating in the asset allocation program and your Rider will terminate. Further, if you allocate a portion of your Purchase Payments or Contract Value to an Investment Option that is not currently included in your Model (except in conjunction with the DCA Plus Program) your Rider will terminate. See the HOW YOUR INVESTMENTS ARE ALLOCATED— Portfolio Optimization section for information about the program.

Allowable Investment Options. You may allocate your entire Contract Value among any of the allowable Investment Options listed in the table above. If you allocate a portion of your Purchase Payments or Contract Value to an Asset Allocation Model or Investment Option that is not currently included as an allowable Investment Option (except in conjunction with the DCA Plus Program) your Rider will terminate.

By adding an optional living benefit Rider to your Contract, you agree to the above referenced investment allocation requirements for the entire period that you own a Rider. These requirements may limit the number of Investment Options that are otherwise available to you under your Contract. We reserve the right to add, remove or change allowable asset allocation programs or allowable Investment Options at any time.

We will send you written notice in the event any transaction made by you will involuntarily cause the Rider to terminate for failure to invest according to the Investment Allocation Requirements. However, you will have 30 calendar days after the date of our written notice (“30 day period”), to instruct us to take appropriate corrective action to continue participation in an allowable asset allocation program or allowable Investment Options to continue the Rider.

You may purchase this optional Rider on the Contract Date or on any Contract Anniversary (if available) if the age of each Annuitant is 85 years or younger on the date of purchase and you allocate your entire Contract Value according to the Investment Allocation Requirements.

Annual RMD Amount – The amount required to be distributed each Calendar Year for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Code Section 401(a)(9) (“Section 401(a)(9)”) and related Code provisions in effect as of the Rider Effective Date.

Protected Payment Amount – The maximum amount that can be withdrawn under this Rider without reducing the Protected Payment Base. The Protected Payment Amount on any day after the Rider Effective Date is equal to the lesser of:


	•	5% of the Protected Payment Base as of that day, less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year, or
	•	the Remaining Protected Balance as of that day.

Protected Payment Base – An amount used to determine the Protected Payment Amount. The Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged except as otherwise described under the provisions of this Rider.

Remaining Protected Balance – The amount available for future withdrawals made under this Rider.

Annual Credit – An amount added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance.

Maximum Credit Base – An amount equal to 200% of the Remaining Protected Balance as of the Rider Effective Date and any subsequent Purchase Payments made during the first year that the Rider is in effect plus 100% of all subsequent Purchase Payments made after the first year.

Reset Date – Any Contract Anniversary beginning with the first (1st) Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date on which an Automatic Reset or an Owner-Elected Reset occurs.

Initial Values – The initial Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance amounts are equal to:


	•	initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective Date is on the Contract Date, or
	•	Contract Value, if the Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.

The initial Protected Payment Amount on the Rider Effective Date is equal to 5% of the initial Protected Payment Base.

On any day, this Rider guarantees you can withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount, regardless of market performance, until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero (0). This Rider also provides for an amount (an “Annual Credit”) to be added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance if no withdrawals are taken.

In addition, beginning with the first (1^st) anniversary of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, the Rider provides for Automatic Annual Resets or Owner-Elected Resets of the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value.

If applicable, an Annual Credit is added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance prior to any Automatic Reset. If the Contract Value as of that Contract Anniversary is greater than the Protected Payment Base (which includes the Annual Credit amount) then the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be automatically reset to equal the Contract Value.

For purposes of this Rider, the term “withdrawal” includes any applicable withdrawal charges and charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes, if applicable. Amounts withdrawn under this Rider will reduce the Contract Value by the amount withdrawn and will be subject to the same conditions, limitations, restrictions and all other fees, charges and deductions, if applicable, as withdrawals otherwise made under the provisions of the Contract. Withdrawals under this Rider are not annuity payouts. Annuity payouts generally receive a more favorable tax treatment than other withdrawals.

If your Contract is a Qualified Contract, including a TSA/403(b) Contract, you are subject to restrictions on withdrawals you may take prior to a triggering event and you should consult your tax or legal advisor prior to purchasing this optional guarantee, the primary benefit of which is guaranteeing withdrawals. For additional information regarding withdrawals and triggering events, see the FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – IRAs and Qualified Plans section in this Prospectus.

While this Rider is in effect, you may withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount without reducing the Protected Payment Base, regardless of market performance, until the Remaining Protected Balance equals zero. Any portion of the Protected Payment Amount not withdrawn during a Contract Year may not be carried over to the next Contract Year.

If a withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged. The Remaining Protected Balance will decrease by the withdrawal amount immediately following the withdrawal.

If a withdrawal exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, we will adjust the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance immediately following the withdrawal, to the lesser of:


	•	the Contract Value immediately after the withdrawal, or
	•	the Remaining Protected Balance immediately prior to the withdrawal, less the withdrawal amount.

The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed the Protected Payment Amount.

No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a result of a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:


	•	such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at that time,
	•	you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,
	•	the Annual RMD Amount is based on this Contract only, and
	•	only RMD withdrawals are made from the Contract during the Contract Year.

The Remaining Protected Balance will decrease by the amount of each RMD withdrawal immediately following the RMD withdrawal.

See the FEDERAL TAX ISSUES—Qualified Contracts—Required Minimum Distributions section in this Prospectus.

If a withdrawal (including an RMD withdrawal) does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount and reduces the Contract Value to zero, the following will apply:


	•	if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of an Owner who is a Non-Natural Owner):


	•	was younger than age 59 1/2 when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider, after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, 5% of the Protected Payment Base will be paid each year until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero, or
	•	was age 59 1/2 or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, 5% of the Protected Payment Base will be paid each year until the day of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant.


	•	the payments of 5% of the Protected Payment Base will be paid under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency as elected by the Owner, but no less frequently than annually,
	•	no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the Contract,
	•	any Remaining Protected Balance will not be available for payment in a lump sum and will not be applied to provide payments under an Annuity Option,
	•	the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit, and
	•	any payments made to you of the Remaining Protected Balance may be taxable to you as ordinary income, and if you are under the age of 59 1/2, may be subject to an additional 10% federal tax penalty.

If the Owner or sole surviving Annuitant dies and the Contract Value is zero as of the date of death, there is no death benefit, however, any Remaining Protected Balance will be paid to the Beneficiary under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals and payment frequency (at least annually) then in effect at the time of the Owner’s or sole surviving Annuitant’s death. If, however, the Remaining Protected Balance would be paid over a period that exceeds the life expectancy of the Beneficiary, the pre-authorized withdrawal amount will be adjusted so that the withdrawal payments will be paid over a period that does not exceed the Beneficiary’s life expectancy.

If a withdrawal (including an RMD Withdrawal) reduces the Remaining Protected Balance to zero and Contract Value remains, the following will apply:

If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of an Owner who is a Non-Natural Owner):


	•	was younger than age 59 1/2 when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, this Rider will terminate, or
	•	was age 59 1/2 or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, you may elect to withdraw up to 5% of the Protected Payment Base each year until the day of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant. If an Automatic or Owner-Elected Reset occurs, the Remaining Protected Balance will be reinstated to an amount equal to the Contract Value as of that Contract Anniversary.

Before your Remaining Protected Balance is zero, if you took your first withdrawal before 59 1/2 and you would like to be eligible for lifetime payments under the Rider, an Automatic or Owner-Elected Reset must occur after age 59 1/2. See the Reset of Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance section of this Rider.

If a withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) made from the Contract exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, this Rider will terminate.

Any death benefit proceeds to be paid to the Beneficiary from remaining Contract Value will be paid according to the Death Benefit provisions of the Contract.

On each Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date, an Annual Credit will be added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance, as of that Contract Anniversary, if:


	•	no withdrawals have occurred after the Rider Effective Date,
	•	that Contract Anniversary is within the first 10 Contract Anniversaries, measured from the Rider Effective Date, and
	•	the Remaining Protected Balance is less than the Maximum Credit Base.


	•	the Remaining Protected Balance on the Rider Effective Date, or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, and
	•	the cumulative Purchase Payments received after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later,

Once a withdrawal has occurred, no Annual Credit will be added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary following the withdrawal. In addition, Annual Credit eligibility cannot be reinstated by any Automatic or Owner-Elected Reset.

Annual Credits will not increase your cost basis and, when distributed, may be recognizable as taxable ordinary income. The Annual Credit is not added to your Contract Value.

Regardless of which reset option is used, on and after each Reset Date, the provisions of this Rider shall apply in the same manner as they applied when the Rider was originally issued, except that eligibility for the Annual Credit cannot be reinstated with a Reset. The limitations and restrictions on Purchase Payments and withdrawals, the deduction of annual Charges and any future reset options available on and after the Reset Date, will again apply and will be measured from that Reset Date.

If a withdrawal is taken, the Annual Credit will no longer be applied and cannot be restarted with an Automatic or Owner-Elected Reset. In addition, an Automatic or Owner-Elected Reset will not start a new 10 year period for Annual Credit eligibility.

Automatic Reset. On each Contract Anniversary while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date, we will automatically reset the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value, if the Protected Payment Base, after any Annual Credit is applied, is less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. The annual charge percentage may change as a result of any Automatic Reset (See the CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges section in this Prospectus). A Reset does not begin a new 10 year period for the Annual Credit to be applied.

Automatic Reset – Opt-Out Election. If you are within 60 days after a Contract Anniversary on which an Automatic Reset is effective, you have the option to reinstate the Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance and annual charge percentage to their respective amounts immediately before the Automatic Reset. Any future Automatic Resets will continue in effect in accordance with the Automatic Reset paragraph above. If you elect this option, your opt-out election must be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within the same 60 day period after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset is effective.

Automatic Reset – Future Participation. You may elect not to participate in future Automatic Resets at any time. Your election must be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center, while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date. Such election will be effective for future Contract Anniversaries.

If you previously elected not to participate in Automatic Resets, you may re-elect to participate in future Automatic Resets at any time. Your election to resume participation must be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date. Such election will be effective for future Contract Anniversaries as described in the Automatic Reset paragraph above.

Owner-Elected Resets (Non-Automatic). You may, on any Contract Anniversary, elect to reset the Remaining Protected Balance and Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value. An Owner-Elected Reset may be elected while Automatic Resets are in effect. The annual charge percentage may change as a result of this reset.

If you elect this option, your election must be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within 60 days after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset is effective. The reset will be based on the Contract Value as of that Contract Anniversary. Your election of this option may result in a reduction in the Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance, Protected Payment Amount and any Annual Credit that may be applied. We will provide you with written confirmation of your election.

If we receive additional Purchase Payments after the Rider Effective Date, we will increase the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance by the amount of the Purchase Payments. However, for purposes of this Rider, we reserve the right to restrict additional Purchase Payments that result in a total of all Purchase Payments received on or after the later of the first (1^st) Contract Anniversary or most recent Reset Date to exceed $100,000 without our prior approval. This provision only applies if the Contract to which this Rider is attached permits Purchase Payments after the first (1st) Contract Anniversary, measured from the Contract Date.

If you annuitize the Contract at the maximum Annuity Date specified in your Contract and this Rider is still in effect at the time of your election and a Life Only annuity option is chosen, the annuity payments will be equal to the greater of:


	•	the Life Only annual payment amount based on the terms of your Contract, or
	•	5% of the Protected Payment Base in effect at the maximum Annuity Date.

If you annuitize the Contract at any time prior to the maximum Annuity Date specified in your Contract, your annuity payments will be determined in accordance with the terms of your Contract. The Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance and Protected Payment Amount under this Rider will not be used in determining any annuity payments.

If the Owner dies while this Rider is in effect and if the surviving spouse of the deceased Owner elects to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms, the surviving spouse may continue to take withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount under this Rider, until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero.

The surviving spouse may elect any of the reset options available under this Rider for subsequent Contract Anniversaries. If an election to reset is made at age 59 1/2 or older, whether by an Automatic Reset or an Owner-Elected Reset, then the provisions of this Rider will continue in full force and in effect for the surviving spouse.

You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate on the earliest of:


	•	the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,

	•	the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of an Owner who is a Non-Natural Owner), was younger than 59 1/2 when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later,
	•	the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant,
	•	for Contracts with a Non-Natural Owner, the date of the first death of an Annuitant, including Primary, Joint and Contingent Annuitants,
	•	the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract,
	•	the day we are notified of a change in ownership of the Contract if the Contract is Non-Qualified, or
	•	the Annuity Date.

The Rider will not terminate the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of an Owner who is a Non-Natural Owner) was age 59 1/2 or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later. In this case, the Rider will terminate the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant.

The Rider and the Contract will not terminate the day the Contract Value is zero and you begin taking pre-authorized withdrawals of 5% of the Protected Payment Base. In this case, the Rider and the Contract will terminate:


	•	the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of an Owner who is Non-Natural Owner), was younger than 59 1/2 when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, or


	•	the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of an Owner who is a Non-Natural Owner) was age 59 1/2 or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later.

If this Rider is terminated as a result of having any portion of the Contract Value no longer allocated according to the Investment Allocation Requirements, you must wait until a Contract Anniversary that is at least one (1) year from the Effective Date of termination before this Rider may be purchased again (if available).

Hypothetical sample calculations are in the attached APPENDIX A: FOUNDATION 10 RIDER SAMPLE CALCULATIONS in this Prospectus. The examples are based on certain hypothetical assumptions and are for example purposes only. The examples are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns.

Subject to availability, you may elect to exchange the Flexible Lifetime Income Rider (Joint) for the Flexible Lifetime Income Rider (Single) on any Contract Anniversary. The initial Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance under the new Rider will be equal to the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. Your election of this option may result in a reduction in the Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance, Protected Payment Amount and any Annual Credit that may be applied. If you elect an exchange, you will be subject to the charge for the new Rider in effect at the time of the exchange.


	Annual RMD Amount—The amount required to be distributed each Calendar Year for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Code Section 401(a)(9) (“Section 401(a)(9)”) and related Code provisions in effect as of the Rider Effective Date.

	Protected Payment Amount—The maximum amount that can be withdrawn under this Rider without reducing the Protected Payment Base. The Protected Payment Amount on any day after the Rider Effective Date is equal to the lesser of:


	•	5% of the Protected Payment Base as of that day, less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year, or

	•	the Remaining Protected Balance as of that day.


	Protected Payment Base—An amount used to determine the Protected Payment Amount. The Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged except as otherwise described under the provisions of this Rider.

	Remaining Protected Balance—The amount available for future withdrawals made under this Rider.

	Annual Credit—An amount added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance.

	Reset Date—Any Contract Anniversary beginning with the first (1st) Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date on which an Automatic Reset or an Owner-Elected Reset occurs.

	Initial Values—The initial Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance amounts are equal to:


	•	initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective Date is on the Contract Date, or

	•	Contract Value, if the Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.


	The initial Protected Payment Amount on the Rider Effective Date is equal to 5% of the initial Protected Payment Base.

On any day, this Rider guarantees you can withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount, regardless of market performance, until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero (0). Withdrawals up to the Protected Payment Amount may continue after the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero (0) if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of an Owner who is a Non-Natural Owner) was age 59 1/2 or older when the first withdrawal was taken after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later. This Rider also provides for an amount (an “Annual Credit”) to be added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance.

In addition, beginning with the first (1st) anniversary of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, the Rider provides for Automatic Annual Resets or Owner-Elected Resets of the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value.

If your Contract is a Qualified Contract, including a TSA/403(b) Contract, you are subject to restrictions on withdrawals you may take prior to a triggering event and you should consult your tax or legal advisor prior to purchasing this optional guarantee, the primary benefit of which is guaranteeing withdrawals. For additional information regarding withdrawals and triggering events, see the FEDERAL TAX ISSUES— IRAs and Qualified Plans section in the Prospectus.


	•	the Contract Value immediately after the withdrawal, or

	•	the Remaining Protected Balance immediately prior to the withdrawal, less the withdrawal amount.

The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed the Protected Payment Amount.

For information regarding taxation of withdrawals, see the FEDERAL TAX ISSUES section of this prospectus.

No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a result of a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:


	•	such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at that time,

	•	you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,


	•	the Annual RMD Amount is based on this Contract only, and

	•	only RMD withdrawals are made from the Contract during the Contract Year.

The Remaining Protected Balance will decrease by the amount of each RMD withdrawal immediately following the RMD withdrawal.

See the FEDERAL TAX ISSUES—Qualified Contracts—Required Minimum Distributions section in this Prospectus.

If a withdrawal (including an RMD withdrawal) does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount and reduces the Contract Value to zero, the following will apply:


	•	if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of an Owner who is a Non-Natural Owner):


	•	was younger than age 59 1/2 when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider, after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, 5% of the Protected Payment Base will be paid each year until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero, or

	•	was age 59 1/2 or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, 5% of the Protected Payment Base will be paid each year until the day of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant.


	•	the payments of 5% of the Protected Payment Base will be paid under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency as elected by the Owner, but no less frequently than annually,

	•	no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the Contract,

	•	any Remaining Protected Balance will not be available for payment in a lump sum and will not be applied to provide payments under an Annuity Option,

	•	the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit, and

	•	any payments made to you of the Remaining Protected Balance may be taxable to you as ordinary income, and if you are under the age of 59 1/2, may be subject to an additional 10% federal tax penalty.

If a withdrawal (including an RMD Withdrawal) reduced the Remaining Protected Balance to zero and Contract Value remains, the following will apply:

If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of an Owner who is a Non-Natural Owner):


	•	was younger than age 59 1/2 when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, this Rider will terminate, or

	•	was age 59 1/2 or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, you may elect to withdraw up to 5% of the Protected Payment Base each year until the day of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant. If an Automatic or Owner-Elected Reset occurs, the Remaining Protected Balance will be reinstated to an amount equal to the Contract Value as of that Contract Anniversary.

If a withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) made from the Contract exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, this Rider will terminate.

Any death benefit proceeds to be paid to the Beneficiary from remaining Contract Value will be paid according to the Death Benefit provisions of the Contract.

On each Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date, an Annual Credit will be added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance, as of that Contract Anniversary, if:


	•	no withdrawals have occurred after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, and

	•	that Contract Anniversary is within the first ten (10) Contract Anniversaries, measured from the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later.


	•	the Remaining Protected Balance on the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, and

	•	the cumulative Purchase Payments received after the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, whichever is later,

Once a withdrawal has occurred, no Annual Credit will be added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary following the withdrawal, unless an Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset occurs.

Annual Credits will not increase your cost basis and, when distributed, may be recognizable as taxable ordinary income. The Annual Credit is not added to your Contract Value.

Regardless of which reset option is used, on and after each Reset Date, the provisions of this Rider shall apply in the same manner as they applied when the Rider was originally issued. Eligibility for any Annual Credit, the limitations and restrictions on Purchase Payments and withdrawals, the deduction of annual Charges and any future reset options available on and after the Reset Date, will again apply and will be measured from that Reset Date.

Automatic Reset. On each Contract Anniversary while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date, we will automatically reset the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value, if the Protected Payment Base, after any Annual Credit is applied, is less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. The annual charge percentage may change as a result of any Automatic Reset (See the CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS— Optional Rider Charges section in this Prospectus).

Automatic Reset— Opt-Out Election. If you are within 60 days after a Contract Anniversary on which an Automatic Reset is effective, you have the option to reinstate the Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance and annual charge percentage to their respective amounts immediately before the Automatic Reset. Any future Automatic Resets will continue in effect in accordance with the Automatic Reset paragraph above.

If you elect this option, your opt-out election must be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within the same 60 day period after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset is effective.

Automatic Reset— Future Participation. You may elect not to participate in future Automatic Resets at any time. Your election must be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center, while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date. Such election will be effective for future Contract Anniversaries.

If we receive additional Purchase Payments after the Rider Effective Date, we will increase the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance by the amount of the Purchase Payments. However, for purposes of this Rider, we reserve the right to restrict additional Purchase Payments that result in a total of all Purchase Payments received on or after the later of the first (1st) Contract Anniversary or most recent Reset Date to exceed $100,000 without our prior approval. This provision only applies if the Contract to which this Rider is attached, permits Purchase Payments after the first (1st) Contract Anniversary, measured from the Contract Date.


	•	the Life Only annual payment amount based on the terms of your Contract, or

	•	5% of the Protected Payment Base in effect at the maximum Annuity Date.

You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate on the earliest of:


	•	the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated according the Investment Allocation Requirements,

	•	the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of an Owner who is a Non-Natural Owner), was younger than 59 1/2 when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later,

	•	the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant,

	•	for Contracts with a Non-Natural Owner, the date of the first death of an Annuitant, including Primary, Joint and Contingent Annuitants,

	•	the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract,

	•	the day we are notified of a change in ownership of the Contract if the Contract is Non-Qualified, or

	•	the Annuity Date.

under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later. In this case, the Rider will terminate the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant.


	•	the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of an Owner who is Non-Natural Owner), was younger than 59 1/2 when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, or

	•	the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of an Owner who is a Non-Natural Owner) was age 59 1/2 or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later.

Hypothetical sample calculations are in the attached APPENDIX B: FLEXIBLE LIFETIME INCOME RIDER (SINGLE AND JOINT) SAMPLE CALCULATIONS to this Prospectus. The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical assumptions and are for example purposes only. The examples are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns.

You may purchase this optional Rider on the Contract Date or on any Contract Anniversary (if available) you meet the following eligibility requirements:


	•	Non-Qualified Contract (this Rider is not available if the Owner is a trust or other entity), or

	•	Qualified Contract under Code Section 408(a), 408(k), 408A, 408(p) or 403(b),


	•	you allocate your entire Contract Value according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,

	•	both Designated Lives must be at least age 59 1/2 and not older than age 85 on the Rider Effective Date,

	•	the Contract must be structured so that upon the death of one Designated Life, the surviving Designated Life may retain or assume ownership of the Contract, and

	•	any Annuitant must be a Designated Life.

For purposes of meeting the eligibility requirements, Designated Lives must be any one of the following:


	•	a sole Owner with the Owner’s Spouse designated as the sole primary Beneficiary,

	•	Joint Owners, where the Owners are each other’s Spouses, or

	•	if the Contract is issued as a custodial owned IRA, the beneficial owner must be the Annuitant and the Annuitant’s Spouse must be designated as the sole primary Beneficiary under the Contract. The custodian may be designated as sole primary beneficiary provided that the Spouse of the beneficial owner is the sole primary beneficiary of the custodial account.

If this Rider is added on a Contract Anniversary, naming your spouse as the Beneficiary to meet eligibility requirements will not be considered a change of Annuitant on the Contract.

Subject to availability, you may elect to exchange the Flexible Lifetime Income Rider (Single) for the Flexible Lifetime Income Rider (Joint) on any Contract Anniversary. The initial Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance under the new Rider will be equal to the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. Your election of this option may result in a reduction in the Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance, Protected Payment Amount and any Annual Credit that may be applied. If you elect an exchange, you will be subject to the charge for the new Rider in effect at the time of the exchange.


	Annual RMD Amount—The amount required to be distributed each Calendar Year for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Code Section 401(a)(9) (“Section 401(a)(9)”) and related Code provisions in effect as of the Rider Effective Date.

	Designated Lives (each a “Designated Life”) — Designated Lives must be natural persons who are each other’s spouses on the Rider Effective Date. Designated Lives will remain unchanged while this Rider is in effect.

	To be eligible for lifetime benefits, a Designated Life must:


	•	be the Owner (or the Annuitant, in the case of a custodial owned IRA), or

	•	remain the Spouse of the other Designated Life and be the first in line of succession, as determined under the Contract, for payment of any death benefit.


	Protected Payment Amount—The maximum amount that can be withdrawn under this Rider without reducing the Protected Payment Base. The Protected Payment Amount on any day after the Rider Effective Date is equal to 5% of the Protected Payment Base as of that day, less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year.

	Protected Payment Base—An amount used to determine the Protected Payment Amount. The Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged except as otherwise described under the provisions of this Rider.

	Remaining Protected Balance—The amount available for future withdrawals made under this Rider.

	Annual Credit—An amount added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance.

	Reset Date—Any Contract Anniversary beginning with the first (1st) Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date on which an Automatic Reset or an Owner-Elected Reset occurs.

	Initial Values—The initial Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance amounts are equal to:


	•	initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective Date is on the Contract Date, or

	•	Contract Value, if the Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.


	The initial Protected Payment Amount on the Rider Effective Date is equal to 5% of the initial Protected Payment Base.

	Spouse—The Owner’s spouse who is treated as the Owner’s spouse pursuant to federal law.

	Surviving Spouse—The surviving spouse of a deceased Owner.

On any day, this Rider guarantees you can withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount, regardless of market performance, until the death of all Designated Lives eligible for lifetime benefits. This Rider also provides for an amount (an “Annual Credit”) to be added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance.

In addition, on each Contract Anniversary while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date, the Rider provides for Automatic Annual Resets or Owner-Elected Resets of the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value.

guarantee, the primary benefit of which is guaranteeing withdrawals. For additional information regarding withdrawals and triggering events, see the FEDERAL TAX ISSUES— IRAs and Qualified Plans section in this Prospectus.

While this Rider is in effect, you may withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount without reducing the Protected Payment Base, regardless of market performance, until the death of all Designated Lives eligible for lifetime benefits. Any portion of the Protected Payment Amount not withdrawn during a Contract Year may not be carried over to the next Contract Year.


	•	the Contract Value immediately after the withdrawal, or

	•	the Remaining Protected Balance immediately prior to the withdrawal, less the withdrawal amount.

The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed the Protected Payment Amount.

For information regarding taxation of withdrawals, see the FEDERAL TAX ISSUES section of this Prospectus.

No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a result of a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:


	•	such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at that time,

	•	you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,

	•	the Annual RMD Amount is based on this Contract only, and

	•	only RMD withdrawals are made from the Contract during the Contract Year.

The Remaining Protected Balance will decrease by the amount of each RMD withdrawal immediately following the RMD withdrawal.

See the FEDERAL TAX ISSUES—Qualified Contracts—Required Minimum Distributions section in this Prospectus.

If a withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount (or is an RMD withdrawal) and reduces the Contract Value to zero, the following will apply:


	•	5% of the Protected Payment Base will be paid each year until the death of all Designated Lives eligible for lifetime benefits,

	•	the payments of 5% of the Protected Payment Base will be paid under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency as elected by the Owner, but no less frequently than annually,

	•	no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the Contract,

	•	any Remaining Protected Balance will not be available for payment in a lump sum and will not be applied to provide payments under an Annuity Option,

	•	the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit, and

	•	any payments made to you of the Remaining Protected Balance may be taxable to you as ordinary income.

If the surviving Designated Life eligible for lifetime benefits dies and the Contract Value is zero as of the date of death, there is no death benefit, however, any Remaining Protected Balance will be paid to the Beneficiary under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals and payment frequency (at least annually) then in effect at the time of the death of the surviving Designated Life eligible for lifetime benefits. If, however, the Remaining Protected Balance would be paid over a period that exceeds the life expectancy of the Beneficiary, the pre-authorized withdrawal amount will be adjusted so that the withdrawal payments will be paid over a period that does not exceed the Beneficiary’s life expectancy.

If a withdrawal (including an RMD Withdrawal) reduced the Remaining Protected Balance to zero and Contract Value remains, the following will apply:


	•	if a withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) made from the Contract exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, the Rider will terminate, and

	•	any death benefit proceeds to be paid to the Beneficiary from remaining Contract Value will be paid according to the Death Benefit provisions of the Contract.

On each Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date, an Annual Credit will be added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance, as of that Contract Anniversary, if:


	•	no withdrawals have occurred after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, and

	•	that Contract Anniversary is within the first 10 Contract Anniversaries, measured from the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later.


	•	the Remaining Protected Balance on the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, and

	•	the cumulative Purchase Payments received after the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, whichever is later,

Once a withdrawal has occurred, no Annual Credit will be added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary following the withdrawal, unless an Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset occurs.

Annual Credits will not increase your cost basis and, when distributed, may be recognizable as taxable ordinary income. The Annual Credit is not added to your Contract Value.

Regardless of which reset option is used, on and after each Reset Date, the provisions of this Rider shall apply in the same manner as they applied when the Rider was originally issued. Eligibility for any Annual Credit, the limitations and restrictions on Purchase Payments and withdrawals, the deduction of annual Charges and any future reset options available on and after the Reset Date, will again apply and will be measured from that Reset Date.

Automatic Reset. On each Contract Anniversary while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date, we will automatically reset the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value, if the Protected Payment Base, after any Annual Credit is applied, is less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. The annual charge percentage may change as a result of any Automatic Reset (See the CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS— Optional Rider Charges section in this Prospectus).

If we receive additional Purchase Payments after the Rider Effective Date, we will increase the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance by the amount of the Purchase Payments. However, for purposes of this Rider, we reserve the right to restrict additional Purchase Payments that result in a total of all Purchase Payments received on or after the later of the first (1st) Contract Anniversary or most recent Reset Date to exceed $100,000 without our prior approval. This provision only applies if the Contract to which this Rider is attached, permits Purchase Payments after the first (1st) Contract Anniversary, measured from the Contract Date.


	•	the Life Only annual payment amount based on the terms of your Contract, or

	•	5% of the Protected Payment Base in effect at the maximum Annuity Date.

If the Owner dies while this Rider is in effect and if the Surviving Spouse (who is also a Designated Life eligible for lifetime benefits) elects to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms, the Surviving Spouse may continue to take withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount under this Rider, until the day of the death of such Surviving Spouse.

Changes to the Contract Owner, Annuitant and/or Beneficiary designations and changes in marital status may adversely affect the benefits of this Rider. A particular change may make a Designated Life ineligible to receive lifetime income benefits under this Rider. As a result, the Rider may remain in effect and you may pay for benefits that you will not receive. You are strongly advised to work with your investment professional and consider your options prior to making any Owner, Annuitant and/or Beneficiary changes to your Contract.

You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate on the earliest of:


	•	the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,

	•	the day of death of all Designated Lives eligible for lifetime benefits,

	•	upon the death of the first Designated Life, if a death benefit is payable and a Surviving Spouse who chooses to continue the Contract is not a Designated Life eligible for lifetime benefits,

	•	upon the death of the first Designated Life, if a death benefit is payable and the Contract is not continued by a Surviving Spouse who is a Designated Life eligible for lifetime benefits,

	•	if both Designated Lives are Joint Owners and there is a change in marital status, the Rider will terminate upon the death of the first Designated Life who is a Contract Owner,

	•	the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract,

	•	the day that neither Designated Life is an Owner (or Annuitant, in the case of a custodial owned IRA), or

	•	the Annuity Date.


	•	all Designated Lives eligible for lifetime benefits, or

	•	the first Designated life who is a Contract Owner if both Designated Lives are Joint Owners and there is a change in marital status,

if, at the time of these events, the Contract Value is zero and we are making pre-authorized withdrawals of 5% of the Protected Payment Base. In this case, the Rider will terminate when the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero.

You may purchase the optional GPA 3 Rider on the Contract Date or on any subsequent Contract Anniversary if:


	•	the age of each Annuitant is 80 years or younger on the date of purchase,

	•	the date of the purchase is at least 10 years before your selected Annuity Date, and

	•	you allocate your entire Contract Value according to the Investment Allocation Requirements.

You may elect to exchange an existing GPA 5 Rider and purchase the GPA 3 Rider, if available, on any Contract Anniversary. The GPA 3 Guaranteed Protection Amount will be equal to the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. Your election of this option may result in a reduction in the Guaranteed Protection Amount. In addition, you will be subject to the charge for the new Rider in effect at the time of the exchange.

If you purchase the GPA 3 Rider, the Rider will remain in effect, unless otherwise terminated, for a 10-year period (the “Term”) beginning on the Effective Date of the Rider.

On the last day of the Term, we will add an additional amount to your Contract Value if, on that day, the Contract Value is less than the Guaranteed Protection Amount. The additional amount will be equal to the difference between the Contract Value on the last day of the Term and the Guaranteed Protection Amount. The additional amount added to the Contract Value will be considered earnings and allocated to your Investment Options according to the allocations used in your most recent asset

allocation program. Additional Purchase Payments that are not part of the Guaranteed Protection Amount (Purchase Payments made after the first year of a Term and not included in a Step-Up) will not be included in the benefit calculation at the end of Term.

The Guaranteed Protection Amount is equal to (a) plus (b) minus (c) as indicated below:


	(a)	is the Contract Value at the start of the Term,


	(b)	is the amount of each subsequent Purchase Payment received during the first year of the Term, and


	(c)	is a pro rata adjustment for withdrawals made from the Contract during the Term. The adjustment for each withdrawal is calculated by multiplying the Guaranteed Protection Amount prior to the withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of the withdrawal, including any applicable withdrawal charges, premium taxes, and/or other taxes, to the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal.

For purposes of determining the Contract Value at the start of the Term, if the Effective Date of the Rider is the Contract Date, the Contract Value is equal to the initial Purchase Payment. If the Effective Date of the Rider is a Contract Anniversary, the Contract Value is equal to the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. Any subsequent Purchase Payments received after the first year of a Term are not included in the Guaranteed Protection Amount.

If, on the last day of the Term, the Contract is annuitized, the first death of an Owner or the death of the last surviving Annuitant occurs, or a full withdrawal is made, the Contract Value will reflect any additional amount owed under the GPA 3 Rider before the payment of any annuity or death benefits, or full withdrawal. No additional amount will be made if the Contract Value on the last day of the Term is greater than or equal to the Guaranteed Protection Amount.

On any Contract Anniversary beginning with the third (3^rd) anniversary of the Effective Date of this Rider and before the Annuity Date, you may elect to increase (“Step-Up”) your Guaranteed Protection Amount.



	•	your election of a Step-Up must be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within 60 days after the Contract Anniversary on which the Step-Up is effective,

	•	the Guaranteed Protection Amount will be equal to your Contract Value as of the Effective Date of the Step-Up (“Step-Up Date”),
	•	a new 10-year Term will begin as of the Step-Up Date, and
	•	you may not elect another Step-Up until on or after the 3^rd anniversary of the latest Step-Up Date.

We will not permit a Step-Up if the new 10-year Term will extend beyond the Annuity Date.

The GPA 3 annual charge percentage may increase if you elect a Step-Up, but it will never be more than the maximum annual charge percentage associated with the Rider. If you do not elect any Step-Up of the Guaranteed Protection Amount during the Term of the Rider, your GPA 3 annual charge percentage will remain the same as it was on the Effective Date of the Rider.

If the Owner dies during the Term and the surviving spouse of the deceased Owner elects to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms, then the provisions of the Rider will continue until the end of the Term.

The Rider will automatically terminate at the end of the Term, or, if earlier on:


	•	the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,
	•	the day we receive notification from the Owner to terminate the Rider,
	•	the date a full withdrawal of the amount available for withdrawal is made under the Contract,
	•	the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the last surviving Annuitant,
	•	for Contracts with a Non-Natural Owner, the date of the first death of an Annuitant, including Primary, Joint and Contingent Annuitants,
	•	the date the Contract is terminated according to the provisions of the Contract, or
	•	the Annuity Date.

If your request to terminate the Rider is received at our Service Center within 60 days after a Contract Anniversary, the Rider will terminate on that Contract Anniversary. If your request to terminate the Rider is received at our Service Center more than 60 days after a Contract Anniversary, the Rider will terminate the day we receive the request.

If the Rider is terminated, you must wait until a Contract Anniversary that is at least one (1) year from the Effective Date of the termination before the Rider may be purchased again (if available).

Hypothetical sample calculations are in the attached APPENDIX C: GUARANTEED PROTECTION ADVANTAGE 3 (GPA 3) and GUARANTEED PROTECTION ADVANTAGE 5 (GPA 5) RIDER SAMPLE CALCULATIONS in this Prospectus. The examples are based on certain hypothetical assumptions and are for example purposes only. The examples are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns.

You may purchase the optional GPA 5 Rider on the Contract Date or on any subsequent Contract Anniversary if:


	•	the age of each Annuitant is 80 years or younger on the date of purchase,

	•	the date of the purchase is at least 10 years before your selected Annuity Date, and

	•	you allocate your entire Contract Value according to the Investment Allocation Requirements.

While this Rider is in full force and in effect, you may continue to make withdrawals from the Contract in accordance with the Withdrawal provisions of the Contract. Withdrawals made from the Contract during the Term will reduce the Guaranteed Protection Amount.

If you purchase the GPA 5 Rider, the Rider will remain in effect, unless otherwise terminated, for a 10-year period (the “Term”) beginning on the Effective Date of the Rider.

On the last day of the Term, we will add an additional amount to your Contract Value if, on that day, the Contract Value is less than a specified amount (the “Guaranteed Protection Amount”). The additional amount will be equal to the difference between the Contract Value on the last day of the Term and the Guaranteed Protection Amount. The additional amount added to the Contract Value will be considered earnings and allocated to your Investment Options according to the allocations used in your most recent asset allocation program.

The Guaranteed Protection Amount is equal to (a) plus (b) minus (c) as indicated below:


	(a)	is the Contract Value at the start of the Term,

	(b)	is the amount of each subsequent Purchase Payment received during the first year of the Term, and


	(c)	is a pro rata adjustment for withdrawals made from the Contract during the Term. The adjustment for each withdrawal is calculated by multiplying the Guaranteed Protection Amount prior to the withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of the withdrawal, including any applicable withdrawal charges, premium taxes, and/or other taxes, to the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal.

For purposes of determining the Contract Value at the start of the Term, if the Effective Date of the Rider is the Contract Date, the Contract Value is equal to the initial Purchase Payment. If the Effective Date of the Rider is a Contract Anniversary, the Contract Value is equal to the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. Any subsequent Purchase Payments received after the first year of the Term are not included in the Guaranteed Protection Amount. However, the Rider charge will be based on the Contract Value which may include any subsequent Purchase Payments that are not included in the Guaranteed Protection Amount.

If, on the last day of the Term, the Contract is annuitized, the first death of an Owner or the death of the last surviving Annuitant occurs, or a full withdrawal is made, the Contract Value will reflect any additional amount owed under the GPA 5 Rider before the payment of any annuity or death benefits, or full withdrawal. No additional amount will be made if the Contract Value on the last day of the Term is greater than or equal to the Guaranteed Protection Amount.

On any Contract Anniversary beginning with the fifth (5^th) anniversary of the Effective Date of this Rider and before the Annuity Date, you may elect to increase (“Step-Up”) your Guaranteed Protection Amount.



	•	your election of a Step-Up must be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within 60 days after the Contract Anniversary on which the Step-Up is effective,


	•	the Guaranteed Protection Amount will be equal to your Contract Value as of the Effective Date of the Step-Up (“Step-Up Date”),

	•	a new 10-year Term will begin as of the Step-Up Date, and

	•	you may not elect another Step-Up until on or after the 5^th anniversary of the latest Step-Up Date.

We will not permit a Step-Up if the new 10-year Term will extend beyond the Annuity Date.

The Guaranteed Protection Charge (“GPA 5 Charge”) may change if you elect a Step-Up, but it will never be more than the GPA 5 Charge being charged under the then current terms and conditions of the Rider. If you do not elect any Step-Up of the Guaranteed Protection Amount during the lifetime of the Rider, your GPA 5 Charge will remain the same as it was on the Effective Date of the Rider.

The Rider will automatically terminate at the end of the Term, or, if earlier on:


	•	the Contract Anniversary immediately following the date any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,

	•	the Contract Anniversary immediately following the date we receive notification from the Owner to terminate the Rider,

	•	the date a full withdrawal of the amount available for withdrawal is made under the Contract,

	•	the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the last surviving Annuitant,

	•	for Contracts with a Non-Natural Owner, the date of the first death of an Annuitant, including Primary, Joint and Contingent Annuitants,

	•	the date the Contract is terminated according to the provisions of the Contract, or

	•	the Annuity Date.

If your request to terminate the Rider is received at our Service Center within 60 days after a Contract Anniversary, the Rider will terminate on that Contract Anniversary. If your request to terminate the GPA 5 Rider is received at our Service Center more than 60 days after a Contract Anniversary, the GPA 5 Rider will terminate the day we receive the request.

If the GPA 5 Rider is terminated, you must wait until a Contract Anniversary that is at least 1 year from the Effective Date of the termination before the GPA 5 Rider may be purchased again (if available).

You may purchase the GIA Plus Rider on the Contract Date or on any Contract Anniversary. You may purchase the GIA Plus Rider only if the age of each Annuitant is 80 years or younger on the date of purchase and you allocate your entire Contract Value according to the Investment Allocation Requirements.

If you purchase the optional GIA Plus Rider, you may, prior to the Annuity Date, choose any of the Annuity Options described in your Contract, or you may choose the GIA Plus Annuity Option provided this Rider has been in effect for at least ten (10) years from its Effective Date. If you choose the GIA Plus Annuity Option, you must choose fixed annuity payments and the entire amount available for annuitization at the time you convert to the GIA Plus Annuity Option must be annuitized. The guaranteed income purchased per $1,000 of the net amount applied to the annuity payments will be based on an effective annual interest rate of 2.0% and the 1996 US Annuity 2000 Mortality Table with the age set back eight (8) years.

Annuity Payments—The annuity payments that may be elected under the GIA Plus Annuity Option are:

On the Annuity Date, the Net Amount applied to the annuity payments under the GIA Plus Annuity Option will be equal to the greater of the Guaranteed Income Base on that day or the GIA Plus Step-Up Value on that day, less the following:


	•	applicable withdrawal charges resulting from the conversion to the GIA Plus Annuity Option,

	•	applicable annual charges for expenses related to other optional benefit riders attached to the Contract that are in effect as of the Annuity Date, and

	•	charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes.

If you elect the GIA Plus Annuity Option, the waiver of withdrawal charges as described in the Contract will not apply. (See the CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS—Withdrawal Charge section in this Prospectus)

For information regarding taxation of annuity payments, see the FEDERAL TAX ISSUES section of this Prospectus.

Initial Values – The Guaranteed Income Base, GIA Plus Withdrawal Base, GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount and GIA Plus Step-Up Value are values used in determining the Net Amount applied on the Annuity Date to provide payments under the GIA Plus Annuity Option.


	•	if this Rider is effective on the Contract Date, the Guaranteed Income Base is equal to the initial Purchase Payment.

	•	if this Rider is effective on a Contract Anniversary, the Guaranteed Income Base is equal to the Contract Value on that day.

	•	if this Rider is effective on the Contract Date, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base is equal to the total Purchase Payments received in the first 60 days since the Rider Effective Date.

	•	if this Rider is effective on a Contract Anniversary, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base is equal to the Contract Value on that day plus any Purchase Payments received in the first 60 days since the Rider Effective Date.

	•	the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for the Contract Year beginning on the Rider Effective Date is equal to 5% of the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base.

	•	the GIA Plus Step-Up Value is equal to the Contract Value on the Rider Effective Date.

The GIA Plus Withdrawal Base and GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount after the Rider Effective Date are recalculated only on each subsequent Contract Anniversary.

Subsequent Values – The Guaranteed Income Base, GIA Plus Withdrawal Base, GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount and GIA Plus Step-Up Value after the Rider Effective Date are determined as follows:

Limitation on Subsequent Purchase Payments – For purposes of this Rider, we reserve the right to restrict additional Purchase Payments that result in a total of all Purchase Payments received on or after the first (1^st) Contract Anniversary from the Effective Date of the Rider to exceed $100,000 without our prior approval. This provision only applies if the Contract to which this Rider is attached, permits Purchase Payments after the first (1^st) Contract Anniversary, measured from the Contract Date.

Guaranteed Income Base – On any day after the Rider Effective Date, the Guaranteed Income Base is equal to:


	•	the Guaranteed Income Base on the prior day, multiplied by a daily factor of 1.000133680 which is equivalent to increasing the Guaranteed Income Base at an annual growth rate of 5%, plus

	•	Purchase Payments received by us on that day, less

	•	adjustments for withdrawals made on that day.

The adjustment for each withdrawal is calculated by multiplying the Guaranteed Income Base immediately prior to the withdrawal by the percentage decrease in Contract Value as a result of the withdrawal.

However, on each Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date, if there is at least one withdrawal during the prior Contract Year and the cumulative withdrawals for that Contract Year do not exceed the sum of:


	•	the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for that Contract Year, and

	•	any remaining dollar amount of the prior Contract Year’s GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount,

the Guaranteed Income Base as of that Contract Anniversary will be reset to equal:


	•	the Guaranteed Income Base on the Rider Effective Date or prior Contract Anniversary, whichever is later, increased at an annual growth rate of 5%, plus

	•	the amount of any subsequent Purchase Payments received by us during the prior Contract Year, each increased at an annual growth rate of 5% from the effective date of that Purchase Payment, less

	•	the amount of cumulative withdrawals during the prior Contract Year.


	•	the Contract Anniversary prior to the youngest Annuitant’s 81^st birthday, or

	•	the day this Rider terminates.

GIA Plus Withdrawal Base – On each Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base is equal to:


	•	the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base determined on the Rider Effective Date, plus

	•	the amount of any subsequent Purchase Payments received by us after the Rider Effective Date, up through the day immediately prior to that Contract Anniversary.

GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount – On each Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for the Contract Year beginning on that Contract Anniversary is equal to 5% of the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base as of that Contract Anniversary.

GIA Plus Step-Up Value – On any day after the Rider Effective Date, the GIA Plus Step-Up Value is equal to:


	•	the GIA Plus Step-Up Value as of the prior day, plus

	•	Purchase Payments received by us on that day, less

	•	adjustment for withdrawals made on that day.

The adjustment for each withdrawal is calculated by multiplying the GIA Plus Step-Up Value immediately prior to the withdrawal by the percentage decrease in Contract Value as a result of that withdrawal.

On any Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date and prior to the youngest Annuitant’s 81^st birthday, the GIA Plus Step-Up Value is set equal to the greater of:


	•	the Contract Value as of that Contract Anniversary, or

	•	the GIA Plus Step-Up Value immediately prior to that Contract Anniversary.

The GIA Plus Step-Up Value will then be adjusted for any Purchase Payments or withdrawals on that Contract Anniversary in accordance with the first paragraph of this subsection.

The GIA Plus Step-Up Value on each Contract Anniversary on and after the youngest Annuitant’s 81^st birthday is equal to the GIA Plus Step-Up Value immediately prior to the Contract Anniversary preceding that 81^st birthday, adjusted for any Purchase Payments and withdrawals since that anniversary.

Partial Conversion of Net Contract Value for Annuity Payments – If a portion of the Net Contract Value (Contract Value less Contract Debt) is converted to provide payments under an Annuity Option described in the Contract at any time before you annuitize under the GIA Plus Annuity Option, the amount converted will be considered a “withdrawal” for purposes of determining withdrawal adjustments to the Guaranteed Income Base and GIA Plus Step-Up Value. A withdrawal charge may also apply.

If the Owner dies while this Rider is in effect and if the surviving spouse of the deceased Owner elects to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms, then the provisions of this Rider will continue, unless otherwise terminated.

Except as otherwise provided below, the GIA Plus Rider will remain in effect until the earlier of:


	•	the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated according to the Investment Allocation Requirements.

	•	the day we receive notification from you to terminate the Rider,

	•	the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant,

	•	for Contracts with a Non-Natural Owner, the date of the first death of an Annuitant, including Primary, Joint and Contingent Annuitants,

	•	the date the Contract is terminated in accordance with the terms of the Contract, or

	•	the Annuity Date.

Upon your request, the GIA Plus Rider may be terminated at any time. If your request to terminate the GIA Plus Rider is received at our Service Center within 60 days after a Contract Anniversary, the GIA Plus Rider will terminate on that Contract Anniversary. If your request to terminate the GIA Plus Rider is received at our Service Center more than 60 days after a Contract Anniversary, the GIA Plus Rider will terminate the day we receive the request.

If the GIA Plus Rider is terminated, you must wait until a Contract Anniversary that is at least 1 year from the Effective Date of the termination before the GIA Plus Rider may be purchased again (if available).

Hypothetical sample calculations are in the attached APPENDIX D: GUARANTEED INCOME ADVANTAGE PLUS RIDER SAMPLE CALCULATIONS to this Prospectus. The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical assumptions and are for example purposes only. They are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns.

PL&A is a life insurance company based in Arizona. Our operations include life insurance, annuity and institutional products and various other insurance products and services. At the end of 2007, we had total statutory assets of $2,415 million.

PL&A is authorized to conduct life insurance and annuity business in Arizona, New York and certain other states. Our executive office is located at 700 Newport Center Drive, Newport Beach, California 92660.

PL&A was incorporated in 1982 under the name of Pacific Financial Life Insurance Company. We merged with Pacific Financial Life Insurance Company of Arizona and assumed the PM Group Life Insurance Company in transferring domicile from California to Arizona, which was completed in 1990. On January 1, 1999, we changed our name to our current name, Pacific Life & Annuity Company.

Our affiliate, Pacific Select Distributors, Inc. (PSD), serves as the principal underwriter (distributor) for the Contracts. PSD is located at 700 Newport Center Drive, Newport Beach, California 92660. We and PSD enter into selling agreements with broker-dealers, whose registered representatives are authorized by state insurance departments to sell the Contracts.

We may provide you with reports of our ratings both as an insurance company and as to our claims-paying ability with respect to our General Account assets.

Pacific Life Insurance Company administers the policies sold under this Prospectus. At the end of 2007, Pacific Life had $207.5 billion of individual life insurance and total admitted assets of approximately $96.6 billion. Pacific Life’s executive office is located at 700 Newport Center Drive, Newport Beach, California 92660.

Separate Account A was established on January 25, 1999 as a separate account of ours, and is registered with the SEC under the Investment Company Act of 1940 (the “1940 Act”), as a type of investment company called a “unit investment trust.”

Obligations arising under your Contract are our general corporate obligations. We are also the legal owner of the assets in the Separate Account. Assets of the Separate Account attributed to the reserves and other liabilities under the Contract and other contracts issued by us that are supported by the Separate Account may not be charged with liabilities arising from any of our other business; any income, gain or loss (whether or not realized) from the assets of the Separate Account are credited to or charged against the Separate Account without regard to our other income, gain or loss.

We may invest money in the Separate Account in order to commence its operations and for other purposes, but not to support contracts other than variable annuity contracts. A portion of the Separate Account’s assets may include accumulations of charges we make against the Separate Account and investment results of assets so accumulated. These additional assets are ours and we may transfer them to our General Account at any time; however, before making any such transfer, we will consider any possible adverse impact the transfer might have on the Separate Account. Subject to applicable law, we reserve the right to transfer our assets in the Separate Account to our General Account.

The Separate Account is not the sole investor in the Funds. Investment in a Fund by other separate accounts in connection with variable annuity and variable life insurance contracts may create conflicts. See the accompanying Prospectus and the SAI for the Funds for more information.

As of December 31, 2007 no Contracts were issued. As a result, no condensed financial information is included in this Prospectus.

The following summary of federal income tax issues is based on our understanding of current tax laws and regulations, which may be changed by legislative, judicial or administrative action. The summary is general in nature and is not intended as tax advice. Moreover, it does not consider any applicable foreign, state or local tax laws. We do not make any guarantee regarding the tax status, federal, foreign, state or local, of any Contract or any transaction involving the Contracts. Accordingly, you should consult a qualified tax adviser for complete information and advice before purchasing a Contract. Additional tax information is included in the SAI.

Section 817(h) of the Code provides that the investments underlying a variable annuity must satisfy certain diversification requirements in order for the contract to be treated as an annuity contract and qualify for tax deferral. We believe the underlying Variable Investment Options for the contract meet these requirements. Details on these diversification requirements appear in the Pacific Select Fund SAI.

In addition, for a variable annuity contract to qualify for tax deferral, assets in the separate accounts supporting the contract must be considered to be owned by the insurance company and not by the contract owner. Under current U.S. tax law, if a contract owner has excessive control over the investments made by a separate account, or the underlying fund, the contract owner will be taxed currently on income and gains from the account or fund. In other words, in such a case of investor control the contract owner would not derive the tax benefits normally associated with variable annuities. For more information regarding investor control, please refer to the contract SAI.

Section 72 of the Code governs the taxation of annuities in general, and we designed the Contracts to meet the requirements of Section 72 of the Code. We believe that, under current law, the Contract will be treated as an annuity for federal income tax purposes if the Contract Owner is a natural person or an agent for a natural person, and that we (as the issuing insurance company), and not the Contract Owner(s), will be treated as the owner of the investments underlying the Contract. Accordingly, no tax should be payable by you as a Contract Owner as a result of any increase in Contract Value until you receive money under your Contract. You should, however, consider how amounts will be taxed when you do receive them. The following discussion assumes that your Contract will be treated as an annuity for federal income tax purposes.

These general rules apply to Non-Qualified Contracts. As discussed below, however, tax rules may differ for Qualified Contracts and you should consult a qualified tax adviser if you are purchasing a Qualified Contract.

A Contract Owner is not taxed on the increases in the value of a Contract until an amount is received or deemed to be received. An amount could be received or deemed to be received, for example, if there is a partial distribution, a lump sum distribution, an Annuity payment or a material change in the Contract. Increases in Contract Value that are received or deemed to be received are taxable to the Contract Owner as ordinary income. Distributions of net investment income or capital gains that each Subaccount receives from its corresponding Portfolio are automatically reinvested in such Portfolio unless we, on behalf of the Separate Account, elect otherwise. As noted above, you will be subject to federal income taxes on the investment income from your Contract only when it is distributed to you.

If a contract is not owned or held by a natural person or as agent for a natural person, the contract generally will not be treated as an “annuity” for tax purposes, meaning that the contract owner will be subject to current tax on annual increases in Contract Value at ordinary income rates unless some other exception applies. Certain entities, such as some trusts, may be deemed to be acting as agents for natural persons. Corporations, including S corps, C corps, LLCs, partnerships and FLPs, and tax exempt entities are non natural persons that will not be deemed to be acting as agents for natural persons.

The addition of a rider to the Contract, or a material change in the Contract’s provisions, such as a change in Contract ownership or an assignment of the Contract, could cause it to be considered newly issued or entered into for tax purposes, and thus could cause a taxable event or the Contract to lose certain grandfathered tax status. Please contact your tax adviser for more information.

Amounts you withdraw before annuitization, including amounts withdrawn from your Contract Value in connection with partial withdrawals for payment of any charges and fees, will be treated first as taxable income to the extent that your Contract Value exceeds the aggregate of your Investments (reduced by non-taxable amounts previously received), and then as non-taxable recovery of your Investments. Therefore, you include in your gross income the smaller of: a) the amount of the partial withdrawal, or b) the amount by which your Contract Value (determined without considering any surrender charge) immediately before you receive the distribution exceeds your Investment in the Contract at that time. If at the time of a partial withdrawal your Contract Value does not exceed your Investment in the Contract, then the withdrawal will not be includable in gross income and will simply reduce your Investment.

Exceptions to this rule are distributions in full discharge of your Contract (a full surrender) or distributions from contracts issued and investments made before August 14, 1982. The assignment or pledge of (or agreement to assign or pledge) the value of the Contract for a loan will be treated as a withdrawal subject to these rules. You should consult your tax adviser for additional information regarding taking a partial or a full distribution from your Contract.

Multiple Non-Qualified Contracts that are issued after October 21, 1988, by us or our affiliates to the same Owner during the same calendar year are treated as one Contract for purposes of determining the taxation of distributions (the amount includible in gross income under Code Section 72(e)) prior to the Annuity Date from any of the Contracts. A Contract received in a tax-free exchange under Code Section 1035 may be treated as a new Contract for this purpose. For Contracts subject to the Aggregation Rule, the values of the Contracts and the Investments in the Contracts should be added together to determine the taxation under Code Section 72(e). Withdrawals will be treated first as withdrawals of income until all of the income from all such Contracts is withdrawn. The Treasury Department has specific authority under Code Section 72(e)(11) to issue regulations to prevent the avoidance of the income-out-first rules for withdrawals prior to the Annuity Date through the serial purchase of Contracts or otherwise. As of the date of this Prospectus there are no regulations interpreting these aggregation provisions.

The Code provides that the taxable portion of a withdrawal or other distribution may be subject to a tax penalty equal to 10% of that taxable portion unless the withdrawal is:


	•	made on or after the date you reach age 59 1/2,

	•	made by a Beneficiary after your death,

	•	attributable to your becoming disabled,

	•	any payment made under an immediate annuity,

	•	attributable to an investment in the Contract made prior to August 14, 1982, or


	•	any distribution that is a part of a series of substantially equal periodic payments (Code Section 72q payments) made (at least annually) over your life (or life expectancy) or the joint lives (or life expectancies) of you and your designated beneficiary.

Additional exceptions may apply to certain Qualified Contracts (see the Taxes Payable on Annuity Payments and the applicable Qualified Contracts sections of this Prospectus).

It is our understanding that the charges relating to any optional death benefit rider are not subject to current taxation and we will not report them as such. However, the IRS may determine that these charges should be treated as partial withdrawals

subject to current taxation to the extent of any gain and, if applicable, the 10% tax penalty. We reserve the right to report any optional death benefit rider charges as partial withdrawals if we believe that we would be expected to report them in accordance with IRS regulations.

After you annuitize, a portion of each annuity payment you receive under a Contract generally will be treated as a partial recovery of Investments (as used here, “Investments” means the aggregate Investments less any amounts that were previously received under the Contract but not included in income) and will not be taxable. (In certain circumstances, subsequent modifications to an initially-established payment pattern may result in the imposition of a penalty tax.) The remainder of each annuity payment will be taxed as ordinary income. However, after the full amount of aggregate Investments has been recovered, the full amount of each annuity payment will be taxed as ordinary income. Exactly how an annuity payment is divided into taxable and non-taxable portions depends on the period over which annuity payments are expected to be received, which in turn is governed by the form of annuity selected and, where a lifetime annuity is chosen, by the life expectancy of the Annuitant(s) or payee(s). Such a payment may also be subject to a tax penalty.

Generally, the same tax rules apply to amounts received by the Beneficiary as those that apply to the Contract Owner, except that the early withdrawal penalty tax does not apply. Thus, any annuity payments or lump sum withdrawal will be divided into taxable and non-taxable portions.

If within sixty days after the date on which a lump sum death benefit first becomes payable and the Beneficiary elects to receive annuity or life expectancy payments in lieu of the lump sum death benefit, then the Beneficiary will not be treated for tax purposes as having received the lump sum death benefit in the tax year it first becomes payable. Rather, in that case, the Beneficiary will be taxed on the annuity or life expectancy payments as they are received.

If death occurs after the Annuity Date, but before the expiration of a period certain option, the Beneficiary will recover the balance of the Investments as payments are made and may be allowed a deduction on the final tax return for the unrecovered Investments. A lump sum payment taken by the Beneficiary in lieu of remaining monthly annuity payments is not considered an annuity payment for tax purposes. The portion of any lump sum payment to a Beneficiary in excess of aggregate unrecovered Investments would be subject to income tax.

For additional information on death benefit payouts, see the Death Benefits - Nonqualified Contract Distribution Rules section of this Prospectus.

Generally, any amount payable to a Beneficiary after the Contract Owner’s death, whether before or after the Annuity Date, will be included in the estate of the Contract Owner for federal estate tax purposes. If the inclusion of the value of the Contract triggers a federal estate tax to be paid, the Beneficiary may be able to use a deduction called Income in Respect of Decedent (IRD) in calculating the income taxes payable upon receipt of the death benefit proceeds. In addition, designation of a non-spouse Beneficiary who either is 37 1/2 or more years younger than a Contract Owner or is a grandchild of a Contract Owner may have Generation Skipping Transfer Tax (GSTT) consequences under section 2601 of the Code. You should consult with a qualified tax advisor if you have questions about IRD or GSTT.

Generally, gifts of Non-Qualified Contracts prior to the annuity start date will trigger tax reporting to the donor on the gain on the Contract, with the donee getting a stepped-up basis for the amount included in the donor’s income. The 10% early withdrawal tax penalty and gift tax also may be applicable. This provision does not apply to transfers between spouses or incident to a divorce, or transfers to and from a trust acting as agent for the Owner or the Owner’s spouse.

Unless you elect to the contrary, any amounts you receive under your Contract that are attributable to investment income will be subject to withholding to meet federal income tax obligations. For nonperiodic distributions, you will have the option to provide us with withholding information at the time of your withdrawal request. If you do not provide us with withholding information, we will generally withhold 10% of the taxable distribution amount and remit it to the IRS. For periodic (annuity) payments, the rate of withholding will be determined on the basis of the withholding information you provide to us with your

application. If you do not provide us with withholding information, we are required to determine the withholding, from every annuity payment, as if you are a married person with 3 exemptions.

Please call us at 1-800-748-6907 with any questions about the required withholding information.

Taxable distributions to Contract Owners who are non-resident aliens or other non U.S. persons are generally subject to U.S. federal income tax withholding at a 30% rate, unless a lower treaty rate applies. Prospective foreign owners are advised to consult with a tax advisor regarding the U.S., state and foreign tax treatment of a Contract.

You may make your initial or an additional Investment through an exchange of an existing annuity contract or endowment life insurance contract pursuant to Section 1035 of the Code (a 1035 exchange). The exchange can be effected by completing the Transfer/Exchange form, indicating in the appropriate section of the form that you are making a 1035 exchange and submitting any applicable Regulation 60 paperwork. The form is available by calling your Registered Representative or by calling us at 1-800-748-6907. Once completed, the form should be mailed to us, along with the annuity contract or life insurance policy you are exchanging. If you are making an initial Investment, a completed Contract application should also be attached.

In general terms, Section 1035 of the Code provides that no gain or loss is recognized when you exchange one annuity or life insurance contract for another annuity contract. Transactions under Section 1035, however, may be subject to special rules and may require special procedures and record keeping, particularly if the exchanged annuity contract was issued prior to August 14, 1982. You should consult your tax adviser prior to effecting a 1035 exchange.

Rev. Proc. 2008-24 adopted the provisions of Notice 2003-51, with some modifications, finalizing the guidelines for partial 1035 exchanges. Under Rev. Proc. 2008-24, the 24 month period is reduced to 12 months, so that a partial exchange will be treated as tax-free under Code Section 1035 if there are no distributions within 12 months of the partial 1035 exchange. Alternatively, a partial 1035 exchange will be treated as tax-free under Code Section 1035 if the taxpayer demonstrates that any distribution taken within the 12 months is due to a specifically identified condition that occurred between the date of the partial transfer and the distribution (the conditions are death, disability, attaining age 59 1/2, divorce or loss of employment). Rev Proc. 2008-24 removes the subjective element of Notice 2003-51 (whether the distribution was contemplated at the time of the partial exchange). Also, Rev. Proc. 2008-24 provides that if the partial exchange does not qualify as a tax-free exchange under Code Section 1035, it will be treated as a taxable distribution with a subsequent repurchase, and that if the partial exchange is treated as tax-free under Code Section 1035 and this Rev. Proc., the two contracts will not be aggregated and treated as one contract, but rather will be treated as two separate contracts for tax and penalty purposes.

In general, in the case of Non-Qualified Contracts, if you are an individual and expect to accumulate your Contract Value over a relatively long period of time without making significant withdrawals, there may be federal income tax advantages in purchasing such a Contract. This is because any increase in Contract Value is not subject to current taxation. Income taxes are deferred until the money is withdrawn, at which point taxation occurs only on the gain from the investment in the Contract. With income taxes deferred, you may accumulate more money over the long term through a variable annuity than you may through non-tax-deferred investments. The advantage may be greater if you decide to liquidate your Contract Value in the form of monthly annuity payments after your retirement, or if your tax rate is lower at that time than during the period that you held the Contract, or both.

When withdrawals or distributions are taken from the variable annuity, the gain is taxed as ordinary income. This may be a potential disadvantage because money that had been invested in other types of assets may qualify for a more favorable federal tax rate. For example, the tax rate applicable both to the sale of capital gain assets held more than 1 year and to the receipt of qualifying dividends by individuals is generally 15% (5% for lower-income individuals). In contrast, an ordinary income tax rate of up to 35% applies to taxable withdrawals on distributions from a variable annuity. Also, withdrawals or distributions taken from a variable annuity may be subject to a tax penalty equal to 10% of the taxable portion, although exceptions to the tax penalty may apply.

An owner of a variable annuity cannot deduct or offset losses on transfers to or from Subaccounts, or at the time of any partial withdrawals. If you surrender your Contract and your Net Contract Value is less than the aggregate of your Investments in the Contract (reduced by any previous non-taxable distributions), there may be a deductible ordinary income loss, although the deduction may be limited. Consult with your tax adviser regarding the impact of federal income taxes on your specific situation.

Although the Separate Account is registered as an investment company, it is not a separate taxpayer for purposes of the Code. The earnings of the Separate Account are taxed as part of our operations. No charge is made against the Separate Account for our federal income taxes (excluding the charge for premium taxes), but we will review, periodically, the question of charges to the Separate Account or your Contract for such taxes. Such a charge may be made in future years for any federal income taxes that would be attributable to the Separate Account or to our operations with respect to your Contract, or attributable, directly or indirectly, to Investments on your Contract.

Under current law, we may incur state and local taxes (in addition to premium taxes) in several states. At present, these taxes are not significant and they are not charged against the Contract or the Separate Account. If there is a material change in applicable state or local tax laws, the imposition of any such taxes upon us that are attributable to the Separate Account or to our operations with respect to your Contract may result in a corresponding charge against the Separate Account or your Contract.

Given the uncertainty of future changes in applicable federal, state or local tax laws, we cannot appropriately describe the effect a tax law change may have on taxes that would be attributable to the Separate Account or your Contract.

The Contracts are available to a variety of Qualified Plans and IRAs. Tax restrictions and consequences for Contracts under each type of Qualified Plan and IRAs differ from each other and from those for Non-Qualified Contracts. No attempt is made herein to provide more than general information about the use of the Contract with the various types of Qualified Plans and IRAs. Participants under such Qualified Plans, as well as Contract Owners, Annuitants and Beneficiaries, are cautioned that the rights of any person to any benefits under such Qualified Plans may be subject to the terms and conditions of the Plans themselves or limited by applicable law, regardless of the terms and conditions of the Contract issued in connection therewith.

It is important to know that Qualified Plans such as 401(k)s, as well as IRAs, are already tax-deferred. Therefore, an annuity contract should be used to fund an IRA or Qualified Plan to benefit from the annuity’s features other than tax deferral. The other benefits of using a variable annuity to fund a Qualified Plan or an IRA include the lifetime income options, guaranteed death benefit options and the ability to transfer among investment options without sales or withdrawal charges. You should consider if the Contract is a suitable investment if you are investing through a Qualified Plan or IRA.

Generally, amounts received from Qualified Contracts are taxed as ordinary income under Section 72, to the extent that they are not treated as a tax free recovery of after tax contributions. Different rules apply for Roth IRAs. Consult your tax advisor before requesting a distribution from a Qualified Contract.

Generally, distributions from IRAs and Qualified Plans that occur before you attain age 59 1/2 are subject to a 10% tax penalty imposed on the amount of the distribution that is includable in gross income, with certain exceptions. These exceptions include distributions:


	•	made to a beneficiary after the owner’s/participant’s death,

	•	attributable to the owner/participant becoming disabled under Section 72(m)(7),

	•	that are part of a series of substantially equal periodic payments (also referred to as SEPPs or 72(t) payments) made (at least annually) over your life (or life expectancy) or the joint lives (or joint life expectancies) of you and your designated beneficiary,

	•	for certain higher education expenses (IRAs only),


	•	used to pay for certain health insurance premiums or medical expenses (IRAs only),

	•	for costs related to the purchase of your first home (IRAs only), and

	•	(except for IRAs) made to an employee after separation from service after reaching age 55 (or age 50 in the case of a qualified public safety employee).

Distributions from a Contract under a Qualified Plan (not including an individual retirement annuity subject to Code Section 408 or Code Section 408A) to an employee, surviving spouse, or former spouse who is an alternate payee under a qualified domestic relations order, in the form of a lump sum settlement or periodic annuity payments for a fixed period of fewer than 10 years are subject to mandatory income tax withholding of 20% of the taxable amount of the distribution, unless:


	•	the distributee directs the transfer of such amounts in cash to another Qualified Plan or a traditional IRA, or

	•	the payment is a minimum distribution required under the Code.

The taxable amount is the amount of the distribution less the amount allocable to after-tax contributions. All other types of taxable distributions are subject to withholding unless the distributee elects not to have withholding apply.

As of the date of this Prospectus, there are special considerations for purchases of any optional living or death benefit riders. IRS regulations state that Individual Retirement Accounts (IRAs) may generally not invest in life insurance contracts. We believe that these regulations do not prohibit the optional living or death benefit riders from being added to your Contract if it is issued as a Traditional IRA, Roth IRA, SEP IRA or SIMPLE IRA. However, the law is unclear and it is possible that a Contract that has optional living or death benefit riders and is issued as a Traditional IRA, Roth IRA, or SIMPLE IRA could be disqualified and may result in increased taxes to the Owner.

Similarly, section 401 plans, section 403(b) annuities and IRAs (but not Roth IRAs) can only offer incidental death benefits. The Internal Revenue Service (IRS) could take the position that the enhanced death benefits provided by optional benefit riders are not incidental. In addition, to the extent that the optional benefit riders alter the timing or the amount of the payment of distributions under a Qualified Contract, the riders cannot be paid out in violation of the minimum distribution rules of the Code.

It is our understanding that the charges relating to the optional benefit riders are not subject to current taxation and we will not report them as such. However, the IRS may determine that these charges should be treated as partial withdrawals subject to current income taxation to the extent of any gain and, if applicable, the 10% tax penalty. We reserve the right to report the rider charges as partial withdrawals if we believe that we would be expected to report them in accordance with IRS regulations.

The regulations provide that you cannot keep assets in Qualified Plans or IRAs indefinitely. Eventually they are required to be distributed; at that time (the Required Beginning Date (RBD)), Required Minimum Distributions (RMDs) are the amount that must be distributed each year.

Under Section 401 of the Code (for Qualified Plans) and Section 408 of the Code (for IRAs), the entire interest under the Contract must be distributed to the Owner/ Annuitant no later than the Owner/ Annuitant’s RBD, or distributions over the life of the Owner/ Annuitant (or the Owner/ Annuitant and his beneficiary) must begin no later than the RBD.

The RBD for distributions from a Qualified Contract maintained for an IRA under Section 408 of the Code is generally April 1 of the calendar year following the year in which the Owner/ Annuitant reaches age 70 1/2. The RBD for a Qualified Contract maintained for a qualified retirement or pension plan under Section 401 of the Code or a Section 403(b) annuity is April 1 of the calendar year following the later of the year in which the Owner/ Annuitant reached 70 1/2, or, if the plan so provides, the year in which the Owner/ Annuitant retires. There is no RBD for a Roth IRA maintained pursuant to Section 408A of the Code.

The IRS issued Final and Temporary Regulations on April 17, 2002 (“Final Regulations”). Effective January 1, 2003, the IRS requires that all IRA holders and Qualified Plan Participants (with one exception discussed below) use the Uniform Lifetime Table to calculate their RMDs.

The Uniform Lifetime Table is based on a joint life expectancy and uses the IRA owner’s actual age and assumes that the beneficiary is 10 years younger than the IRA owner. Note that under these Final Regulations, the IRA owner does not need to actually have a named beneficiary when they turn 70 1/2.

The exception noted above is for an IRA owner who has a spouse, who is more than 10 years younger, as the sole beneficiary on the IRA. In that situation, the spouse’s actual age (and life expectancy) will be used in the joint life calculation.

If the Owner/Annuitant dies prior to his RBD or complete distribution from the Qualified Contract, the remainder shall be distributed as provided in the “Qualified Contract Distribution Rules” section of this Prospectus. For non-spouse beneficiaries, life expectancy is initially computed by use of the Single Life Table of the Final Regulations (Regulation Section 1.401(a)(9)-9). Subsequent life expectancy shall be calculated by reducing the life expectancy of the Beneficiary by one in each following calendar year.

For calendar year 2003 and thereafter, taxpayers (and the underlying Qualified Plan) must rely on the Final and Temporary Regulations (discussed above) for determining RMDs. If any future guidance from the IRS is more restrictive than the guidance in these Final and Temporary Regulations, the future guidance will be issued without retroactive effect.

The method of distribution selected must comply with the minimum distribution rules of Code Section 401(a)(9), and the applicable proposed Regulations thereunder.

In accordance with recent changes in laws and regulations, RMDs may be calculated based on the sum of the contract value and the actuarial value of any additional death benefits and benefits from optional riders that you have purchased under the Contract. As a result, RMDs may be larger than if the calculation were based on the contract value only, which may in turn result in an earlier (but not before the required beginning date) distribution under the Contract and an increased amount of taxable income distributed to the contract owner, and a reduction of death benefits and the benefits of any optional riders.

Under the Final Regulations, for retirement plans that qualify under Section 401 or 408 of the Code, the period elected for receipt of RMDs as annuity payments under Annuity Options 2 and 4 generally may be:


	•	no longer than the joint life expectancy of the Annuitant and Beneficiary in the year that the Annuitant reaches age 70 1/2, and

	•	must be shorter than such joint life expectancy if the Beneficiary is not the Annuitant’s spouse and is more than 10 years younger than the Annuitant.

Under Annuity Option 3, if the Beneficiary is not the Annuitant’s spouse and is more than 10 years younger than the Annuitant, the 66 2/3% and 100% elections specified below may not be available. The restrictions on options for retirement plans that qualify under Sections 401 and 408 also apply to a retirement plan that qualifies under Section 403(b) with respect to amounts that accrued after December 31, 1986.

Certain Owners of Qualified Contracts may borrow against their Contracts. Otherwise loans from us are not permitted. You may request a loan from us, using your Contract Value as your only security if yours is a Qualified Contract that is:


	•	not subject to Title 1 of ERISA,

	•	issued under Section 403(b) of the Code, and

	•	permits loans under its terms (a “Loan Eligible Plan”).

You may have only one loan outstanding at any time. The minimum loan amount is $1,000. Your Contract Debt at the effective date of your loan may not exceed the lesser of:


	•	50% of your Contract Value, or

	•	$50,000 less your highest outstanding Contract Debt during the 12-month period immediately preceding the effective date of your loan.

If your request for a loan is processed, you will be charged interest on your Contract Debt at a fixed annual rate equal to 5%. The amount held in the Loan Account to secure your loan will earn a return equal to an annual rate of 3%. This loan rate may vary by state.

Interest charges accrue on your Contract Debt daily, beginning on the effective date of your loan. Interest earned on the Loan Account Value accrue daily beginning on the day following the effective date of the loan, and those earnings will be transferred once a year to your Investment Options in accordance with your most recent allocation instructions. For more information about loans, including the consequences of loans, loan procedures, loan terms and repayment terms, see the SAI.

We may change these loan provisions to reflect changes in the Code or interpretations thereof. We urge you to consult with a qualified tax adviser prior to effecting any loan transaction under your Contract.

The following is only a general discussion about types of IRAs and Qualified Plans for which the Contracts are available. We are not the administrator of any Qualified Plan. The plan administrator and/or custodian, whichever is applicable, (but not us) is responsible for all Plan administrative duties including, but not limited to, notification of distribution options, disbursement of Plan benefits, handling any processing and administration of Qualified Plan loans, compliance regulatory requirements and federal and state tax reporting of income/ distributions from the Plan to Plan participants and, if applicable, Beneficiaries of Plan participants and IRA contributions from Plan participants. Our administrative duties are limited to administration of the Contract and any disbursements of any Contract benefits to the Owner, Annuitant, or Beneficiary of the Contract, as applicable. Our tax reporting responsibility is limited to federal and state tax reporting of income/ distributions to the applicable payee and IRA contributions from the Owner of a Contract, as recorded on our books and records. The Qualified Plan (the plan administrator or the custodian) is required to provide us with information regarding individuals with signatory authority on the Contract(s) owned. If you are purchasing a Qualified Contract, you should consult with your plan administrator and/or a qualified tax adviser. You should also consult with a qualified tax adviser and/or plan administrator before you withdraw any portion of your Contract Value.

In addition to “traditional” IRAs established under Code 408, there are SEP IRAs under Code Section 408(k), Roth IRAs governed by Code Section 408A and SIMPLE IRAs established under Code Section 408(p). Also, Qualified Plans under Section 401 or 403(b) of the Code that include after-tax employee contributions may be treated as deemed IRAs subject to the same rules and limitations as traditional IRAs. Contributions to each of these types of IRAs are subject to differing limitations. The following is a very general description of each type of IRA and other Qualified Plans.

Traditional IRAs are subject to limitations on the amount that may be contributed each year, the persons who may be eligible to contribute, when rollovers are available and when distributions must commence. Depending upon the circumstances of the individual, contributions to a traditional IRA may be made on a deductible or non-deductible basis.

Annual contributions are generally allowed for persons who have not attained age 70 1/2 and who have compensation (as defined by the IRS) of at least the contribution amount. Distributions of minimum amounts specified by the Code must commence by April 1 of the calendar year following the calendar year in which you attain age 70 1/2. Failure to make mandatory minimum distributions may result in imposition of a 50% tax penalty on any difference between the required distribution amount and the amount actually distributed. Additional distribution rules apply after your death.

You (or your surviving spouse if you die) may rollover funds (such as proceeds from existing insurance policies, annuity contracts or securities) from certain existing Qualified Plans into your traditional IRA if those funds are in cash. This will require you to liquidate any value accumulated under the existing Qualified Plan. Mandatory withholding of 20% may apply to any rollover distribution from your existing Qualified Plan if the distribution is not transferred directly to your traditional IRA. To avoid this withholding you should have cash transferred directly from the insurance company or plan trustee to your traditional IRA.

The Savings Incentive Match Plan for Employees of Small Employers (“SIMPLE Plan”) is a type of IRA established under Code Section 408(p)(2). Depending upon the SIMPLE Plan, employers may make plan contributions into a SIMPLE IRA established

by each participant of the SIMPLE Plan. Like other IRAs, a 10% tax penalty is imposed on certain distributions that occur before an employee attains age 59 1/2. In addition, the tax penalty is increased to 25% for amounts received or rolled to another IRA or Qualified Plan during the 2-year period beginning on the date an employee first participated in a qualified salary reduction arrangement pursuant to a SIMPLE Plan maintained by their employer. Contributions to a SIMPLE IRA will generally include employee salary deferral contributions and employer contributions. Distributions from a SIMPLE IRA may be transferred to another SIMPLE IRA tax free or may be eligible for tax free rollover to a traditional IRA, a 403(b) or other Qualified Plan after the required 2-year period.

A Simplified Employee Pension (SEP) is an employer sponsored retirement plan under which an employer is allowed to make contributions toward their employees’ retirement, as well as their own retirement (if the employer is self-employed). A SEP is a type of IRA established under Code Section 408(k). Under a SEP, a separate IRA account called a SEP-IRA is set up by or for each eligible employee and the employer makes the contribution to the account. Like other IRAs, a 10% tax penalty is imposed on certain distributions that occur before an employee attains age 59 1/2.

Section 408A of the Code permits eligible individuals to establish a Roth IRA. Contributions to a Roth IRA are not deductible, but withdrawals of amounts contributed and the earnings thereon that meet certain requirements are not subject to federal income tax. In general, Roth IRAs are subject to limitations on the amount that may be contributed and the persons who may be eligible to contribute and are subject to certain required distribution rules on the death of the Contract Owner. Unlike a traditional IRA, Roth IRAs are not subject to minimum required distribution rules during the Contract Owner’s lifetime. Generally, however, the amount remaining in a Roth IRA must be distributed by the end of the fifth year after the death of the Contract Owner/ Annuitant or distributed over the life expectancy of the Designated Beneficiary. The owner of a traditional IRA may convert a traditional IRA into a Roth IRA under certain circumstances. The conversion of a traditional IRA to a Roth IRA will subject the amount of the converted traditional IRA to federal income tax. Anyone considering the purchase of a Qualified Contract as a Roth IRA or a “conversion” Roth IRA should consult with a qualified tax adviser.

In accordance with recent changes in laws and regulations, at the time of either a full or partial conversion from a Traditional IRA annuity to a Roth IRA annuity, the determination of the amount to be reported as income will be based on the annuity contract’s “fair market value”, which will include all front-end loads and other non-recurring charges assessed in the 12 months immediately preceding the conversion, and the actuarial present value of any additional contract benefits.

Employees of certain tax-exempt organizations, such as public schools or hospitals, may defer compensation through an eligible plan under Code Section 403(b). Salary deferral amounts received from employers for these employees are excludable from the employees’ gross income (subject to maximum contribution limits). Distributions under these Contracts must comply with certain limitations as to timing, or result in tax penalties. Distributions from amounts contributed to a TSA pursuant to a salary reduction arrangement, may be made from a TSA only upon attaining age 59 1/2, severance from employment, death, disability, or financial hardship. Section 403(b) annuity distributions can be rolled over to other Qualified Plans in a manner similar to those permitted by Qualified Plans that are maintained pursuant to Section 401 of the Code.

In accordance with Code Section 403(b) and final regulations published on July 26, 2007 (“Final Regulations”), as of January 1, 2009 (or earlier if we or your 403(b) employer has entered into an agreement pursuant to the Final Regulations), we are required to provide information regarding loans or hardship distributions from your Contract to your 403(b) employer or an agent of your 403(b) employer, upon request. In addition, prior to processing your request for a loan, a hardship distribution or a rollover, we are required to verify certain information about you with your 403(b) employer (or if applicable, former 403(b) employer).

Qualified Plans may be established by an employer for certain eligible employees under Section 401 of the Code. These plans may be 401(k) plans, profit-sharing plans, or other pension or retirement plans. Contributions to these plans are subject to limitations. Rollover to other eligible plans may be available. Please consult your Qualified Plans Summary Plan description for more information.

We are the legal owner of the shares of the Portfolios held by the Subaccounts. We may vote on any matter voted on at shareholders’ meetings of the Funds. However, our current interpretation of applicable law requires us to vote the number of shares attributable to your Variable Account Value (your “voting interest”) in accordance with your directions.

We will pass proxy materials on to you so that you have an opportunity to give us voting instructions for your voting interest. You may provide your instructions by proxy or in person at the shareholders’ meeting. If there are shares of a Portfolio held by a Subaccount for which we do not receive timely voting instructions, we will vote those shares in the same proportion as all other shares of that Portfolio held by that Subaccount for which we have received timely voting instructions. If we do not receive any voting instructions for the shares in a Separate Account, we will vote the shares in that Separate Account in the same proportion as the total votes for all of our separate accounts for which we’ve received timely instructions. If we hold shares of a Portfolio in our General Account, we will vote such shares in the same proportion as the total votes cast for all of our separate accounts, including Separate Account A. We will vote shares of any Portfolio held by our non-insurance affiliates in the same proportion as the total votes for all separate accounts of ours and our insurance affiliates. As a result of proportional voting, the votes cast by a small number of Contract Owners may determine the outcome of a vote.

We may elect, in the future, to vote shares of the Portfolios held in Separate Account A in our own right if we are permitted to do so through a change in applicable federal securities laws or regulations, or in their interpretation.

The number of Portfolio shares that form the basis for your voting interest is determined as of the record date set by the Board of Trustees of the Fund. It is equal to:


	•	your Contract Value allocated to the Subaccount corresponding to that Portfolio, divided by

	•	the net asset value per share of that Portfolio.

Fractional votes will be counted. We reserve the right, if required or permitted by a change in federal regulations or their interpretation, to amend how we calculate your voting interest.

After your Annuity Date, if you have selected a variable annuity, the voting rights under your Contract will continue during the payout period of your annuity, but the number of shares that form the basis for your voting interest, as described above, will decrease throughout the payout period.

Transfer of Contract ownership may involve federal income tax and/or gift tax consequences; you should consult a qualified tax adviser before effecting such a transfer. A change to or from joint Contract ownership is considered a transfer of ownership. If your Contract is Non-Qualified, you may change Contract ownership at any time while the Annuitant is living and prior to your Annuity Date. You may name a different Owner or add or remove a Joint Owner or Contingent Owner. A Contract cannot name more than two Contract Owners (either as Joint or Contingent Owners) at any time. Any newly-named Contract Owners, including Joint and/or Contingent Owners, must be under the age of 86 at the time of change or addition. If there are Joint Owners, the Contract will be owned as Joint Tenants With Right of Survivorship and not as Tenants in Common. The Contract Owner(s) may make all decisions regarding the Contract, including making allocation decisions and exercising voting rights. Transactions under a Contract with Joint Owners require approval from both Owners.

If your Contract is Qualified under Code Section 401, the Qualified Plan must be the sole Owner of the Contract and the ownership cannot be changed unless and until a triggering event has been met under the terms of the Qualified Plan. Upon such event, the ownership can only be changed to the Annuitant. If your Contract is Qualified under Code Sections 408 and 403(b), you must be the sole Owner of the Contract and no changes can be made.

Your sole Annuitant cannot be changed, and Joint Annuitants cannot be added or changed, once your Contract is issued. Certain changes may be permitted in connection with Contingent Annuitants. See the ANNUITIZATION— Selecting Your Annuitant section in this Prospectus. There may be limited exceptions for certain Qualified Contracts.

Your Beneficiary is the person(s) or entity who may receive death benefit proceeds under your Contract or any remaining annuity payments after the Annuity Date if the Annuitant or Owner dies. You may change or remove your Beneficiary or add Beneficiaries at any time prior to the death of the Annuitant or Owner, as applicable. Any change or addition will generally take effect only when we receive all necessary documents, in proper form, at our Service Center and we record the change or addition. Any change or addition will not affect any payment made or any other action taken by us before the change or addition was received and recorded.

Spousal consent may be required to change the Beneficiary of an IRA. If you have named your Beneficiary irrevocably, you will need to obtain that Beneficiary’s consent before making any changes. Qualified Contracts may have additional restrictions on naming and changing Beneficiaries. If your Contract was issued in connection with a Qualified Plan subject to Title I of ERISA, contact your Plan Administrator for details. We require that Contracts issued under Code Section 401 name the Plan as Beneficiary. If you leave no surviving Beneficiary or Contingent Beneficiary, your estate may receive any death benefit proceeds under your Contract.

If, in the judgment of our management, continued investment by Separate Account A in one or more of the Portfolios becomes unsuitable or unavailable, we may seek to alter the Variable Investment Options available under the Contracts. We do not expect that a Portfolio will become unsuitable, but unsuitability issues could arise due to changes in investment policies, market conditions, tax laws, or due to marketing or other reasons.

Alterations of Variable Investment Options may take differing forms. We reserve the right to substitute shares of any Portfolio that were already purchased under any Contract (or shares that were to be purchased in the future under a Contract) with shares of another Portfolio, shares of another investment company or series of another investment company, or another investment vehicle. We may also purchase, through a Subaccount, other securities for other series or other classes of contracts, and may permit conversions or exchanges between series or classes of contracts on the basis of Contract Owner requests. Required approvals of the SEC and the Insurance Superintendent of the State of New York will be obtained before any such substitutions are effected, and you will be notified of any planned substitution.

We may add new Subaccounts to Separate Account A and any new Subaccounts may invest in Portfolios of a Fund or in other investment vehicles. Availability of any new Subaccounts to existing Contract Owners will be determined at our discretion. We will notify you, and will comply with the filing or other procedures established by the Insurance Superintendent of the State of New York, to the extent required by applicable law. We also reserve the right, after receiving any required regulatory approvals, to do any of the following:


	•	cease offering any Subaccount;

	•	add or change designated investment companies or their portfolios, or other investment vehicles;

	•	add, delete or make substitutions for the securities and other assets that are held or purchased by the Separate Account or any Variable Account;

	•	permit conversion or exchanges between portfolios and/or classes of contracts on the basis of Owners’ requests;

	•	add, remove or combine Variable Accounts;

	•	combine the assets of any Variable Account with any other of our separate accounts or of any of our affiliates;

	•	register or deregister Separate Account A or any Variable Account under the 1940 Act;

	•	operate any Variable Account as a managed investment company under the 1940 Act, or any other form permitted by law;

	•	run any Variable Account under the direction of a committee, board, or other group;

	•	restrict or eliminate any voting rights of Owners with respect to any Variable Account or other persons who have voting rights as to any Variable Account;

	•	make any changes required by the 1940 Act or other federal securities laws;

	•	make any changes necessary to maintain the status of the Contracts as annuities under the Code;


	•	make other changes required under federal or state law relating to annuities;

	•	suspend or discontinue sale of the Contracts; and

	•	comply with applicable law.

You may reach our service representatives at 1-800-748-6907 between the hours of 6:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m., Pacific time.

If you are submitting an Investment or other payment by mail, please send it, along with your application if you are submitting one, to the following address or to the address indicated on your Contract specification pages, if different:

If you are using an overnight delivery service to send payments, please send them to the following address or to the address indicated on your Contract specification pages, if different:


	Pacific Life & Annuity Company
	1299 Farnam Street, 10^th Floor, AMF
	Omaha, Nebraska 68102

The effective date of certain notices or of instructions is determined by the date and time on which we “receive” the notice or instructions. We “receive” this information only when it arrives, in proper form, at the correct mailing address set out above. In those instances when we receive electronic transmission of the information on the application from your representative’s broker-dealer firm and our administrative procedures with your broker-dealer so provide, we consider the application to be received on the Business Day we receive the transmission. If the address on your Contract specification pages is different and our administrative procedures with your broker-dealer so provide, in those instances when information regarding your Investment is electronically transmitted to us by the broker-dealer, we will consider the Investment to be received by us on the Business Day we receive the transmission of the information. Please call us at 1-800-748-6907 if you have any questions regarding which address you should use.

We reserve the right to process any Investment received at an incorrect address when it is received at either the address indicated in your Contract specification pages or the appropriate address indicated in the Prospectus.

Investments after your initial Investment, loan requests, transfer requests, loan repayments and withdrawal requests we receive before the close of the New York Stock Exchange, which usually closes at 4:00 p.m. Eastern time, will normally be effective at the end of the same Business Day that we receive them in “proper form,” unless the transaction or event is scheduled to occur on another day. Generally, whenever you submit any other form, notice or request, your instructions will be effective on the next Business Day after we receive them in “proper form” unless the transaction or event is scheduled to occur on another day. “Proper form” means in a form satisfactory to us and may require, among other things, a signature guarantee or other verification of authenticity. We do not generally require a signature guarantee unless it appears that your signature may have changed over time or the signature does not appear to be yours; or an executed application or confirmation of application, as applicable, in proper form is not received by us; or, to protect you or us. Requests regarding death benefit proceeds must be accompanied by both proof of death and instructions regarding payment satisfactory to us. You should call your registered representative or us if you have questions regarding the required form of a request.

You are automatically entitled to make certain transactions by telephone or, to the extent available, electronically. You may also authorize other people to make certain transaction requests by telephone or, to the extent available, electronically by so indicating on the application or by sending us instructions in writing in a form acceptable to us. We cannot guarantee that you or any other person you authorize will always be able to reach us to complete a telephone or electronic transaction; for example, all telephone lines may be busy or access to our website may be unavailable during certain periods, such as periods of

substantial market fluctuations or other drastic economic or market change, or telephones or the Internet may be out of service or unavailable during severe weather conditions or other emergencies. Under these circumstances, you should submit your request in writing (or other form acceptable to us). Transaction instructions we receive by telephone or electronically before the close of the New York Stock Exchange, which usually closes at 4:00 p.m. Eastern time, on any Business Day will usually be effective at the end of that day, and we will provide you confirmation of each telephone or electronic transaction.

We have established procedures reasonably designed to confirm that instructions communicated by telephone or electronically are genuine. These procedures may require any person requesting a telephone or electronic transaction to provide certain personal identification upon our request. We may also record all or part of any telephone conversation with respect to transaction instructions. We reserve the right to deny any transaction request made by telephone or electronically. You are authorizing us to accept and to act upon instructions received by telephone or electronically with respect to your Contract, and you agree that, so long as we comply with our procedures, neither we, any of our affiliates, nor any Fund, or any of their directors, trustees, officers, employees or agents will be liable for any loss, liability, cost or expense (including attorneys’ fees) in connection with requests that we believe to be genuine. This policy means that so long as we comply with our procedures, you will bear the risk of loss arising out of the telephone or electronic transaction privileges of your Contract. If a Contract has Joint Owners, each Owner may individually make telephone and/or electronic transaction requests.

Subject to availability, you may authorize us to provide Prospectuses, statements, and other information (“documents”) electronically by so indicating on the application, via telephone, or by sending us instructions in writing in a form acceptable to us to receive such documents electronically. You must provide us with a current and active e-mail address and have Internet access to use this service. While we impose no additional charge for this service, there may be potential costs associated with electronic delivery, such as on-line charges. Documents will be available on our Internet website. You may access and print all documents provided through this service. As documents become available, we will notify you of this by sending you an e-mail message that will include instructions on how to retrieve the document. You are responsible for any e-mail filters that may prevent you from receiving e-mail notifications and for notifying us promptly in the event that your e-mail address changes. You may revoke your consent for electronic delivery at any time, provided that we are properly notified, and we will then start providing you with a paper copy of all required documents. We will provide you with paper copies at any time upon request. Such a request will not constitute revocation of your consent to receive required documents electronically.

For withdrawals, including exchanges under Code Section 1035 and other Qualified transfers, from the Variable Investment Options or for death benefit payments attributable to your Variable Account Value, we will normally send the proceeds within 7 calendar days after your request is effective or after the Notice Date, as the case may be. We will normally effect periodic annuity payments on the day that corresponds to the Annuity Date and will make payment on the following day. Payments or transfers may be suspended for a longer period under certain extraordinary circumstances. These include: a closing of the New York Stock Exchange other than on a regular holiday or weekend; a trading restriction imposed by the SEC; or an emergency declared by the SEC. Amounts withdrawn or transferred from any fixed-rate General Account Investment Option may be delayed for up to six months after the request is effective. See THE GENERAL ACCOUNT section of this Prospectus for more details.

Confirmations will be sent out for unscheduled Investments and transfers, loans, loan repayments, unscheduled partial withdrawals, a full withdrawal, optional living benefit rider Automatic or Owner Elected Resets/Step-Ups, and on payment of any death benefit proceeds. Periodically, we will send you a statement that provides certain information pertinent to your Contract. These statements disclose Contract Value, Subaccount values, any fixed option values, fees and charges applied to your Contract Value, transactions made and specific Contract data that apply to your Contract. Confirmations of your transactions under the pre-authorized checking plan, dollar cost averaging, earnings sweep, portfolio rebalancing, and pre-authorized withdrawal options will appear on your quarterly account statements. Your fourth-quarter statement will contain annual information about your Contract Value and transactions. You may also access these statements online.

If you suspect an error on a confirmation or quarterly statement, you must notify us in writing as soon as possible to ensure proper accounting to your Contract. When you write, tell us your name, contract number and a description of the suspected error. We assume transactions are accurate unless you notify us otherwise within 30 days of receiving the transaction

confirmation or, if the transaction is first confirmed on the quarterly statement, within 30 days of receiving the quarterly statement. All transactions are deemed final and may not be changed after the applicable 30 day period.

You will also be sent an annual report for the Separate Account and the Funds and a list of the securities held in each Portfolio of the Funds, as required by the 1940 Act; or more frequently if required by law.

Contract Owner Mailings. To help reduce expenses, environmental waste and the volume of mail you receive, only one copy of Contract Owner documents (such as the prospectus, supplements, announcements, and each annual and semi-annual report) may be mailed to Contract Owners who share the same household address (Householding). If you are already participating, you may opt out by contacting us. Please allow 30 calendar days for regular delivery to resume. You may also elect to participate in Householding by writing to us. The current documents are available on our website any time or an individual copy of any of these documents may be requested — see the last page of this Prospectus for more information.

PSD, a broker-dealer and an affiliate of ours, pays various forms of sales compensation to broker-dealers (including other affiliates) that solicit applications for the Contracts. PSD also may reimburse other expenses associated with the promotion and solicitation of applications for the Contracts.

We offer the Contracts for sale through broker-dealers that have entered into selling agreements with PSD. Broker-dealers sell the Contracts through their registered representatives. PSD pays compensation to broker-dealers for the promotion and sale of the Contracts. The individual registered representative who sells you a Contract typically will receive a portion of the compensation, under the representative’s own arrangement with his or her broker-dealer. Broker-dealers may receive aggregate commissions of up to 7.50% of your aggregate Purchase Payments. Under certain circumstances where PSD pays lower initial commissions, certain broker-dealers that solicit applications for Contracts may be paid an ongoing persistency trail commission (sometimes called a residual) which will take into account, among other things, the Account Value and the length of time Purchase Payments have been held under a Contract. A trail commission is not anticipated to exceed 1.25%, on an annual basis, of the Account Value considered in connection with the trail commission.

We may also provide compensation to broker-dealers for providing ongoing service in relation to Contracts that have already been purchased.

To the extent permitted by SEC and FINRA rules and other applicable laws and regulations, selling broker-dealers may receive additional payments in the form of cash, other special compensation or reimbursement of expenses, sometimes called “revenue sharing”. These additional compensation or reimbursement arrangements may include, for example, payments in connection with the firm’s “due diligence” examination of the contracts, payments for providing conferences or seminars, sales or training programs for invited registered representatives and other employees, payments for travel expenses, including lodging, incurred by registered representatives and other employees for such seminars or training programs, seminars for the public, advertising and sales campaigns regarding the Contracts, and payments to assist a firm in connection with its administrative systems, operations and marketing expenses and/or other events or activities sponsored by the firms. Subject to applicable FINRA rules and other applicable laws and regulations, PSD and its affiliates may contribute to, as well as sponsor, various educational programs, sales contests and/or promotions in which participating firms and their salespersons may receive prizes such as merchandise, cash, or other awards. Such additional compensation may give us greater access to registered representatives of the broker-dealers that receive such compensation or may otherwise influence the way that a broker-dealer and registered representative market the Contracts.

These arrangements may not be applicable to all firms, and the terms of such arrangements may differ between firms. We provide additional information on special compensation or reimbursement arrangements involving selling firms and other financial institutions in the Statement of Additional Information, which is available upon request. Any such compensation will not result in any additional direct charge to you by us.

The compensation and other benefits provided by PSD or its affiliates may be more or less than the overall compensation on similar or other products. This may influence your registered representative or broker-dealer to present this Contract over other investment options available in the marketplace. You may ask your registered representative about these differing and divergent interests, how he/she is personally compensated and how his/her broker-dealer is compensated for soliciting applications for the Contract.

We have entered into services agreements with certain Funds, or Fund affiliates, which pay us for administrative and other services, including, but not limited to, certain communications and support services. The fees are based on an annual percentage of average daily net assets of certain Fund portfolios purchased by us at Contract Owner’s instructions. Currently, the fees received do not exceed an annual percentage of 0.30% and each Fund (or Fund affiliate) may not pay the same annual percentage (some may pay significantly less). Because we receive such fees, we may be subject to competing interests in making these Funds available as Investment options under the Contracts.

AllianceBernstein Investments, Inc. pays us for each AllianceBernstein Variable Products Series Fund, Inc. portfolio (Class B) held by our separate accounts. BlackRock Distributors, Inc. pays us for each BlackRock Variable Series Funds, Inc. portfolio (Class III) held by our separate accounts. Franklin Templeton Services, LLC pays us for each Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust portfolio (Class 4) held by our separate accounts.

PSD shall pay American Funds Distributors, Inc. at a rate of 0.16% of Purchase Payments up to $1.5 billion, 0.14% on Purchase Payments on next $1.5 billion and 0.10% on Purchase Payments made in excess, attributable to the Master Funds for certain marketing assistance.

The term “replacement” has a special meaning in the life insurance industry and is described more fully below. Before you make your purchase decision, we want you to understand how a replacement may impact your existing plan of insurance.

A policy “replacement” occurs when a new policy or contract is purchased and, in connection with the sale, an existing policy or contract is surrendered, lapsed, forfeited, assigned to the replacing insurer, otherwise terminated, or used in a financed purchase. A “financed purchase” occurs when the purchase of a new life insurance policy or annuity contract involves the use of funds obtained from the values of an existing life insurance policy or annuity contract through withdrawal, surrender or loan.

There are circumstances in which replacing your existing life insurance policy or annuity contract can benefit you. As a general rule, however, replacement is not in your best interest. Accordingly, you should make a careful comparison of the costs and benefits of your existing policy or contract and the proposed policy or contract to determine whether replacement is in your best interest.

If we are the issuer of a Contract that is being replaced, we will reinstate the original Contract within 60 days of the date of delivery of the replacing contract if the Owner decides to keep the original Contract and:


	•	we receive written proof that the replacing contract has been cancelled, including the date of cancellation, and

	•	the replacing insurer processes a check and forwards it to us.

The original Contract will be reinstated with its original provisions and the amount of the check will be credited to the Contract on the date that it is received. If a withdrawal charge was applied at the time the Contract was replaced, the withdrawal charge amount will be credited to the Contract.

The statements of assets and liabilities of Separate Account A as of December 31, 2007, the related statements of operations for the periods presented, the statements of changes in net assets for each of the periods presented and the financial highlights for each of the periods presented are incorporated by reference in the Statement of Additional Information from the Annual Report of Separate Account A dated December 31, 2007. PL&A’s financial statements as of December 31, 2007 and 2006 and for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2007 are contained in the Statement of Additional Information.

All amounts allocated to any fixed option become part of our General Account. We have contracted with Pacific Life to manage our General Account assets, subject to investment policies, objectives, directions, and guidelines established by our Board. You will not share in the investment experience of General Account assets.

Because of exemptive and exclusionary provisions, interests in the General Account under the Contract are not registered under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, and the General Account has not been registered as an investment company under the 1940 Act. Any interest you have in a fixed option is not subject to these Acts, and we have been advised that the SEC staff has not reviewed disclosure in this Prospectus relating to any fixed option. This disclosure may, however, be subject to certain provisions of federal securities laws relating to the accuracy and completeness of statements made in prospectuses.

When you allocate any portion of your Investments or Contract Value to any fixed option, we guarantee you an interest rate (a “Guaranteed Interest Rate”) for a specified period of time (a “Guarantee Term”) of up to one year. Guarantee Terms will be offered at our discretion.

Guaranteed Interest Rates for any fixed option may be changed periodically for new allocations. Your allocation will receive the Guaranteed Interest Rate in effect for that fixed option on the effective date of your allocation. All Guaranteed Interest Rates will be expressed as annual effective rates, however, interest will accrue daily. The Guaranteed Interest Rate on your fixed option will remain in effect for the Guarantee Term and will never be less than an annual rate of 3%.

Prior to the Annuity Date, you may withdraw or transfer amounts from any fixed option to one or more of the other Variable Investment Options. No partial withdrawal or transfer may be made from a fixed option within 30 days of the Contract Date. Currently, we are not requiring the 30-day waiting period on partial withdrawals and transfers, but we reserve the right to require the 30-day waiting period on partial withdrawals and transfers in the future. If your withdrawal leaves you with a Net Contract Value of less than $1,000, we have the right, at our option, to terminate your Contract and send you the withdrawal proceeds.

Amounts transferred or withdrawn from any fixed option may be delayed, as described under the ADDITIONAL INFORMATION—Timing of Payments and Transactions section in this Prospectus. Any amount delayed, so long as it is held under a fixed option, will continue to earn interest at the Guaranteed Interest Rate then in effect until that Guarantee Term has ended, and the minimum guaranteed interest rate of 3% thereafter.

Before your Annuity Date, you can allocate all or some of your Investment(s) to the DCA Plus Fixed Option. The initial minimum amount that you may allocate to the DCA Plus Fixed Option is $5,000. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum amount you may allocate to the DCA Plus Fixed Option but we reserve the right to enforce the minimum amount in the future. You may not transfer any amount to the DCA Plus Fixed Option from any other Investment Option. All Investments allocated to the DCA Plus Fixed Option will earn interest at the then current Guaranteed Interest Rate declared by us.

The DCA Plus Fixed Option Value on any Business Day is the DCA Plus Fixed Option Value on the prior Business Day, increased by any additions to the DCA Plus Fixed Option on that day as a result of any:


	•	interest, plus

	•	Purchase Payments received by us then allocated to the DCA Plus Fixed Option, plus

	•	any additional amounts allocated to the DCA Plus Fixed Option,

and decreased by any deductions from the DCA Plus Fixed Option on that day as a result of any;


	•	transfers, including transfers to the Loan Account,

	•	withdrawals, including any applicable withdrawal charges,


	•	amounts applied to provide an annuity,

	•	annual fees,

	•	charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes, and

	•	proportionate reductions for annual charges for expenses relating to optional benefit riders attached to the Contract.

The DCA Plus program will automatically terminate at the end of your DCA Plus Guarantee Term, or upon the earliest of:


	•	the date death benefit proceeds become payable under the Contract,

	•	the date you transfer the entire amount from the DCA Plus Fixed Option to another Investment Option,

	•	the date the Contract is terminated, or

	•	the Annuity Date.

At the end of the DCA Plus program, upon receipt of an additional Purchase Payment that satisfies our minimum allocation requirements, you may request, in a form satisfactory to us, a new DCA Plus program.

We reserve the right to change the terms and conditions of the DCA Plus program, but not a DCA Plus program you already have in effect.

The day that the first Investment allocation is made to the DCA Plus Fixed Option will begin the Guarantee Term. You can choose a Guarantee Term of up to one year. Currently, we offer Guarantee Terms of 6 or 12 months with monthly transfers on the same day of each month thereafter to the Variable Investment Options that you selected. The amount transferred each month is equal to your DCA Plus Fixed Option Value on that day divided by the remaining number of monthly transfers in the Guarantee Term.

Example: On May 1, you submit a $10,000 Investment entirely to the DCA Plus Fixed Option at a then current Guaranteed Interest Rate of 5.00% with a Guarantee Term of 6 months. On June 1, the value of the DCA Plus Fixed Option is $10,041.52. On June 1, a transfer equal to $1,673.59 (10,041.52/6) will be made according to your DCA Plus transfer instructions. Your remaining DCA Plus Fixed Option Value after the transfer is $8,367.93. On July 1, your DCA Plus Fixed Option has now increased to $8,401.56. We will transfer $1,680.31 ($8,401.56/5) to the Variable Investment Options, leaving a remaining value of $6,721.25 in the DCA Plus Fixed Option.

During the Guarantee Term, you can allocate all or a part of any additional Investments to the DCA Plus Fixed Option. Additional allocations must be at least $250. Each additional allocation will be transferred to the Variable Investment Options you select over the remaining Guarantee Term. Transfers will be made from the DCA Plus Fixed Option Value attributed to the oldest Investment allocation and each subsequent Investment in the order received.

Example: (using the previous example): On July 15, you allocate an additional $5,000 to the DCA Plus Option at a Guaranteed Interest Rate of 4.00%. On August 1, your DCA Plus Fixed Option Value has increased to $11,758.30. An amount equal to $2,939.58 ($11,758.30/4) is transferred from the DCA Plus Fixed Option to the Variable Investment Options. The remaining DCA Plus Fixed Option Value is $8,818.72.

The minimum amount for the DCA Plus monthly transfer is $250. If a monthly DCA Plus transfer amount is less than $250, we may transfer your entire DCA Plus Fixed Option Value to the Variable Investment Options according to your most recent DCA Plus transfer instructions and automatically terminate your DCA Plus.

DCA Plus transfers must be made on a monthly basis to the Variable Investment Options. No transfers to the DCA Plus Fixed Option may be made at any time. You cannot choose to transfer other than monthly. Unless otherwise instructed, any additional Investment we receive during a Guarantee Term will be allocated to the Investment Options, including the DCA Plus Fixed Option if so indicated, according to your most recent allocation instructions.

If the Owner dies while transfers are being made from the DCA Plus Fixed Option and the surviving spouse of the deceased Owner elects to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms, transfers will continue to be made from the DCA Plus Fixed Option to the selected Variable Investment Options, until the Guarantee Term ends.

Some of the terms we’ve used in this Prospectus may be new to you. We’ve identified them in the Prospectus by capitalizing the first letter of each word. You will find an explanation of what they mean below.

If you have any questions, please ask your registered representative or call us at 1-800-748-6907.

Account Value – The amount of your Contract Value allocated to a specified Variable Investment Option or any fixed option.

Annual Fee – A $30 fee charged each year on your Contract Anniversary and at the time of a full withdrawal, if your Net Contract Value is less than $50,000 on that date.

Annuitant – A person on whose life annuity payments may be determined. An Annuitant’s life may also be used to determine certain increases in death benefits, and to determine the Annuity Date. A Contract may name a single (“sole”) Annuitant or two (“Joint”) Annuitants, and may also name a “Contingent” Annuitant. If you name Joint Annuitants or a Contingent Annuitant, “the Annuitant” means the sole surviving Annuitant, unless otherwise stated.

Annuity Date – The date specified in your Contract, or the date you later elect, if any, for the start of annuity payments if the Annuitant (or Joint Annuitants) is (or are) still living and your Contract is in force; or if earlier, the date that annuity payments actually begin.

Annuity Option – Any one of the income options available for a series of payments after your Annuity Date.

Beneficiary – A person who may have a right to receive the death benefit payable upon the death of the Annuitant or a Contract Owner prior to the Annuity Date, or may have a right to receive remaining guaranteed annuity payments, if any, if the Annuitant dies after the Annuity Date.

Business Day – Any day on which the value of an amount invested in a Variable Investment Option is required to be determined, which currently includes each day that the New York Stock Exchange is open for trading and our administrative offices are open. The New York Stock Exchange and our administrative offices are closed on weekends and on the following holidays: New Year’s Day, Martin Luther King, Jr. Day, President’s Day, Good Friday, Memorial Day, July Fourth, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day, and the Friday before New Year’s Day, July Fourth or Christmas Day if that holiday falls on a Saturday, the Monday following New Year’s Day, July Fourth or Christmas Day if that holiday falls on a Sunday, unless unusual business conditions exist, such as the ending of a monthly or yearly accounting period. In this Prospectus, “day” or “date” means Business Day unless otherwise specified. If any transaction or event called for under a Contract is scheduled to occur on a day that is not a Business Day, such transaction or event will be deemed to occur on the next following Business Day unless otherwise specified. Any systematic pre-authorized transaction scheduled to occur on December 30 or December 31 where that day is not a Business Day will be deemed an order for the last Business Day of the calendar year and will be calculated using the applicable Subaccount Unit Value at the close of that Business Day. Special circumstances such as leap years and months with fewer than 31 days are discussed in the SAI.

Contingent Annuitant – A person, if named in your Contract, who will become your sole surviving Annuitant if your existing sole Annuitant (or both Joint Annuitants) should die before your Annuity Date.

Contingent Owner – A person, if named in your Contract, who will succeed to the rights as a Contract Owner of your Contract if all named Contract Owners die before your Annuity Date.

Contract Anniversary – The same date, in each subsequent year, as your Contract Date.

Contract Date – The date we issue your Contract. Contract Years, Contract Semi-Annual Periods, Contract Quarters and Contract Months are measured from this date.

Contract Debt – As of the end of any given Business Day, the principal amount you have outstanding on any loan under your Contract, plus any accrued and unpaid interest. Loans are only available on certain Qualified Contracts.

Contract Owner, Owner, Policyholder, you, or your – Generally, a person who purchases a Contract and makes the Investments. A Contract Owner has all rights in the Contract, including the right to make withdrawals, designate and change beneficiaries, transfer amounts among Investment Options, and designate an Annuity Option. If your Contract names Joint Owners, both Joint Owners are Contract Owners and share all such rights. If there are Joint Owners, the Contract will be owned as Joint Tenants With Right of Survivorship and not as Tenants in Common.

Contract Value – As of the end of any Business Day, the sum of your Variable Account Value, any fixed option value, the value of any other Investment Option added to the Contract by Rider or Endorsement, and any Loan Account Value.

Contract Year – A year that starts on the Contract Date or on a Contract Anniversary.

DCA Plus Fixed Option – If you allocate all or part of your investments to the DCA Plus Fixed Option, such amounts are held in our General Account and receive interest at rates declared periodically (the “Guaranteed Interest Rate”), but not less than an annual rate of 3%.

DCA Plus Fixed Option Value – The aggregate amount of your Contract Value allocated to the DCA Plus Fixed Option.

Earnings – As of the end of any Business Day, your Earnings equal your Contract Value less your aggregate Investments, which are reduced by withdrawals of prior Investments.

Fund – Pacific Select Fund, AllianceBernstein Variable Products Series Fund, Inc., BlackRock Variable Series Fund, Inc. and/or Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust.

General Account – Our General Account consists of all of our assets other than those assets allocated to Separate Account A or to any of our other separate accounts.

Guarantee Term – The period during which an amount you allocate to any available fixed option earns a Guaranteed Interest Rate. These terms are up to one-year for a fixed option.

Guaranteed Interest Rate – The interest rate guaranteed at the time of allocation (or rollover) for the Guarantee Term on amounts allocated to a fixed option. All Guaranteed Interest Rates are expressed as annual rates and interest is accrued daily. The rate will not be less than an annual rate of 3%.

Investment (“Premium Payment”) (“Purchase Payment”) – An amount paid to us by or on behalf of a Contract Owner as consideration for the benefits provided under the Contract.

Investment Option – A Subaccount, any fixed option or any other Investment Option added to the Contract by Rider or Endorsement.

Joint Annuitant – If your Contract is a Non-Qualified Contract, you may name two Annuitants, called “Joint Annuitants,” in your application for your Contract. Special restrictions apply for Qualified Contracts.

Loan Account – The Account in which the amount equal to the principal amount of a loan and any interest accrued is held to secure any Contract Debt.

Loan Account Value – The amount, including any interest accrued, held in the Loan Account to secure any Contract Debt.

Non-Natural Owner – A corporation, trust or other entity that is not a (natural) person.

Portfolio – A separate portfolio of a Fund in which a Subaccount invests its assets.

Primary Annuitant – The individual that is named in your Contract, the events in the life of whom are of primary importance in affecting the timing or amount of the payout under the Contract.

Purchase Payment (“Premium Payment”) (“Investment”) – An amount paid to us by or on behalf of a Contract Owner as consideration for the benefits provided under the Contract.

Qualified Contract – A Contract that qualifies under the Code as an individual retirement annuity or account (IRA), or form thereof, or a Contract purchased by a Qualified Plan, qualifying for special tax treatment under the Code.

Qualified Plan – A retirement plan that receives favorable tax treatment under Section 401 or 403 of the Code.

Separate Account A (the “Separate Account”) – A separate account of ours registered as a unit investment trust under the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended (the “1940 Act”).

Subaccount – An investment division of the Separate Account. Each Subaccount invests its assets in shares of a corresponding Portfolio.

Subaccount Annuity Unit – Subaccount Annuity Units (or “Annuity Units”) are used to measure variation in variable annuity payments. To the extent you elect to convert all or some of your Contract Value into variable annuity payments, the amount of each annuity payment (after the first payment) will vary with the value and number of Annuity Units in each Subaccount attributed to any variable annuity payments. At annuitization (after any applicable premium taxes and/or other taxes are paid), the amount annuitized to a variable annuity determines the amount of your first variable annuity payment and the number of Annuity Units credited to your annuity in each Subaccount. The value of Subaccount Annuity Units, like the value of Subaccount Units, is expected to fluctuate daily, as described in the definition of Unit Value.

Subaccount Unit – Before your Annuity Date, each time you allocate an amount to a Subaccount, your Contract is credited with a number of Subaccount Units in that Subaccount. These Units are used for accounting purposes to measure your Account Value in that Subaccount. The value of Subaccount Units is expected to fluctuate daily, as described in the definition of Unit Value.

Unit Value – The value of a Subaccount Unit (“Subaccount Unit Value”) or Subaccount Annuity Unit (“Subaccount Annuity Unit Value”). Unit Value of any Subaccount is subject to change on any Business Day in much the same way that the value of a mutual fund share changes each day. The fluctuations in value reflect the investment results, expenses of and charges against the Portfolio in which the Subaccount invests its assets. Fluctuations also reflect charges against the Separate Account. Changes in Subaccount Annuity Unit Values also reflect an additional factor that adjusts Subaccount Annuity Unit Values to offset our Annuity Option Table’s implicit assumption of an annual investment return of 4%. The effect of this assumed investment return is explained in detail in the SAI. Unit Value of a Subaccount Unit or Subaccount Annuity Unit on any Business Day is measured as of the close of the New York Stock Exchange on that Business Day, which usually closes at 4:00 p.m., Eastern time, although it occasionally closes earlier.

Variable Account Value – The aggregate amount of your Contract Value allocated to all Subaccounts.

Variable Investment Option – A Subaccount (also called a Variable Account).

The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical assumptions and are for example purposes only. The examples have been provided to assist in understanding the benefits provided by this Rider and to demonstrate how Purchase Payments received and withdrawals made from the Contract prior to the Annuity Date affect the values and benefits under this Rider over an extended period of time. The examples are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns.


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date


	•	Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Remaining Protected Balance = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000
	•	Maximum Credit Base = 200% of the Initial Purchase Payment = $200,000


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Years 1 and 2.
	•	No withdrawals taken.
	•	Automatic reset at Beginning of Contract Year 10.

Immediately after the $100,000 subsequent Purchase Payment during Contract Year 1, the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance are increased by the Purchase Payment amount to $200,000 ($100,000 + $100,000). Since the subsequent Purchase Payment is received in Contract Year 1, the Maximum Credit Base is increased by 200% of the Purchase Payment, to

$400,000. The Protected Payment Amount after the Purchase Payment is equal to $10,000 (5% of the Protected Payment Base after the Purchase Payment since there were no withdrawals during that Contract Year).

Since no withdrawal occurred prior to the Contract Anniversary at the Beginning of Contract Year 2, an annual credit of $20,000 (10% of the initial Remaining Protected Balance plus cumulative Purchase Payments received after the Rider Effective Date) is applied to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on that Contract Anniversary, increasing both to $220,000. As a result, the Protected Payment Amount on that Contract Anniversary is equal to $11,000 (5% of the Protected Payment Base on that Contract Anniversary).

Immediately after the $100,000 subsequent Purchase Payment during Contract Year 2, the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance are increased by the Purchase Payment amount to $320,000 ($220,000 + $100,000). Since the subsequent Purchase Payment is received in Contract Year 2, the Maximum Credit Base is increased by 100% of the Purchase Payment, to $500,000. The Protected Payment Amount after the Purchase Payment is equal to $16,000 (5% of the Protected Payment Base after the Purchase Payment since there were no withdrawals during that Contract Year).

Since no withdrawal occurred prior to the Contract Anniversary at the Beginning of Contract Year 3, an annual credit of $30,000 (10% of the initial Remaining Protected Balance plus cumulative Purchase Payments received after the Rider Effective Date) is applied to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on that Contract Anniversary, increasing both to $350,000. As a result, the Protected Payment Amount on that Contract Anniversary is equal to $17,500 (5% of the Protected Payment Base on that Contract Anniversary).

An Annual Credit is no longer applied after the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance reach the Maximum Credit Base of $500,000 in Contract Year 8.

Because at the Beginning of Contract Year 10, the Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary (see balances at Beginning of Contract Year 10 – Prior to Automatic Reset), an automatic reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (see balances at Beginning of Contract Year 10 – After Automatic Reset). As a result, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to $25,812 (5% of the reset Protected Payment Base).

In addition to Purchase Payments, the Contract Value is further subject to increases and/or decreases during each Contract Year as a result of additional amounts credited, charges, fees and other deductions, and increases and/or decreases in the investment performance of the Variable Account.


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Years 1 and 2.
	•	A withdrawal equal to or less than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Years 3 and 4.
	•	Automatic reset at Beginning of Contract Year 6.

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

As the withdrawal during Contract Year 3 did not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($17,500):

As the withdrawal during Contract Year 4 did not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($17,500):

Because at the Beginning of Contract Year 6, the Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary (see balances at Beginning of Contract Year 6 – Prior to Automatic Reset), an automatic reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (see balances at Beginning of Contract Year 6 – After Automatic Reset). As a result, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to $17,753 (5% of the reset Protected Payment Base).

Since a withdrawal occurred during Contract Year 3, no annual credit will be applied to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary following the withdrawal.


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Years 1 and 2.
	•	A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Years 3 and 4.
	•	Automatic resets at Beginning of Contract Years 5 and 6.

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

Because the $20,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 3 exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($20,000> $17,500), the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance immediately after the withdrawal are adjusted to the lesser of:


	(a)	the Contract Value immediately after the withdrawal ($323,994); or
	(b)	the Remaining Protected Balance immediately prior to the withdrawal, less the withdrawal amount ($350,000 - $20,000 = $330,000).

The Protected Payment Amount immediately after the withdrawal is equal to $0 (5% of the Protected Payment Base after the withdrawal (5% of $323,994 = $16,199), less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year ($20,000), but not less than zero).

Because the $20,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 4 exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($20,000> $16,199), the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance immediately after the withdrawal are adjusted to the lesser of:


	(c)	the Contract Value immediately after the withdrawal ($326,673); or


	(d)	the Remaining Protected Balance immediately prior to the withdrawal, less the withdrawal amount ($323,994 - $20,000 = $303,994).

The Protected Payment Amount immediately after the withdrawal is equal to $0 (5% of the Protected Payment Base after the withdrawal (5% of $303,994 = $15,199), less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year ($20,000), but not less than zero).

Because at the Beginning of Contract Year 5, the Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary (see balances at Beginning of Contract Year 5 – Prior to Automatic Reset), an automatic reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (see balances at Beginning of Contract Year 5 – After Automatic Reset). As a result, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to $16,333 (5% of the reset Protected Payment Base).


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	No subsequent Purchase Payments received.
	•	No withdrawals taken.
	•	Automatic reset at Beginning of Contract Years 3 and 5.

On the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 2, an Annual Credit of $10,000 (10% of the Remaining Protected Balance) is added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance.

An Annual Credit of $10,000 would have been applied on the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 3, but an Automatic Reset takes place instead, resetting the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to $125,000.

On the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 4, an Annual Credit of $12,500 (10% of the Remaining Protected Balance) is added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance.

An Annual Credit of $12,500 would have been applied on the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 5, but an Automatic Reset took place instead, resetting the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to $190,000.

On the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 6, an Annual Credit of $19,000 (10% of the Remaining Protected Balance) is added, increasing the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to $209,000. Annual Credits will no longer be added since the Maximum Credit Base of $200,000 has been reached.

The effect of cumulative RMD Withdrawals during the Contract Year that exceed the Protected Payment Amount established for that Contract Year and its effect on the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance. The Annual RMD Amount is based on the entire interest of your Contract as of the previous year-end.

This table assumes quarterly withdrawals of only the Annual RMD Amount during the Contract Year. The calculated Annual RMD amount for the Calendar Year is $7,500 and the Contract Anniversary is May 1 of each year.

Because all withdrawals during the Contract Year were RMD Withdrawals, there is no adjustment to the Protected Payment Base for exceeding the Protected Payment Amount. The only effect is a reduction in the Remaining Protected Balance equal to the amount of each withdrawal. In addition, the Protected Payment Amount is reduced by the amount of each withdrawal until the Protected Payment Amount is zero.

This chart assumes quarterly withdrawals of the Annual RMD Amount and other non-RMD Withdrawals during the Contract Year. The calculated Annual RMD amount and Contract Anniversary are the same as above.

On 3/15/07 there was an RMD Withdrawal of $1,875 and on 4/1/07 a non-RMD Withdrawal of $2,000. Because the total withdrawals during the Contract Year (5/1/06 through 4/30/07) did not exceed the Protected Payment Amount of $5,000 there was no adjustment to the Protected Payment Base. The only effect is a reduction in the Remaining Protected Balance and the Protected Payment Amount equal to the amount of each withdrawal. On 5/1/07, the Protected Payment Amount was re-calculated (5% of the Protected Payment Base) as of that Contract Anniversary.

On 11/15/07, there was a Non-RMD Withdrawal ($4,000) that caused the cumulative withdrawals during the Contract Year ($7,750) to exceed the Protected Payment Amount ($5,000). Because the $4,000 Non-RMD Withdrawal exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance immediately after the withdrawal are reset to the lesser of: (a) the Contract Value immediately after the withdrawal; or (b) the Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal, less the withdrawal amount.

Assuming that the Contract Value immediately after the withdrawal was $90,000, the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected balance will be reset to $88,375 ($92,375 - $4,000=$88,375) which is the Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal, less the withdrawal amount.


•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•	No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
•	Owner is age 59 1/2 or older when the first withdrawal was taken
•	Withdrawals, each equal to 5% of the Protected Payment Base are taken each Contract Year.
•	No automatic reset or Owner-elected reset is assumed during the life of the Rider.


	•	Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Remaining Protected Balance = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000

Because the amount of each withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($5,000): (a) the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged; and (b) the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the amount of each withdrawal.

Since a withdrawal occurred during Contract Year 1, no annual credit will be applied to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary following the withdrawal.

Since it was assumed that the Owner was age 59 1/2 or older when the first withdrawal was taken, withdrawals of 5% of the Protected Payment Base will continue to be paid each year (even after the Contract Value and Remaining Protected Balance have been reduced to zero) until the day of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant, whichever occurs first.

Examples 1 through 5 apply to the Flexible Lifetime Income (Single) and (Joint) Riders


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date


	•	Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Remaining Protected Balance = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.
	•	No withdrawals taken.
	•	No automatic resets or Owner-elected resets.

Immediately after the $100,000 subsequent Purchase Payment during Contract Year 1, the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance are increased by the Purchase Payment amount to $200,000 ($100,000 + $100,000). The Protected Payment Amount after the Purchase Payment is equal to $10,000 (5% of the Protected Payment Base after the Purchase Payment since there were no withdrawals during that Contract Year).

Since no withdrawal occurred prior to the Contract Anniversary at the Beginning of Contract Year 2, an annual credit of $12,000 (6% of the initial Remaining Protected Balance plus cumulative Purchase Payments received after the Rider Effective Date) is applied to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on that Contract Anniversary, increasing both to $212,000. As a result, the Protected Payment Amount on that Contract Anniversary is equal to $10,600 (5% of the Protected Payment Base on that Contract Anniversary).


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.
	•	A withdrawal equal to or less than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Years 2, 3 and 4.
	•	Automatic resets at Beginning of Contract Years 4 and 5.

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

As the withdrawal during Contract Year 2 did not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($10,600):


	(a)	the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged; and
	(b)	the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the amount of the withdrawal to $201,400 ($212,000 – $10,600).

As the withdrawal during Contract Year 3 did not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($10,600):


	(c)	the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged; and
	(d)	the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the amount of the withdrawal to $190,800 ($201,400 – $10,600).

Because at the Beginning of Contract Year 4, the Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary (see balances at Beginning of Contract Year 4 – Prior to Automatic Reset), an automatic reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (see balances at Beginning of Contract Year 4 – After Automatic Reset). As a result, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to $10,752 (5% of the reset Protected Payment Base).

As the withdrawal during Contract Year 4 did not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($10,600):


	(e)	the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged;
	(f)	the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the amount of the withdrawal to $204,452 ($215,052 – $10,600); and


	(g)	the Protected Payment Amount is reduced to $152 (5% of the Protected Payment Base less cumulative withdrawals (5% x $215,052 - $10,600 = $152).

Since withdrawals occurred during Contract Years 2, 3 and 4, no annual credit will be applied to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary following the withdrawal.


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.
	•	A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Years 2, 3 and 4.
	•	Automatic resets at Beginning of Contract Years 3, 4 and 5.

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

Because the $15,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2 exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($15,000 >$10,600), the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance immediately after the withdrawal are adjusted to the lesser of:


	(a)	the Contract Value immediately after the withdrawal ($206,490); or
	(b)	the Remaining Protected Balance immediately prior to the withdrawal, less the withdrawal amount ($212,000 – $15,000 = $197,000).

The Protected Payment Amount immediately after the withdrawal is equal to $0 (5% of the Protected Payment Base after the withdrawal (5% of $197,000 = $9,850), less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year ($15,000), but not less than zero).

Because at the Beginning of Contract Year 3, the Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary (see balances at Beginning of Contract Year 3 – Prior to Automatic Reset), an automatic reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (see balances at Beginning of Contract Year 3 – After Automatic Reset). As a result, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to $10,324 (5% of the reset Protected Payment Base).

Because the $15,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 3 exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($15,000 >$10,324), the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance immediately after the withdrawal are adjusted to the lesser of:


	(c)	the Contract Value immediately after the withdrawal ($205,944); or
	(d)	the Remaining Protected Balance immediately prior to the withdrawal, less the withdrawal amount ($206,490 – $15,000 = $191,490).

The Protected Payment Amount immediately after the withdrawal is equal to $0 (5% of the Protected Payment Base after the withdrawal (5% of $191,490 = $9,574), less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year ($15,000), but not less than zero).

the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (see balances at Beginning of Contract Year 4 – After Automatic Reset). As a result, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to $10,297 (5% of the reset Protected Payment Base).

Because the $15,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 4 exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($15,000 >$10,297), the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance immediately after the withdrawal are adjusted to the lesser of:


	(e)	the Contract Value immediately after the withdrawal ($205,360); or
	(f)	the Remaining Protected Balance immediately prior to the withdrawal, less the withdrawal amount ($205,944 – $15,000 = $190,944).

The Protected Payment Amount immediately after the withdrawal is equal to $0 (5% of the Protected Payment Base after the withdrawal (5% of $191,490 = $9,547), less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year ($15,000), but not less than zero).

Assuming that the Contract Value immediately after the withdrawal was $90,000, the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected balance will be reset to $88,375 ($92,375 — $4,000 = $88,375) which is the Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal, less the withdrawal amount.


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
	•	Owner is age 59 1/2 or older when the first withdrawal was taken.
	•	Withdrawals, each equal to 5% of the Protected Payment Base are taken each Contract Year.
	•	No automatic reset or Owner-elected reset is assumed during the life of the Rider.


	•	Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Remaining Protected Balance = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000

Since a withdrawal occurred during Contract Year 1, no annual credit will be applied to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary following the withdrawal.


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
	•	Withdrawals, each equal to 5% of the Protected Payment Base are taken each Contract Year.
	•	No automatic reset or Owner-elected reset is assumed during the life of the Rider.
	•	All Designated Lives remain eligible for lifetime income benefits while the Rider is in effect.


	•	Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Remaining Protected Balance = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000

During Contract Year 13, the death of the first Designated Life occurred. Withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount (5% of the Protected Payment Base) will continue to be paid each year (even after the Contract Value and Remaining Protected Balance were reduced to zero) until the death of all Designated Lives eligible for lifetime benefits.

If there was a change in Owner, Beneficiary or marital status prior to the death of the first Designated Life that resulted in the surviving Designated Life (spouse) to become ineligible for lifetime income benefits, then the lifetime income benefits under the Rider would not continue for the surviving Designated Life and the Rider would terminate upon the death of the first Designated Life.

GUARANTEED PROTECTION ADVANTAGE 3 (GPA 3) and GUARANTEED PROTECTION ADVANTAGE 5 (GPA 5) RIDER SAMPLE CALCULATIONS

The numeric examples shown in this section are based on certain assumptions. They have been provided to assist in understanding the benefits provided by this Rider and to demonstrate how Purchase Payments and withdrawals made from the Contract Prior to the end of a 10-Year Term effect the values and benefits under this Rider. These examples are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns.


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $20,000 is received in Contract Year 1 and $10,000 is received in Contract Year 4.
	•	A withdrawal of $10,000 is taken during Contract Year 7.

The Guaranteed Protection Amount is equal to (a) + (b) - (c) as indicated below:


	(a)	is the Contract Value at the start of the Term,
	(b)	is the amount of each subsequent Purchase Payment received during the first year of the Term, and


	(c)	is a pro rata adjustment for withdrawals made from the Contract during the Term. The adjustment for each withdrawal is calculated by multiplying the Guaranteed Protection Amount prior to the withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of the withdrawal, including any applicable withdrawal charges, premium taxes, and/or other taxes, to the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal.


	•	Guaranteed Protected Amount = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000 ($100,000 + 0 - 0 = $100,000)

During Contract Year 1, an additional Purchase Payment of $20,000 was made. Since this Purchase Payment was made during the first Contract Year, the Guaranteed Protection Amount will be increased by $20,000 to $120,000. ($100,000 + $20,000 - 0 = $120,000)

During Contract Year 4, an additional Purchase Payment of $10,000 was made. However, this Purchase Payment will not increase the Guaranteed Protection Amount because it was not made during the first Contract Year (or first year of the 10-Year Term).

On the 6^th Contract Anniversary, there was an optional Step-Up elected. The Step-Up will reset the Guaranteed Protection Amount equal to the Contract Value ($124,662) as of that Contract Anniversary.

During Contract Year 7, a withdrawal of $10,000 was made. This withdrawal will reduce the Guaranteed Protection Amount on a pro-rata basis and will result in a new Guaranteed Protection Amount. The pro-rata adjustment is $10,453 and was determined by finding the ratio of the withdrawal to the Contract Value immediately before the withdrawal ($10,000/$119,259 = 0.08385) multiplied by the Guaranteed Protection Amount prior to the withdrawal ($124,662*0.0835 = $10,453). The new Guaranteed Protection Amount (a) + (b) - (c) = $114,209 ($124,662 + 0 - $10,453 = 114,209).

At the end of Contract Year 15 (end of the 10-Year Term) the Contract Value ($88,664) is less than the Guaranteed Protection Amount ($114,209). Therefore, $25,508 ($114,209 - $88,664 = $25,545) is added to the Contract Value and the Rider terminates.

The numeric examples shown in this section are based on certain assumptions. They have been provided to assist in understanding the benefits provided by the Guaranteed Income Advantage Plus (“GIA Plus”) Rider, and to demonstrate how Purchase Payments received and withdrawals made from the Contract prior to the Annuity Date affect the values and benefits under this Rider over an extended period of time. These examples are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns.

Example #1—The initial values on the Rider Effective Date based on an Initial Purchase Payment of $100,000. The Initial Purchase Payment is assumed to be the Contract Value if the Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.

Example #2—Subsequent Purchase Payment received during the first Contract Year and its effect on the values and balances under this Rider. This example assumes that no withdrawals have been made.

The Guaranteed Income Base prior to receipt of the Purchase Payment is assumed to have accumulated to $101,237. This amount is derived by multiplying each day’s Guaranteed Income Base by the daily factor of 1.000133680. As a result of the subsequent Purchase Payment, the Guaranteed Income Base is increased to $201,237 ($101,237 + $100,000). The Guaranteed Income Base will assume to accumulate to $208,717 at the next Contract Anniversary, by multiplying each day’s Guaranteed Income Base immediately after receipt of the subsequent Purchase Payment by the daily factor of 1.000133680.

The GIA Plus Step-Up Value prior to receipt of the Purchase Payment is $100,000. As a result of the subsequent Purchase Payment, the GIA Plus Step-Up Value is increased to $200,000 ($100,000 + $100,000). On the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 2, the Contract Value ($205,242) is greater than the GIA Plus Step-Up Value immediately prior to that Contract Anniversary ($200,000). As a result, the GIA Plus Step-Up Value as of that Contract Anniversary is equal to the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary ($205,242).

The GIA Plus Withdrawal Base on the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 2 is equal to the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base on the Rider Effective Date ($100,000) plus cumulative Purchase Payments received after the Rider Effective Date ($100,000). As a result of the subsequent Purchase Payment, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base on the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 2 is equal to $200,000 ($100,000 + $100,000).

The GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 2 is determined on the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 2, and is equal to 5% of the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base on that Contract Anniversary (5% of $200,000). As a result of the subsequent Purchase Payment, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 2 is equal to $10,000.

Since no withdrawals were made during Contract Year 1, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 1 ($5,000) becomes the remaining dollar amount of the prior Contract Year’s GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 2.

Example #3—Cumulative withdrawals during Contract Year 2 exceeding the sum of: (a) the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 2; and (b) the remaining dollar amount of the prior Contract Year’s GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 2. The withdrawal is assumed to result in a 10% reduction in the Contract Value.

The GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 3 is determined on the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 3, and is equal to 5% of the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base on that Contract Anniversary (5% of $200,000). As a result, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 3 is equal to $10,000. The GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for any Contract Year will not be less than zero.

Immediately after the withdrawal, the Guaranteed Income Base and the GIA Plus Step-Up Value are reduced by the percentage decrease (10%) in Contract Value as a result of the withdrawal.

Since no subsequent Purchase Payments were received during Contract Year 2, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base at the beginning of Contract Year 3 remains unchanged.

Example #4—Cumulative withdrawals during Contract Year 3 not exceeding the sum of: (a) the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 3; and (b) the remaining dollar value of the prior Contract Year’s GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 3.

Because cumulative withdrawals for Contract Year 3 did not exceed the sum of: (a) the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 3; and (b) the remaining dollar amount of the prior Contract Year’s GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 3, the Guaranteed Income Base on the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 4 is calculated as follows:


	Guaranteed Income Base on the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 3: $197,237

	Increased at an annual rate of 5% to the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 4: + $9,862

	Reduced by the amount equal to the amount withdrawn in Contract Year 3: - $8,000


	Guaranteed Income Base on the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 4: $199,099

Since no subsequent Purchase Payments were received during Contract Year 3, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base at the beginning of Contract Year 4 remains unchanged.

The GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 4 is determined on the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 4, and is equal to 5% of the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base on that Contract Anniversary (5% of $200,000). As a result, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 4 is equal to $10,000.

Because cumulative withdrawals for Contract Year 3 did not exceed the sum of: (a) the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 3; and (b) the remaining dollar value of the prior Contract Year’s GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 3; the dollar amount of the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contact Year 3 remaining ($2,000) becomes the remaining dollar amount of the prior Contract Year’s GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 4.

Example #5—Rider values on each Contract Anniversary based on an Initial Purchase Payment of $100,000 paid on the Contract Date. The values further assume that no subsequent Purchase Payments are received and no withdrawals are taken during the first ten (10) Contract Years after the Rider Effective Date. The Initial Purchase Payment is assumed to be the Contract Value if the Rider is effective on a Contract Anniversary.

Example #6—Rider values on each Contract Anniversary based on an Initial Purchase Payment of $100,000 paid on the Contract Date. The values further assume that no subsequent Purchase Payments are received and withdrawals of $5,000 are taken each Contract Year for the first ten (10) Contract Years after the Rider Effective Date. The Initial Purchase Payment is assumed to be the Contract Value if the Rider is effective on a Contract Anniversary.

Should the Contract annuitize immediately after the Rider has been in effect for at least ten (10) years and the GIA Plus Annuity Option has been elected to provide such payments, the net amount applied on the Annuity Date as a single premium to provide the payments is equal to the greater of:


	(a)	the Guaranteed Income Base; or

	(b)	the GIA Plus Step-Up Value; *less* any:


	(c)	applicable withdrawal charges resulting from the conversion to the GIA Plus Annuity Option;


	(d)	applicable annual charges for expenses related to other optional benefit riders attached to the Contract that are in effect as of the Annuity Date; and

Under Example #5, the net amount applied on the Annuity Date (the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 11) is equal to the Guaranteed Income Base ($162,889), as it is greater than the GIA Plus Step-Up Value ($115,927) as of the Annuity Date, less the amounts in (c), (d) and (e) above, if any.

Under Example #6, the net amount applied on the Annuity Date (the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 11) is equal to the Guaranteed Income Base ($100,000), as it is greater than the GIA Plus Step-Up Value ($61,983) as of the Annuity Date, less the amounts in (c), (d) and (e) above, if any.

DEATH BENEFIT AMOUNT AND STEPPED-UP DEATH BENEFIT RIDER (SDBR) SAMPLE CALCULATIONS

The numeric examples shown in this section are based on certain assumptions. They have been provided to assist in understanding the death benefit amount under the Contract and the optional Stepped-Up Death Benefit Rider and to demonstrate how Purchase Payments and withdrawals made from the Contract may effect the values and benefits. These examples are not intended to reflect what your actual death benefit proceeds will be or serve as projections of future investment returns.


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $25,000 is received in Contract Year 3
	•	A withdrawal of $35,000 is taken during Contract Year 6.


	•	Return of Purchase Payment = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Contract Value = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

During Contract Year 3, an additional Purchase Payment of $25,000 was made. The Return of Purchase Payment death benefit increased to $125,000. The Contract Value increased to $133,468.

During Contract Year 6, a withdrawal of $35,000 was made. This withdrawal reduced the Return of Purchase Payment death benefit on a pro rata basis to $95,002 and decreased the Contract Value.

During Contract Year 10, death occurs. The death benefit amount will be the Return of Purchase Payments reduced by an amount for each withdrawal ($95,002) because that amount is greater than the Contract Value.

Using the table above, if death occurred in Contract Year 7, the death benefit amount would be the Contract Value ($111,666) because that amount is greater than the Return of Purchase Payment (reduced by an amount for withdrawals) of $95,002.


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $25,000 is received in Contract Year 3
	•	A withdrawal of $35,000 is taken during Contract Year 6
	•	Annual Step-ups occur on each of the first seven Contract Anniversaries


	•	Return of Purchase Payment = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Guaranteed Minimum (Stepped-Up) Death Benefit Amount = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Contract Value = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

During Contract Year 3, an additional Purchase Payment of $25,000 was made. This results in an increase in the Return of Purchase Payment death benefit amount to $125,000. The Contract Value increased to $133,468.

During Contract Year 6, a withdrawal of $35,000 was made. This withdrawal reduced the Return of Purchase Payments death benefit on a pro rata basis to $95,002 and decreased the Contract Value. In addition, the Guaranteed Minimum (Stepped-Up) Death Benefit Amount was reduced on a pro rata basis to $108,414.

During Contract Year 9, death occurs. The death benefit proceeds are the greater of the Death Benefit Amount (Contract Value or Return of Purchase Payments adjusted for withdrawals) or the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount. The death benefit proceeds are equal to the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount of $111,666 because it is greater than the Death Benefit Amount (Return of Purchase Payments of $95,002).

For Contracts in a Portfolio Optimization Model during the period May 4, 2007 to May 2, 2008

If you select a Portfolio Optimization model, until May 2, 2008 your Purchase Payments or Contract Value, as applicable, will be allocated to the Investment Options according to the model you select as indicated in the chart below. On May 2, 2008, we will automatically update your model to the Portfolio Optimization model allocations shown under the HOW YOUR INVESTMENTS ARE ALLOCATED— Portfolio Optimization section in this Prospectus.

If you have any questions about the Contract, please ask your registered representative or contact us.

The SAI has been filed with the SEC and is considered to be part of this Prospectus because it is incorporated by reference. In this Prospectus, you will find the table of contents for the SAI on page

You can get a copy of the SAI at no charge by calling or writing to us, or by contacting the SEC. The SEC may charge you a fee for this information.

Send Investments, other payments and application forms to the following address:

Pacific Journey (the “Contract”) is a variable annuity contract offered by Pacific Life & Annuity Company (“PL&A”).

This Statement of Additional Information (“SAI”) is not a Prospectus and should be read in conjunction with the Contract’s Prospectus, dated May 1, 2008, and any supplement thereto, which is available without charge upon written or telephone request to PL&A. Terms used in this SAI have the same meanings as in the Prospectus, and some additional terms are defined particularly for this SAI. This SAI is incorporated by reference into the Contract’s Prospectus.

From time to time, our reports or other communications to current or prospective Contract Owners or our advertising or other promotional material may quote the performance (yield and total return) of a Subaccount. Quoted results are based on past performance and reflect the performance of all assets held in that Subaccount for the stated time period. Quoted results are neither an estimate nor a guarantee of future investment performance, and do not represent the actual experience of amounts invested by any particular Contract Owner.

A Subaccount may advertise its “average annual total return” over various periods of time. “Total return” represents the average percentage change in value of an investment in the Subaccount from the beginning of a measuring period to the end of that measuring period. “Annualized” total return assumes that the total return achieved for the measuring period is achieved for each such period for a full year. “Average annual” total return is computed in accordance with a standard method prescribed by the SEC, and is also referred to as “standardized return.”

To calculate a Subaccount’s average annual total return for a specific measuring period, we first take a hypothetical $1,000 investment in that Subaccount, at its then-applicable Subaccount Unit Value (the “initial payment”) and we compute the ending redeemable value of that initial payment at the end of the measuring period based on the investment experience of that Subaccount (“full withdrawal value”). The full withdrawal value reflects the effect of all recurring fees and charges applicable to a Contract Owner under the Contract, including the Risk Charge, the asset-based Administrative Fee and the deduction of the applicable withdrawal charge, but does not reflect any charges for applicable premium taxes and/or any other taxes, any optional Rider charge, any non-recurring fees or charges, or any increase in the Risk Charge for an optional Death Benefit Rider. The Annual Fee is also taken into account, assuming an average Contract Value of $45,000. The redeemable value is then divided by the initial payment and this quotient is raised to the 365/N power (N represents the number of days in the measuring period), and 1 is subtracted from this result. Average annual total return is expressed as a percentage.

Average annual total return figures will be given for recent one-, three-, five- and ten-year periods (if applicable), and may be given for other periods as well (such as from commencement of the Subaccount’s operations, or on a year-by-year basis).

When considering “average” total return figures for periods longer than one year, it is important to note that the relevant Subaccount’s annual total return for any one year in the period might have been greater or less than the average for the entire period.

A Subaccount may use “aggregate” total return figures along with its “average annual” total return figures for various periods; these figures represent the cumulative change in value of an investment in the Subaccount for a specific period. Aggregate total returns may be shown by means of schedules, charts or graphs and may indicate subtotals of the various components of total return. The SEC has not prescribed standard formulas for calculating aggregate total return.

Total returns may also be shown for the same periods that do not take into account the withdrawal charge or the Annual Fee.

We may also calculate non-standardized total returns which may or may not reflect any Annual Fee, and/or withdrawal charges, increases in Risk Charge for an optional Death Benefit Rider, charges for premium taxes and/or any other taxes, any charge for an optional Rider, and any non-recurring fees or charges.

Standardized return figures will always accompany any non-standardized returns shown.

The “yield” (also called “current yield”) of the Money Market Subaccount is computed in accordance with a standard method prescribed by the SEC. The net change in the Subaccount’s Unit Value during a seven-day period is divided by the Unit Value at the beginning of the period to obtain a base rate of return. The current yield is generated when the base rate is “annualized” by multiplying it by the fraction 365/7; that is, the base rate of return is assumed to be generated each week over a 365-day period and is shown as a percentage of the investment. The “effective yield” of the Money Market Subaccount is calculated similarly but, when annualized, the base rate of return is assumed to be reinvested. The effective yield will be slightly higher than the current yield because of the compounding effect of this assumed reinvestment.

The formula for effective yield is: [(Base Period Return + 1) (To the power of (365/7))] - 1.

Realized capital gains or losses and unrealized appreciation or depreciation of the assets of the underlying Money Market Portfolio are not included in the yield calculation. Current yield and effective yield do not reflect the deduction of charges for any applicable premium taxes and/or any other taxes, any increase in the Risk Charge for an optional Death Benefit Rider, any charges for an optional Rider or any non-recurring fees or charges, but do reflect a deduction for the Annual Fee, the Risk Charge, and the asset-based Administrative Fee and assume an average Contract Value of $45,000.

“Yield” of the other Subaccounts is computed in accordance with a different standard method prescribed by the SEC. The net investment income (investment income less expenses) per Subaccount Unit earned during a specified one-month or 30-day period is divided by the Subaccount Unit Value on the last day of the specified period. This result is then annualized (that is, the yield is assumed to be generated each month or each 30-day period for a year), according to the following formula, which assumes semi-annual compounding:

The yield of each Subaccount reflects the deduction of all recurring fees and charges applicable to the Subaccount, such as the Risk Charge, the asset-based Administrative Fee and the Annual Fee (assuming an average Contract Value of $45,000), but does not reflect any withdrawal charge, charge for applicable premium taxes and/or any other taxes, increase in the Risk Charge for an optional Death Benefit Rider, any charges for an optional Rider, or any non-recurring fees or charges.

The Subaccounts’ yields will vary from time to time depending upon market conditions, the composition of each Portfolio and operating expenses of the Fund allocated to each Portfolio. Consequently, any given performance quotation should not be considered representative of the Subaccount’s performance in the future.

In advertisements and sales literature, we may compare the performance of some or all of the Subaccounts to the performance of other variable annuity issuers in general and to the performance of particular types of variable annuities investing in mutual funds, or series of mutual funds, with investment objectives similar to each of the Subaccounts. This performance may be presented as averages or rankings compiled by Lipper Analytical Services, Inc. (“Lipper”), or Morningstar, Inc. (“Morningstar”), which are independent services that monitor and rank the performance of variable annuity issuers and mutual funds in each of the major categories of investment objectives on an industry-wide basis. Lipper’s rankings include variable life issuers as well as variable annuity issuers. The performance analyses prepared by Lipper and Morningstar rank such issuers on the basis of total return, assuming reinvestment of dividends and distributions, but do not take sales charges, redemption fees or certain expense deductions at the separate account level into consideration. In addition, Morningstar prepares risk adjusted rankings, which consider the effects of market risk on total return performance. We may also compare the performance of the Subaccounts with performance information included in other publications and services that monitor the performance of insurance company separate accounts or other investment vehicles. These other services or publications may be general interest business publications such as The Wall Street Journal, Barron’s, Business Week, Forbes, Fortune, and Money.

In addition, our reports and communications to Contract Owners, advertisements, or sales literature may compare a Subaccount’s performance to various benchmarks that measure the performance of a pertinent group of securities widely regarded by investors as being representative of the securities markets in general or as being representative of a particular type of security. We may also compare the performance of the Subaccounts with that of other appropriate indices of investment securities and averages for peer universes of funds or data developed by us derived from such indices or averages. Unmanaged indices generally assume the reinvestment of dividends or interest but do not generally reflect deductions for investment management or administrative costs and expenses.

In reports or other communications to you or in advertising or sales materials, we may also describe the effects of tax-deferred compounding on the Separate Account’s investment returns or upon returns in general. These effects may be illustrated in charts or graphs and may include comparisons at various points in time of returns under the Contract or in general on a tax-deferred basis with the returns on a taxable basis. Different tax rates may be assumed.

In general, individuals who own annuity contracts are not taxed on increases in the value under the annuity contract until some form of distribution is made from the contract. Thus, the annuity contract will benefit from tax deferral during the accumulation period, which generally will have the effect of permitting an investment in an annuity contract to grow more rapidly than a comparable investment under which increases in value are taxed on a current basis. The following chart illustrates this benefit by comparing accumulation under a variable annuity contract with accumulations from an investment on which gains are taxed on a current ordinary income basis.

The chart shows accumulations on a single Purchase Payment of $10,000, assuming hypothetical annual returns of 0%, 4% and 8%, compounded annually, and a tax rate of 33%. The values shown for the taxable investment do not include any deduction for management fees or other expenses but assume that taxes are deducted annually from investment returns. The values shown for the variable annuity do not reflect the deduction of contractual expenses such as the Risk Charge (equal to an annual rate of 0.90% of average daily Account Value), the Administrative Fee (equal to an annual rate of 0.15% of average daily Account Value) and the Annual Fee (equal to $30 per year if your Net Contract Value is less than $50,000), any increase in

Generally, the withdrawal charge is equal to 7% of the amount withdrawn attributable to Purchase Payments that are one year old, 7% of the amount withdrawn attributable to Purchase Payments that are two years old, 6% of the amount withdrawn attributable to Purchase Payments that are three years old, 5% of the amount withdrawn attributable to Purchase Payments that are four years old, 3% of the amount withdrawn attributable to Purchase Payments that are five years old, and 1% of the amount withdrawn attributable to Purchase Payments that are six years old. The age of Purchase Payments is considered 1 year old in the Contract Year we receive it and increases by one year on the beginning of the day preceding each Contract Anniversary. There is no withdrawal charge on withdrawals of your Earnings, on amounts attributed to Purchase Payments at least 7 years old, or to the extent that total withdrawals that are free of charge during the Contract Year do not exceed 10% of the sum of your remaining Purchase Payments at the beginning of the Contract Year that have been held under your Contract for less than seven years plus additional Purchase Payments applied to your Contract during that Contract Year. If these expenses and fees were taken into account, they would reduce the investment return shown for both the taxable investment and the hypothetical variable annuity contract. In addition, these values assume that you do not surrender the Contract or make any withdrawals until the end of the period shown. The chart assumes a full withdrawal, at the end of the period shown, of all Contract Value and the payment of taxes at the 33% rate on the amount in excess of the Purchase Payment.

The rates of return illustrated are hypothetical and are not an estimate or guarantee of performance. Actual tax rates may vary for different assets (e.g. capital gains and qualifying dividend income) and taxpayers from that illustrated and withdrawals by and distributions to Contract Owners who have not reached age 59 1/2 may be subject to a tax penalty of 10%.

Pacific Select Distributors, Inc., our affiliate, acts as the distributor of the Contracts and offers the Contracts on a continuous basis. PSD is located at 700 Newport Center Drive, Newport Beach, California 92660. PSD is registered as a broker-dealer with the SEC and is a member of FINRA. We pay PSD for acting as distributor under a Distribution Agreement. We and PSD enter into selling agreements with broker-dealers whose registered representatives are authorized by the Insurance Superintendent of the State of New York to solicit applications for the Contracts. Because the Contract was not offered before 2008, PSD was not paid any underwriting commissions with regard to this Contract.

PSD or an affiliate pays various sales compensation to broker-dealers that solicit applications for the Contracts. PSD or an affiliate also may provide reimbursement for other expenses associated with the promotion and solicitation of applications for the Contracts. Your registered representative typically receives a portion of the compensation that is payable to his or her broker-dealer in connection with the Contract, depending on the agreement between your registered representative and his or her firm. PL&A is not involved in determining that compensation arrangement, which may present its own incentives or conflicts. You may ask your registered representative how he/she will personally be compensated for the transaction.

Under certain circumstances where PSD pays lower initial commissions, certain broker-dealers that solicit applications for Contracts may be paid an ongoing persistency trail commission (sometimes called a residual). The mix of Purchase Payment-based versus trail commissions varies depending upon our agreement with the selling broker-dealer and the commission option selected by your registered representative or broker-dealer.

In addition to the Purchase Payment-based and trail commissions described above, we and/or an affiliate may pay additional cash compensation from our own resources in connection with the promotion and solicitation of

As of December 31, 2007, the following firms have arrangements in effect with the Distributor pursuant to which the firm is entitled to receive a revenue sharing payment:

A G Edwards & Sons Inc., A I G Financial Advisors Inc., Advantage Capital Corporation, American General Securities Inc., Askar Corporation, Associated Securities Corp., Bancwest Investment Services Inc., C C O Investment Services Corp, Capital Investment Brokerage Inc., Capital Investment Group Inc., C U S O Financial Services L P, Chevy Chase Financial Services Corp., Citigroup Global Markets Inc., Colonial Brokerage Inc., Commonwealth Financial Network, Compass Brokerage Inc., Countrywide Investment Services Inc., Essex National Securities Inc., F F P Securities Inc., F S C Securities Corporation, Financial Network Investment Corp., First Allied Securities Inc., First Citizens Investor Services Inc., First Heartland Capital Inc., First Tennessee Brokerage Inc., Geneos Wealth Management Inc., Great American Advisors Inc., I F M G Securities Inc., I N G Financial Partners Inc., Invest Financial Corporation, Investacorp Inc., Investment Centers of America Inc., J J B Hilliard, W L Lyons Inc., Jacques Financial L L C, Janney Montgomery Scott Inc., Jefferson Pilot Securities Corporation, Key Investment Services L L C, L P L Financial Corp., LaSalle Financial Services Inc., Lincoln Financial Advisors Corp., M Holdings Securities Inc., M L Stern & Co L L C, Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith, Morgan Keegan & Company Inc., Multi-Financial Securities Corp., Mutual Of Omaha Investor Services Inc., Mutual Service Corporation, N F P Securities Inc., NatCity Investments Inc., National Planning Corporation, NEXT Financial Group Inc., P N C Investments L L C, Pension Planners Securities Inc., Primevest Financial Services Inc., ProEquities Inc., R B C Dain Rauscher Inc., Raymond James & Associates Inc., Raymond James Financial Services Inc., Robert W Baird & Company Inc., Royal Alliance Associates Inc., S I I Investments Inc., Securities America, Sorrento Pacific Financial L L C, Sterne Agee Financial Services Inc., Sterne, Agee & Leach Inc., Stifel Nicolaus & Company Inc., Suntrust Investment Services Inc., Tower Square Securities Inc. Transamerica Financial Advisors Inc, Triad Advisors Inc, U B S Financial Services Inc, U S Bancorp Investments Inc., Unionbanc Investment Services L L C, United Planners’ Financial Services of America, Uvest Financial Services Group Inc., V S R Financial Services Inc., Vision Investment Services Inc., WaMu Investments Inc., Wachovia Securities Financial Network L L C, Wachovia Securities L L C, Walnut Street Securities, Waterstone Financial Group Inc., Wescom Financial Services L L C, Woodbury Financial Services Inc., Zions Direct Inc.

We or our affiliates may also pay override payments, expense allowances and reimbursements, bonuses, wholesaler fees, and training and marketing allowances. Such payments may offset the broker-dealer’s expenses in connection with activities that it is required to perform, such as educating personnel and maintaining records. Registered representatives may also receive non-cash compensation such as expense-paid educational or training seminars involving travel within and outside the U.S. or promotional merchandise.

All of the compensation described in this section, and other compensation or benefits provided by us or our affiliates, may be more or less than the overall compensation on similar or other products and may influence your registered representative or broker-dealer to present this Contract over other investment options. You may ask your registered representative about these potential conflicts of interests and how he/she and his/her broker-dealer are compensated for selling the Contract.

Portfolio Managers of the underlying Portfolios available under this Contract may from time to time bear all or a portion of the expenses of conferences or meetings sponsored by PL&A or PSD that are attended by,

The Unit Value of the Subaccount Units in each Variable Investment Option is computed at the close of the New York Stock Exchange, which is usually 4:00 p.m. Eastern time on each Business Day. The initial Unit Value of each Subaccount was $10 on the Business Day the Subaccount began operations. At the end of each Business Day, the Unit Value for a Subaccount is equal to:

The “Net Investment Factor” for a Subaccount for any valuation period is equal to:

As explained in the Prospectus, the Annual Fee, if applicable, will be charged proportionately against your Investment Options. Assessments against your Variable Investment Options are assessed against your Variable Account Value through the automatic debit of Subaccount Units; the Annual Fee decreases the number of Subaccount Units attributed to your Contract but does not alter the Unit Value for any Subaccount.

The following steps show how we determine the amount of each variable annuity payment under your Contract.

When you convert your Net Contract Value into annuity payments, you must pay any applicable charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes on your Contract Value (unless applicable law requires those taxes to be paid at a later time). We assess this charge by reducing your Account Value proportionately, relative to your Account Value in each Subaccount and in any fixed option, in an amount equal to the aggregate amount of the charges. The remaining amount of your available Net Contract Value may be used to provide variable annuity payments. Alternatively, your remaining available Net Contract Value may be used to provide fixed annuity payments, or it may be divided to provide both fixed and variable annuity payments. You may also choose to withdraw some or all of your remaining Net Contract Value, less any applicable Annual Fees, any charge for an optional Rider, and/or withdrawal charge, and any charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes without converting this amount into annuity payments.

We begin by referring to your Contract’s Option Table for your Annuity Option (the “Annuity Option Table”). The Annuity Option Table allows us to calculate the dollar amount of the first variable annuity payment under your Contract, based on the amount applied toward the variable annuity. The number that the Annuity Option Table yields will be based on the Annuitant’s age (and, in certain cases, sex) and assumes a 4% rate of return, as described in more detail below.

Example: Assume a man is 65 years of age at his Annuity Date and has selected a lifetime annuity with monthly payments guaranteed for 10 years. According to the Annuity Option Table, this man should receive an initial monthly payment of $5.20 for every $1,000 of his Contract Value (reduced by applicable charges) that he will be using to provide variable payments. Therefore, if his Contract Value after deducting applicable fees and charges is $100,000 on his Annuity Date and he applies this entire amount toward his variable annuity, his first monthly payment will be $520.00.

You may choose any other Annuity Option Table that assumes a different rate of return which we offer at the time your Annuity Option is effective.

For each Subaccount, we use the amount of the first variable annuity payment under your Contract attributed to each Subaccount to determine the number of Subaccount Annuity Units that will form the basis of subsequent payment amounts. First, we use the Annuity Option Table to determine the amount of that first variable payment for each Subaccount. Then, for each Subaccount, we divide that amount of the first variable annuity payment by the value of one Subaccount Annuity Unit (the “Subaccount Annuity Unit Value”) as of the end of the Annuity Date to obtain the number of Subaccount Annuity Units for that particular Subaccount. The number of Subaccount Annuity Units used to calculate subsequent payments under your Contract will not change unless exchanges of Annuity Units are made, (or if the Joint and Survivor Annuity Option is elected and the Primary Annuitant dies first,) but the value of those Annuity Units will change daily, as described below.

The amount of each subsequent variable annuity payment will be the sum of the amounts payable based on each Subaccount. The amount payable based on each Subaccount is equal to the number of Subaccount Annuity Units for that Subaccount multiplied by their Subaccount Annuity Unit Value at the end of the Business Day in each payment period you elected that corresponds to the Annuity Date.

Each Subaccount’s Subaccount Annuity Unit Value, like its Subaccount Unit Value, changes each day to reflect the net investment results of the underlying investment vehicle, as well as the assessment of the Risk Charge at an annual rate of 0.90% and the Administrative Fee at an annual rate of 0.15%. In addition, the calculation of Subaccount Annuity Unit Value incorporates an additional factor; as discussed in more detail below, this additional factor adjusts Subaccount Annuity Unit Values to correct for the Option Table’s implicit assumed annual investment return on amounts applied but not yet used to furnish annuity benefits. Any increase in your Risk Charge for an optional death benefit rider is not charged on and after the Annuity Date.

Different Subaccounts may be selected for your Contract before and after your Annuity Date, subject to any restrictions we may establish. Currently, you may exchange Subaccount Annuity Units in any Subaccount for Subaccount Annuity Units in any other Subaccount(s) up to four times in any twelve month period after your Annuity Date. The number of Subaccount Annuity Units in any Subaccount may change due to such exchanges. Exchanges following your Annuity Date will be made by exchanging Subaccount Annuity Units of equivalent aggregate value, based on their relative Subaccount Annuity Unit Values.

The Annuity Option Table incorporates a number of implicit assumptions in determining the amount of your first variable annuity payment. As noted above, the numbers in the Annuity Option Table reflect certain actuarial assumptions based on the Annuitant’s age, and, in some cases, the Annuitant’s sex. In addition, these numbers assume that the amount of your Contract Value that you convert to a variable annuity will have a positive net investment return of 4% each year during the payout of your annuity; thus 4% is referred to as an “assumed investment return.”

The Subaccount Annuity Unit Value for a Subaccount will increase only to the extent that the investment performance of that Subaccount exceeds the Risk Charge, the Administrative Fee, and the assumed investment return. The Subaccount Annuity Unit Value for any Subaccount will generally be less than the Subaccount Unit Value for that same Subaccount, and the difference will be the amount of the assumed investment return factor.

Example: Assume the net investment performance of a Subaccount is at a rate of 4.00% per year (after deduction of the 0.90% Risk Charge and the 0.15% Administrative Fee). The Subaccount Unit Value for that Subaccount would increase at a rate of 4.00% per year, but the Subaccount Annuity Unit Value would not increase (or decrease) at all. The net investment factor for that 4% return [1.04] is then divided by the factor for the 4% assumed investment return [1.04] and 1 is subtracted from the result to determine the adjusted rate of change in Subaccount Annuity Unit Value:

If the net investment performance of a Subaccount’s assets is at a rate less than 4.00% per year, the Subaccount Annuity Unit Value will decrease, even if the Subaccount Unit Value is increasing.

Example: Assume the net investment performance of a Subaccount is at a rate of 2.60% per year (after deduction of the 0.90% Risk Charge and the 0.15% Administrative Fee). The Subaccount Unit Value for that Subaccount would increase at a rate of 2.60% per year, but the Subaccount Annuity Unit Value would decrease at a rate of 1.35% per year. The net investment factor for that 2.6% return [1.026] is then divided by the factor for the 4% assumed investment return [1.04] and 1 is subtracted from the result to determine the adjusted rate of change in Subaccount Annuity Unit Value:

The assumed investment return will always cause increases in Subaccount Annuity Unit Values to be somewhat less than if the assumption had not been made, will cause decreases in Subaccount Annuity Unit Values to be somewhat greater than if the assumption had not been made, and will (as shown in the example

If variable payments are elected under Annuity Options 2 and 4, you may redeem all remaining guaranteed variable payments after the Annuity Date. Also, under Option 4, partial redemptions of remaining guaranteed variable payments after the Annuity Date are available. The amount available upon full redemption would be the present value of any remaining guaranteed variable payments at the assumed investment return. Any applicable withdrawal charge will be deducted from the present value as if you made a full withdrawal, or if applicable, a partial withdrawal. For purposes of calculating the withdrawal charge and Free Withdrawal amount, it will be assumed that the Contract was never converted to provide annuity payments and any prior variable annuity payments in that Contract Year will be treated as if they were partial withdrawals from the Contract. (See the CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS — Withdrawal Charge section in the Prospectus) For example, assume that a Contract was issued with a single investment of $10,000 and in Contract Year 4 the Owner elects to receive variable annuity payments under Annuity Option 4. In Contract Year 5, the Owner elects to make a partial redemption of $5,000. The withdrawal charge as a percentage of the Purchase Payments with an age of 5 years is 3%. Assuming the Free Withdrawal amount immediately prior to the partial redemption is $300, the withdrawal charge for the partial redemption will be $141 (($5,000 - $300) * 3%). No withdrawal charge will be imposed on a redemption if:


•	the Annuity Option is elected as the form of payments of death benefit proceeds, or

•	the Annuitant dies before the period certain has ended and the Beneficiary requests a redemption of the variable annuity payments.

The variable payment amount we use in calculating the present value is determined by summing an amount for each Subaccount, which we calculate by multiplying your Subaccount Annuity Units by the Annuity Unit Value next computed after we receive your redemption request. This variable payment amount is then discounted at the assumed investment return from each future Annuity Payment date that falls within the payment guaranteed period. The sum of these discounted remaining variable payment amounts is the present value of remaining guaranteed variable payments.

If you elect to redeem all remaining guaranteed variable payments in a single sum, we will not make any additional variable annuity payments during the remaining guaranteed period after the redemption.

If you elect to redeem a portion of the remaining guaranteed variable payments in a single sum, we will reduce the number of Annuity Units for each Subaccount by the same percentage as the partial redemption value bears to the amount available upon a full redemption.

Redemption of remaining guaranteed variable payments will not affect the amount of any fixed annuity payments.

If any transaction or event under your Contract is scheduled to occur on a “corresponding date” that does not exist in a given calendar period, the transaction or event will be deemed to occur on the following Business Day. In addition, as stated in the Prospectus, any event scheduled to occur on a day that is not a Business Day will occur on the next succeeding Business Day.


	Example: If your Contract is issued on February 29 in year 1 (a leap year), your Contract Anniversary in years 2, 3 and 4 will be on March 1.


	Example: If your Annuity Date is July 31 and you select monthly annuity payments, the payments received will be based on valuations made on July 31, August 31, October 1 (for September), October 31, December 1 (for November), December 31, January 31, March 1 (for February), March 31, May 1 (for April), May 31 and July 1 (for June).

The Contracts generally provide for sex-distinct annuity income factors in the case of life annuities. Statistically, females tend to have longer life expectancies than males; consequently, if the amount of annuity payments is based on life expectancy, they will ordinarily be higher if an annuitant is male than if an annuitant is female. Certain states’ regulations prohibit sex-distinct annuity income factors, and Contracts issued in those states will use unisex factors. In addition, Contracts issued in connection with Qualified Plans are required to use unisex factors.

We may require proof of your Annuitant’s age and sex before or after commencing annuity payments. If the age or sex (or both) of your Annuitant are incorrectly stated in your Contract, we will correct the amount payable to equal the amount that the annuitized portion of the Contract Value under that Contract would have purchased for your Annuitant’s correct age and sex. If we make the correction after annuity payments have started, and we have made overpayments based on the incorrect information, we will deduct the amount of the overpayment, with interest at 3% a year, from any payments due then or later; if we have made underpayments, we will add the amount, with interest at 3% a year, of the underpayments to the next payment we make after we receive proof of the correct age and/or sex.

Additionally, we may require proof of the Annuitant’s or Owner’s age before any payments associated with the Death Benefit provisions of your Contract are made. If the age or sex of the Annuitant is incorrectly stated in your Contract, we will base any payment associated with the Death Benefit provisions on your Contract on the Annuitant’s or Owner’s correct age or sex.

The fixed option(s) are not available in connection with portfolio rebalancing. If you are using the earnings sweep, you may also use portfolio rebalancing only if you selected the Money Market Subaccount. You may not use dollar cost averaging, DCA Plus, and the earnings sweep at the same time. The systematic transfer options are not available after you annuitize and are subject to the same requirements and restrictions as non-systematic transfers. In addition, no fixed option(s) may be used as the target Investment Option under any systematic transfer program.

When you request dollar cost averaging, you are authorizing us to make periodic reallocations of your Contract Value without waiting for any further instruction from you. You may request to begin or stop dollar cost averaging at any time prior to your Annuity Date; the effective date of your request will be the day we receive notice from you in a form satisfactory to us. Your request may specify the date on which you want your first transfer to be made. Your first transfer may not be made until 30 days after your Contract Date, and if you specify an earlier date, your first transfer will be delayed until one calendar month after the date you specify. If you request dollar cost averaging on your application for your Contract and you fail to specify a date for your first transfer, your first transfer will be made one period after your Contract Date (that is, if you specify monthly transfers, the first transfer will occur 30 days after your Contract Date; quarterly transfers, 90 days after your Contract Date; semi-annual transfers, 180 days after your Contract Date; and if you specify annual transfers, the first transfer will occur on your Contract Anniversary). If you stop dollar cost averaging, you must wait 30 days before you may begin this option again. Currently, we are not enforcing the 30 day waiting period but we reserve the right to enforce such waiting period in the future.

Your request to begin dollar cost averaging must specify the Investment Option you wish to transfer money from (your “source account”). You may choose any one Investment Option as your source account. The Account Value of your source account must be at least $5,000 for you to begin dollar cost averaging.

Your request to begin dollar cost averaging must also specify the amount and frequency of your transfers. You may choose monthly, quarterly, semiannual or annual transfers. The amount of your transfers may be specified as a dollar amount or a percentage of your source Account Value; however, each transfer must be at least $250. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum transfer amount but we reserve the right to enforce such minimum amounts in the future. Dollar cost averaging transfers are not subject to the same requirements and limitations as other transfers.

Finally, your request must specify the Variable Investment Option(s) you wish to transfer amounts to (your “target account(s)”). If you select more than one target account, your dollar cost averaging request must specify how transferred amounts should be allocated among the target accounts. Your source account may not also be a target account.


	•	your request to stop dollar cost averaging is effective, or

	•	your source Account Value is zero, or

	•	your Annuity Date.

If, as a result of a dollar cost averaging transfer, your source Account Value falls below any minimum Account Value we may establish, we have the right, at our option, to transfer that remaining Account Value to your target account(s) on a proportionate basis relative to your most recent allocation instructions. We may change, terminate or suspend the dollar cost averaging option at any time.

Portfolio rebalancing allows you to maintain the percentage of your Contract Value allocated to each Variable Investment Option at a pre-set level prior to annuitization.


	For example, you could specify that 30% of your Contract Value should be in the Equity Index Subaccount, 40% in the Managed Bond Subaccount, and 30% in the Growth LT Subaccount.

Over time, the variations in each Subaccount’s investment results will shift this balance of these Subaccount Value allocations. If you elect the portfolio rebalancing feature, we will automatically transfer your Subaccount Value back to the percentages you specify.

You may choose to have rebalances made quarterly, semi-annually or annually until your Annuity Date; portfolio rebalancing is not available after you annuitize.

Procedures for selecting portfolio rebalancing are generally the same as those discussed in detail above for selecting dollar cost averaging: You may make your request at any time prior to your Annuity Date and it will be effective when we receive it in a form satisfactory to us. If you stop portfolio rebalancing, you must wait 30 days to begin again. Currently, we are not enforcing the 30-day waiting period but we reserve the right to enforce such waiting period in the future. If you specify a date fewer than 30 days after your Contract Date, your first rebalance will be delayed one month, and if you request rebalancing on your application but do not specify a date for the first rebalance, it will occur one period after your Contract Date, as described above under Dollar Cost Averaging. We may change, terminate or suspend the portfolio rebalancing feature at any time.

An earnings sweep automatically transfers the earnings attributable to the Money Market Subaccount (the “sweep option”) to one or more other Variable Investment Options (your “target option(s)”). The Account Value of your sweep option will be required to be at least $5,000 when you elect the earnings sweep. Currently,

You may choose to have earnings sweeps occur monthly, quarterly, semi-annually or annually until you annuitize. At each earnings sweep, we will automatically transfer your accumulated earnings attributable to your sweep option for the previous period proportionately to your target option(s). That is, if you select a monthly earnings sweep, we will transfer the sweep option earnings from the preceding month; if you select a semi-annual earnings sweep, we will transfer the sweep option earnings accumulated over the preceding six months. Earnings sweep transfers are not subject to the same requirements and limitations as other transfers.

To determine the earnings, we take the change in the sweep option’s Account Value during the sweep period, add any withdrawals or transfers out of the sweep option Account that occurred during the sweep period, and subtract any allocations to the sweep option Account during the sweep period. The result of this calculation represents the “total earnings” for the sweep period.

If, during the sweep period, you withdraw or transfer amounts from the sweep option Account, we assume that earnings are withdrawn or transferred before any other Account Value. Therefore, your “total earnings” for the sweep period will be reduced by any amounts withdrawn or transferred during the sweep option period. The remaining earnings are eligible for the sweep transfer.

Procedures for selecting the earnings sweep are generally the same as those discussed in detail above for selecting dollar cost averaging and portfolio rebalancing: You may make your request at any time and it will be effective when we receive it in a form satisfactory to us. If you stop the earnings sweep, you must wait 30 days to begin again. Currently, we are not enforcing the 30-day waiting period but we reserve the right to enforce such waiting period in the future. If you specify a date fewer than 30 days after your Contract Date, your first earnings sweep will be delayed one month, and if you request the earnings sweep on your application but do not specify a date for the first sweep, it will occur one period after your Contract Date, as described above under Dollar Cost Averaging.

If, as a result of an earnings sweep transfer, your source Account Value falls below $500, we have the right, at our option, to transfer that remaining Account Value to your target account(s) on a proportionate basis relative to your most recent allocation instructions. We may change, terminate or suspend the earnings sweep option at any time.

You may specify a dollar amount for your pre-authorized withdrawals, or you may specify a percentage of your Contract Value or an Account Value. You may direct us to make your pre-authorized withdrawals from one or more specific Investment Options. If you do not give us these specific instructions, amounts will be deducted proportionately from your Account Value in each Investment Option.

Procedures for selecting pre-authorized withdrawals are generally the same as those discussed in detail above for selecting dollar cost averaging, portfolio rebalancing, and earnings sweeps: You may make your request at any time and it will be effective when we receive it in a form satisfactory to us. If you stop the pre-authorized withdrawals, you must wait 30 days to begin again. Currently, we are not enforcing the 30-day waiting period but we reserve the right to enforce such waiting period in the future.

If your pre-authorized withdrawals cause your Account Value in any Investment Option to fall below $500, we have the right, at our option, to transfer that remaining Account Value to your other Investment Options on a proportionate basis relative to your most recent allocation instructions. If your pre-authorized withdrawals cause your Contract Value to fall below $1,000, we may, at our option, terminate your Contract and send you the remaining withdrawal proceeds.

Pre-authorized withdrawals are subject to the same withdrawal charges as are other withdrawals, and each withdrawal is subject to any applicable charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes, to federal income tax on its taxable portion, and, if you have not reached age 59 1/2, may be subject to a 10% federal tax penalty.

On your Annuity Date, if your Contract was issued in connection with a Qualified Plan subject to Title I of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (“ERISA”), and you change your marital status after your Contract Date, you may be permitted to add a Joint Annuitant and to change your Joint Annuitant. Generally speaking, you may be permitted to add a new spouse as a Joint Annuitant, and you may be permitted to remove a Joint Annuitant who is no longer your spouse.

Section 817(h) of the Code provides that the investments underlying a variable annuity must satisfy certain diversification requirements. Details on these diversification requirements appear in the Pacific Select Fund SAI. We believe the underlying Variable Investment Options for the Contract meet these requirements. In connection with the issuance of temporary regulations relating to diversification requirements under Section 817(h), the Treasury Department announced that such regulations do not provide guidance concerning the extent to which you may direct your investments to particular divisions of a separate account. Such guidance may be included in regulations or revenue rulings under Section 817(d) relating to the definition of a variable contract. We reserve the right to make such changes as we deem necessary or appropriate to ensure that your Contract continues to qualify as an annuity for tax purposes. Any such changes will apply uniformly to affected Contract Owners and will be made with such notice to affected Contract Owners as is feasible under the circumstances.

For a variable life insurance contract or a variable annuity contract to qualify for tax deferral, assets in the separate accounts supporting the contract must be considered to be owned by the insurance company and not by the contract owner. Under current U.S. tax law, if a contract owner has excessive control over the investments made by a separate account, or the underlying fund, the contract owner will be taxed currently on income and gains from the account or fund. In other words, in such a case of “investor control” the contract owner would not derive the tax benefits normally associated with variable life insurance or variable annuities.

Generally, according to the IRS, there are two ways that impermissible investor control may exist. The first relates to the design of the contract or the relationship between the contract and a separate account or underlying fund. For example, at various times, the IRS has focused on, among other factors, the number and type of investment choices available pursuant to a given variable contract, whether the contract offers access to funds that are available to the general public, the number of transfers that a contract owner may make from one investment option to another, and the degree to which a contract owner may select or control particular investments.

With respect to this first aspect of investor control, we believe that the design of our contracts and the relationship between our contracts and the Portfolios satisfy the current view of the IRS on this subject, such that the investor control doctrine should not apply. However, because of some uncertainty with respect to this subject and because the IRS may issue further guidance on this subject, we reserve the right to make such changes as we deem necessary or appropriate to reduce the risk that your contract might not qualify as a life insurance contract or as an annuity for tax purposes.

The second way that impermissible investor control might exist concerns your actions. Under the IRS pronouncements, you may not select or control particular investments, other than choosing among broad investment choices such as selecting a particular Portfolio. You may not select or direct the purchase or sale of a particular investment of a Separate Account, a Subaccount (or Variable Investment Option), or a Portfolio. All investment decisions concerning the Separate Accounts and the Subaccounts must be made by us, and all investment decisions concerning the underlying Portfolios must be made by the portfolio manager for such Portfolio in his or her sole and absolute discretion, and not by the contract owner. Furthermore, under the IRS pronouncements, you may not enter into an agreement or arrangement with a portfolio manager of a Portfolio or communicate directly or indirectly with such a portfolio manager or any related investment officers concerning the selection, quality, or rate of return of any specific investment or group of investments held by a Portfolio, and you may not enter into any such agreement or arrangement or have any such communication with us or PLFA.

Finally, the IRS may issue additional guidance on the investor control doctrine, which might further restrict your actions or features of the variable contract. Such guidance could be applied retroactively. If any of the rules outlined


	•	not subject to Title 1 of ERISA,

	•	issued under Section 403(b) of the Code, and

	•	permits loans under its terms (a “Loan Eligible Plan”).

You will be charged interest on your Contract Debt at a fixed annual rate equal to 5%. The amount held in the Loan Account to secure your loan will earn a return equal to an annual rate of 3%. This loan rate may vary by state.

We may change these loan provisions to reflect changes in the Code or interpretations thereof.

The tax and ERISA rules relating to Contract loans are complex and in many cases unclear. For these reasons, and because the rules vary depending on the individual circumstances, these loans are processed by your Plan Administrator. We urge you to consult with a qualified tax adviser prior to effecting any loan transaction under your Contract.

Generally, interest paid on your loan under a 403(b) tax-sheltered annuity will be considered non-deductible “personal interest” under Section 163(h) of the Code, to the extent the loan comes from and is secured by your pre-tax contributions, even if the proceeds of your loan are used to acquire your principal residence.

Your loan request must be submitted on our Non-ERISA TSA Application and Loan Agreement Form. You may submit a loan request 30 days after your Contract Date and before your Annuity Date. However, before requesting a new loan, you must wait thirty days after the last payment of a previous loan. If approved, your loan will usually be effective as of the end of the Business Day on which we receive all necessary documentation in proper form. We will normally forward proceeds of your loan to you within 7 calendar days after the effective date of your loan.

In order to secure your loan, on the effective date of your loan, we will transfer an amount equal to the principal amount of your loan into an account called the “Loan Account.” The Loan Account is held under the General Account. To make this transfer, we will transfer amounts proportionately from your Investment Options based on your Account Value in each Investment Option.

As your loan is repaid, a portion, corresponding to the amount of the repayment of any amount then held as security for your loan, will be transferred from the Loan Account back into your Investment Options relative to your most recent allocation instructions.

A transfer from the Loan Account back into your Investment Options following a loan repayment is not considered a transfer under the transfer limitations as stated in the HOW YOUR INVESTMENTS ARE ALLOCATED— Transfers and Market-timing Restrictions section in the Prospectus.

You may have only one loan outstanding at any time. The minimum loan amount is $1,000. Your Contract Debt at the effective date of your loan may not exceed the lesser of:


	•	50% of your Contract Value, or

	•	$50,000 less your highest outstanding Contract Debt during the 12-month period immediately preceding the effective date of your loan.

You should refer to the terms of your particular Loan Eligible Plan for any additional loan restrictions. If you have other loans outstanding pursuant to other Loan Eligible Plans, the amount you may borrow may be further restricted. We are not responsible for making any determination (including loan amounts permitted) or any interpretation with respect to your Loan Eligible Plan.

If you purchase any optional living benefit rider (including any and all previous, current, and future versions), there may be adverse consequences to taking a loan while an optional living benefit rider is in effect. If you have an existing loan on your Contract, you should carefully consider whether an optional living benefit rider is appropriate for you.

Your loan, including principal and accrued interest, generally must be repaid in quarterly installments. An installment will be due in each quarter on the date corresponding to the effective date of your loan, beginning with the first such date following the effective date of your loan. See the Qualified Contracts — Loans section in the Prospectus.


	Example: On May 1, we receive your loan request, and your loan is effective. Your first quarterly payment will be due on August 1.

Adverse tax consequences may result if you fail to meet the repayment requirements for your loan. You must repay principal and interest of any loan in substantially equal payments over the term of the loan. Generally, the term of the loan will be 5 years from the effective date of the loan. However, if you have certified to us that your loan proceeds are to be used to acquire a principal residence for yourself, you may request a loan term of 30 years. In either case, however, you must repay your loan prior to your Annuity Date. If you elect to annuitize (or withdraw) your Net Contract Value while you have an outstanding loan, we will deduct any Contract Debt from your Contract Value at the time of the annuitization (or withdrawal) to repay the Contract Debt.

You may prepay your entire loan at any time. If you do so, we will bill you for any unpaid interest that has accrued through the date of payoff. Your loan will be considered repaid only when the interest due has been paid. Subject to any necessary approval of state insurance authorities, while you have Contract Debt outstanding, we will treat all payments you send us as Investments unless you specifically indicate that your payment is a loan repayment or include your loan payment notice with your payment. To the extent allowed by law, any loan repayments in excess of the amount then due will be applied to the principal balance of your loan. Such repayments will not change the due dates or the periodic repayment amount due for future periods. If a loan repayment is in excess of the principal balance of your loan, any excess repayment will be refunded to you. Repayments we receive that are less than the amount then due will be returned to you, unless otherwise required by law.

If we have not received your full payment by its due date, we will declare the entire remaining loan balance in default. At that time, we will send written notification of the amount needed to bring the loan back to a current status. You will have sixty (60) days from the date on which the loan was declared in default (the “grace period”) to make the required payment.


	•	death,

	•	disability, and

	•	financial hardship (with respect to contributions only, not income or earnings on these contributions).

If those amounts are not eligible for distribution, the defaulted loan balance plus accrued interest and any withdrawal charge will be considered a Deemed Distribution and will be withdrawn when such Contract Values become eligible. In either case, the Distribution or the Deemed Distribution will be considered a currently taxable event, and may be subject to federal tax withholding, the withdrawal charge and may be subject to a 10% federal tax penalty.

If there is a Deemed Distribution under your Contract and to the extent allowed by law, any future withdrawals will first be applied as repayment of the defaulted Contract Debt, including accrued interest and charges for applicable taxes. Any amounts withdrawn and applied as repayment of Contract Debt will first be withdrawn from your Loan Account, and then from your Investment Options on a proportionate basis relative to the Account Value in each Investment Option. If you have an outstanding loan that is in default, the defaulted Contract Debt will be considered a withdrawal for the purpose of calculating any Death Benefit Amount and/or Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit.

The terms of any such loan are intended to qualify for the exception in Code Section 72(p)(2) so that the distribution of the loan proceeds will not constitute a distribution that is taxable to you. To that end, these loan provisions will be interpreted to ensure and maintain such tax qualification, despite any other provisions to the contrary. Subject to any regulatory approval, we reserve the right to amend your Contract to reflect any clarifications that may be needed or are appropriate to maintain such tax qualification or to conform any terms of our loan arrangement with you to any applicable changes in the tax qualification requirements. We will send you a copy of any such amendment. If you refuse such an amendment, it may result in adverse tax consequences to you.

We are responsible for the safekeeping of the assets of the Separate Account. These assets are held separate and apart from the assets of our General Account and our other separate accounts.

The statements of assets and liabilities of Separate Account A as of December 31, 2007, the related statements of operations for the periods presented, the statements of changes in net assets for each of the periods presented and the financial highlights for each of the periods presented are incorporated by reference in the Statement of Additional Information from the Annual Report of Separate Account A dated December 31, 2007. PL&A’s financial statements as of December 31, 2007 and 2006 and for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2007 are set forth beginning on the next page. These financial statements should be considered only as bearing on the ability of PL&A to meet its obligations under the Contracts and not as bearing on the investment performance of the assets held in the Separate Account.

The financial statements of Separate Account A of Pacific Life & Annuity Company as of December 31, 2007 and for each of the periods presented have been audited by Deloitte & Touche LLP, 695 Town Center Drive, Costa Mesa, CA 92626, independent registered public accounting firm, as stated in the Annual Report of Separate Account A dated December 31, 2007, which is incorporated by reference in this Registration statement.

The financial statements of Pacific Life & Annuity Company as of December 31, 2007 and 2006 and for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2007 have been audited by Deloitte & Touche LLP,


		Deloitte & Touche LLP 350 South Grand Avenue Suit 200 Los Angeles, CA 90071-3462 USA Tel:+1 213 688 0800 Fax:+1 213 688 0100 www.deloitte.com

INDEPENDENT AUDITORS’ REPORT

Pacific Life & Annuity Company:

We have audited the accompanying statements of financial condition of Pacific Life & Annuity Company (the Company) as of December 31, 2007 and 2006, and the related statements of operations, stockholder’s equity and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2007. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.

We conducted our audits in accordance with auditing standards generally accepted in the United States of America. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes consideration of internal control over financial reporting as a basis for designing audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting. Accordingly, we express no such opinion. An audit also includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

In our opinion, such financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Pacific Life & Annuity Company as of December 31, 2007 and 2006, and the results of its operations and its cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2007 in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.

As discussed in Note 1 to the financial statements, in 2007 the Company changed its method of accounting and reporting for deferred acquisition costs in connection with modifications or exchanges of insurance contracts.

March 24, 2008

Member of
Deloitte Touche Tohmatsu

PLA-1

Pacific Life & Annuity Company

STATEMENTS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION


	December 31,
	2007		2006

	(In Thousands)
ASSETS
Investments:
Fixed maturity securities available for sale, at estimated fair value	$	994,344	$	918,328
Equity securities available for sale, at estimated fair value		15,791		14,896
Mortgage loans		93,628		41,214
Policy loans		2,371		1,948
Other investments		59,469		64,013

TOTAL INVESTMENTS		1,165,603		1,040,399
Cash and cash equivalents		63,408		47,648
Deferred policy acquisition costs		72,719		47,020
Accrued investment income		12,613		10,447
Other assets		36,147		32,455
Separate account assets		1,181,753		781,801

TOTAL ASSETS	$	2,532,243	$	1,959,770


LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDER’S EQUITY
Liabilities:
Future policy benefits	$	778,472	$	590,827
Policyholder account balances		91,129		80,881
Other liabilities		47,490		80,505
Separate account liabilities		1,181,753		781,801

TOTAL LIABILITIES		2,098,844		1,534,014


Commitments and contingencies (Note 14)

Stockholder’s Equity:
Common stock — $1 par value; 5 million shares authorized; 2.9 million shares issued and outstanding		2,900		2,900
Paid-in capital		134,451		134,509
Retained earnings		281,141		264,069
Accumulated other comprehensive income		14,907		24,278

TOTAL STOCKHOLDER’S EQUITY		433,399		425,756

TOTAL LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDER’S EQUITY	$	2,532,243	$	1,959,770

See Notes to Financial Statements

PLA-2

Pacific Life & Annuity Company

STATEMENTS OF STOCKHOLDER’S EQUITY


									Accumulated Other
	Common		Paid-in			Retained			Comprehensive
	Stock		Capital			Earnings			Income (Loss)			Total

	(In Thousands)
BALANCES, JANUARY 1, 2005	$	2,900	$	134,474		$	204,224		$	38,347		$	379,945
Comprehensive income (loss):
Net income							41,448						41,448
Unrealized loss on derivatives and securities available for sale, net										(11,447	)		(11,447	)

Total comprehensive income													30,001
Other equity adjustments				68									68

BALANCES, DECEMBER 31, 2005		2,900		134,542			245,672			26,900			410,014
Comprehensive income (loss):
Net income							18,397						18,397
Unrealized loss on derivatives and securities available for sale, net										(2,622	)		(2,622	)

Total comprehensive income													15,775
Other equity adjustments				(33	)								(33	)

BALANCES, DECEMBER 31, 2006		2,900		134,509			264,069			24,278			425,756
Comprehensive income (loss):
Net income							17,422						17,422
Unrealized loss on derivatives and securities available for sale, net										(9,371	)		(9,371	)

Total comprehensive income													8,051
Cumulative effect of adoption of new accounting principle, net of tax							(350	)					(350	)
Other equity adjustments				(58	)								(58	)

BALANCES, DECEMBER 31, 2007	$	2,900	$	134,451		$	281,141		$	14,907		$	433,399

See Notes to Financial Statements

PLA-4

Pacific Life & Annuity Company

STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS


	Years Ended December 31,
	2007			2006			2005
	(In Thousands)
CASH FLOWS FROM OPERATING ACTIVITIES
Net income excluding discontinued operations	$	17,492		$	19,584		$	6,603
Adjustments to reconcile net income excluding discontinued operations to net cash provided by operating activities:
Undistributed (income) loss from other investments		(1,545	)		914			(3,522	)
Net accretion on fixed maturity securities		(5,454	)		(4,515	)		(699	)
Depreciation and other amortization		194			1,893			229
Deferred income taxes		4,605			8,539			(141	)
Net realized investment (gain) loss		9,465			(6,100	)		3,873
Net change in deferred policy acquisition costs		(26,648	)		(12,295	)		(6,713	)
Interest credited to policyholder account balances		3,980			3,365			5,307
Change in accrued investment income		(2,166	)		(1,652	)		207
Change in future policy benefits		151,817			134,952			102,198
Other operating activities, net		(767	)		7,595			15,272

NET CASH PROVIDED BY OPERATING ACTIVITIES BEFORE DISCONTINUED OPERATIONS		150,973			152,280			122,614
Net cash used in operating activities of discontinued operations		(4,004	)		(21,865	)		(87,070	)

NET CASH PROVIDED BY OPERATING ACTIVITIES		146,969			130,415			35,544

CASH FLOWS FROM INVESTING ACTIVITIES
Fixed maturity and equity securities available for sale:
Purchases		(212,697	)		(325,190	)		(95,648	)
Sales		80,581			126,946			79,349
Maturities and repayments		38,401			70,003			59,813
Repayments of mortgage loans		194			49,014			733
Purchases of mortgage loans		(51,431	)		(31,337	)		(3,231	)
Other investing activity, net		7,475			(888	)		(619	)

NET CASH PROVIDED BY (USED IN) INVESTING ACTIVITIES		(137,477	)		(111,452	)		40,397

(Continued)
See Notes to Financial Statements

PLA-5

Pacific Life & Annuity Company

NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

1.		ORGANIZATION AND SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES

		ORGANIZATION AND DESCRIPTION OF BUSINESS

		Pacific Life & Annuity Company (the Company) is a stock life insurance company domiciled in the State of Arizona and a wholly owned subsidiary of Pacific Life Insurance Company (Pacific Life), a stock life insurance company domiciled in the state of Nebraska. The Company offers variable universal life insurance, universal life (UL) insurance, term insurance, structured settlement annuities, guaranteed interest contracts (GICs), and variable annuities. The Company is licensed to sell certain of its products in the state of New York.

		BASIS OF PRESENTATION


		The accompanying financial statements have been prepared in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America (U.S. GAAP). The Company prepares its regulatory financial statements based on accounting practices prescribed or permitted by the Insurance Department of the State of Arizona (AZ DOI). These financial statements materially differ from those filed with regulatory authorities (Note 2).

		The preparation of financial statements in conformity with U.S. GAAP requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities as of the date of the financial statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. Actual results could differ from those estimates.

		In developing these estimates, management makes subjective and complex judgments that are inherently uncertain and subject to material change as facts and circumstances develop. Management has identified the following estimates as significant, as they involve a higher degree of judgment and are subject to a significant degree of variability:

	•		The fair value of investments in the absence of quoted market values

	•		Investment impairments

	•		The fair value of and accounting for derivatives

	•		The capitalization and amortization of deferred policy acquisition costs (DAC)

	•		The liability for future policyholder benefits

	•		Accounting for income taxes and the valuation of deferred income tax assets and liabilities and unrecognized tax benefits

	•		Accounting for reinsurance transactions

	•		Litigation and other contingencies

		Certain reclassifications have been made to the 2006 and 2005 financial statements to conform to the 2007 financial statement presentation.

		RECENTLY ADOPTED ACCOUNTING PRONOUNCEMENTS


		Effective January 1, 2007, the Company adopted Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) Interpretation No. (FIN) 48, Accounting for Uncertainty in Income Taxes, an Interpretation of FASB Statement No. 109. FIN 48 presents a recognition threshold and measurement attribute for the financial statement recognition and measurement of a tax position taken or expected to be taken in a tax return. There is a two-step evaluation process. The first step is recognition and a company must determine whether it is more likely than not that a tax position will be sustained. The second step is measurement. A tax position that meets the more likely than not recognition threshold should be measured at the largest amount of benefit that is greater than 50% likely of being realized upon ultimate settlement with a taxing authority that has full knowledge of all relevant information. FIN 48 also provides guidance on derecognition, classification, interest and penalties, accounting in interim periods, disclosure and transition. The Company’s policy is to recognize interest expense and penalties related to unrecognized tax benefits as a component of the provision for

PLA-7

income taxes. The adoption of FIN 48 had no impact on the Company’s financial statements, and therefore, there was no cumulative effect related to the adoption of FIN 48.

		Effective May 2, 2007, the Company adopted FASB Staff Position (FSP) No. FIN 48-1, Definition of Settlement in FASB Interpretation No. 48. This FSP amends FIN 48 to provide guidance on how to determine whether a tax position is effectively settled for the purpose of recognizing previously unrecognized tax benefits. This statement is effective upon the initial adoption of FIN 48 with retrospective application if the provisions of this FSP were not previously applied. The adoption of this FSP had no impact on the Company’s financial statements, and therefore, there was no retrospective adjustment.

		Effective January 1, 2007, the Company adopted FASB Statement of Financial Accounting Standard (SFAS) No. 155, Accounting for Certain Hybrid Instruments. SFAS No. 155 amends SFAS No. 133, Accounting for Derivative Instruments and Hedging and SFAS No. 140, Accounting for Transfers and Servicing of Financial Assets and Extinguishments of Liabilities, a replacement of FASB Statement No. 125. SFAS No. 155 (i) permits fair value remeasurement for any hybrid financial instrument that contains an embedded derivative that otherwise would require bifurcation; (ii) clarifies which interest-only strips and principal-only strips are not subject to the requirements of SFAS No. 133; (iii) establishes a requirement to evaluate interests in securitized financial assets to identify interests that are freestanding derivatives or that are hybrid financial instruments that contain an embedded derivative requiring bifurcation; (iv) clarifies that concentrations of credit risk in the form of subordination are not embedded derivatives; and (v) amends SFAS No. 140 to eliminate the prohibition on a qualifying special-purpose entity from holding a derivative financial instrument that pertains to a beneficial interest other than another derivative financial instrument. The adoption of SFAS No. 155 did not have a material impact on the Company’s financial statements.

		Effective January 1, 2007, the Company adopted American Institute of Certified Public Accountants (AICPA) Statement of Position (SOP) 05-1, Accounting by Insurance Enterprises for Deferred Acquisition Costs in Connection With Modifications or Exchanges of Insurance Contracts. This SOP provides guidance on accounting for DAC on internal replacements on insurance and investment contracts other than those described in SFAS No. 97, Accounting and Reporting by Insurance Enterprises for Certain Long-Duration Contracts and for Realized Gains and Losses from the Sale of Investments. SOP 05-1 defines an internal replacement as a modification in product benefits, features, rights, or coverages that occur by the exchange of a contract for a new contract, or by amendment, endorsement, or rider to a contract, or by the election of a feature or coverage within a contract. SOP 05-1 is effective for internal replacements occurring in fiscal years beginning after December 15, 2006. In addition, in February 2007, the AICPA issued related Technical Practice Aids (TPAs) to provide further clarification of SOP 05-1. The TPAs became effective concurrently with the adoption of SOP 05-1. The adoption of SOP 05-1 and the related TPAs resulted in a reduction to DAC and the Company recorded a cumulative effect adjustment of $350 thousand, net of taxes, which was recorded as a reduction to retained earnings.

		In April 2006, the FASB issued FSP FIN 46(R)-6, Determining the Variability to Be Considered in Applying FASB Interpretation No. 46(R). This FSP addresses how an entity determines the variability to be considered in applying FIN 46 (revised December 2003), Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities, an Interpretation of ARB No. 51 (FIN 46(R)). The variability affects the determination of whether an entity is a variable interest entity (VIE), which interests are variable interests in an entity, and which party is the primary beneficiary of the VIE. That variability affects any calculation of expected losses and expected residual returns, if such a calculation is necessary. FSP FIN 46(R)-6 was effective for the Company beginning July 1, 2006. Adoption did not impact the Company’s financial statements.

		Effective January 1, 2006, the Company adopted SFAS No. 154, Accounting Changes and Error Corrections. This statement changes the requirements for the accounting for and reporting of a change in accounting principle and applies to all voluntary changes in accounting principle as well as changes required by a new accounting pronouncement. It establishes, unless impracticable, retrospective application as the required method for reporting a change in accounting principle in the absence of explicit transition requirements specific to a newly adopted accounting principle.

		Effective January 1, 2006, the Company adopted FSP SFAS No. 115-1 and SFAS No. 124-1, The Meaning of Other-Than-Temporary Impairment and Its Application to Certain Investments. The guidance within this FSP is applicable to debt and equity securities that are within the scope of SFAS No. 115, Accounting for Certain Investments in Debt and Equity Securities. This FSP nullifies certain requirements of Emerging Issues Task Force (EITF) Issue No. 03-1,

PLA-8

		The Meaning of Other-Than-Temporary Impairment and Its Application to Certain Investments, regarding the recognition of other than temporary impairments and restores the guidance for determination of other than temporary impairment to SFAS No. 115, EITF Issue No. 99-20, Recognition of Interest Income and Impairment on Purchased and Retained Beneficial Interests in Securitized Financial Assets, and Accounting Principles Board Opinion No. 18, The Equity Method of Accounting for Investments in Common Stock. This FSP adopts the disclosure requirements of EITF Issue No. 03-1. For other than temporarily impaired debt securities, the investor will account for the debt security as if the debt security was purchased on the measurement date of the other than temporary impairment. The discount recorded for the debt security will be amortized over the remaining life of the debt security as a yield adjustment. Adoption did not have a material impact on the Company’s financial statements.

		FUTURE ADOPTION OF NEW ACCOUNTING PRONOUNCEMENTS


		In December 2007, the FASB issued SFAS No. 141(R), Business Combinations, which replaces SFAS No. 141, Business Combinations. SFAS No. 141(R) establishes principles and requirements for how the acquirer recognizes and measures in its financial statements the identifiable assets acquired, the liabilities assumed, and any noncontrolling interest in the acquiree, recognizes and measures the goodwill acquired in the business combination and determines what information to disclose to enable users of the financial statements to evaluate the nature and financial effects of the business combination. This statement is effective beginning January 1, 2009. The Company is evaluating the impact of SFAS No. 141(R) on its financial statements.

		In April 2007, the FASB issued FSP No. FIN 39-1, Amendment of FASB Interpretation No. 39. FSP FIN 39-1 amends FIN No. 39, Offsetting of Amounts Related to Certain Contracts, to permit a reporting entity to offset fair value amounts recognized for the right to reclaim cash collateral (a receivable) or the obligation to return cash collateral (a payable) against fair value amounts recognized for derivative instruments executed with the same counterparty under the same master netting arrangement that have been offset in accordance with FIN 39. FSP FIN 39-1 also amends FIN 39 for certain terminology modifications. This statement permits offsetting of fair value amounts recognized for derivative instruments under master netting arrangements. FSP FIN 39-1 is effective beginning January 1, 2008 and adoption is not expected to have a material impact on the Company’s financial statements.

		In February 2007, the FASB issued SFAS No. 159, The Fair Value Option for Financial Assets and Financial Liabilities — Including an amendment of FASB Statement No. 115. This statement permits companies to choose to measure many financial instruments and certain other items at fair value that are not currently required to be measured at fair value. This statement also establishes presentation and disclosure requirements designed to facilitate comparisons between entities that choose different measurement attributes for similar types of assets and liabilities. This statement is effective beginning January 1, 2008. Adoption of SFAS No. 159 is not expected to have any impact on the Company’s financial statements.

		In September 2006, the FASB issued SFAS No. 157, Fair Value Measurements. This statement creates a common definition of fair value to be used throughout U.S. GAAP. SFAS No. 157 will apply whenever another standard requires or permits assets or liabilities to be measured at fair value, with certain exceptions. The standard establishes a hierarchy for determining fair value, which emphasizes the use of observable market data whenever available. The statement also requires expanded disclosures, which include the extent to which assets and liabilities are measured at fair value, the methods and assumptions used to measure fair value and the effect of fair value measures on earnings. This statement is effective beginning January 1, 2008. Adoption is not expected to have a material impact on the Company’s financial statements.

		INVESTMENTS


		Fixed maturity and equity securities available for sale are reported at estimated fair value, with unrealized gains and losses, net of deferred income taxes and adjustments related to DAC, recorded as a component of other comprehensive income (OCI). For mortgage-backed securities and asset-backed securities included in fixed maturity securities available for sale, the Company recognizes income using a constant effective yield based on anticipated prepayments and the estimated economic life of the securities. When estimates of prepayments change, the effective yield is recalculated to reflect actual payments to date and anticipated future payments. For fixed rate securities, the net investment in the securities is adjusted to the amount that would have existed had the new effective yield been applied

PLA-9

since the acquisition of the securities. These adjustments are reflected in net investment income. Trading securities are reported at estimated fair value with changes in estimated fair value included in net realized investment gain (loss).

		Investment income consists primarily of interest and dividends, net investment income from partnership interests, prepayment fees on fixed maturity securities and mortgage loans, and income from certain derivatives. Interest is recognized on an accrual basis and dividends are recorded on the ex-dividend date. Amortization of premium and accretion of discount on fixed maturity securities is recorded using the effective interest method.

		The estimated fair value of fixed maturity and equity securities is generally obtained from independent pricing services. For fixed maturity securities not able to be priced by independent services (generally private placement and low volume traded securities), an internally developed matrix is used. The matrix utilizes the fair market yield curves, provided by a major independent data service, which determines the discount yield based upon the security’s weighted-average life, rating, and liquidity spread. The estimated fair value of the security is calculated as the present value of the estimated cash flows discounted at the yield determined above. For those securities not priced externally or by the matrix, the estimated fair value is internally determined, utilizing various techniques in valuing complex investments with variable cash flows. Equity securities available for sale include common stocks that have a readily determinable fair value and perpetual preferred stocks.

		The following table identifies the estimated fair value of fixed maturity securities by pricing sources.


	December 31, 2007					December 31, 2006
	Fixed Maturities		% of			Fixed Maturities		% of
	at Estimated		Estimated			at Estimated		Estimated
	Fair Value		Fair Value			Fair Value		Fair Value
	(In Thousands)
Independent market quotations	$	814,180		81.9	%	$	809,907		88.2	%
Matrix-priced		140,150		14.1	%		98,124		10.7	%
Other methods		40,014		4.0	%		10,297		1.1	%

	$	994,344		100.0	%	$	918,328		100.0	%

		The matrix-priced securities primarily consist of private placements and have an average duration of eight and nine years as of December 31, 2007 and 2006, respectively.

		The Company assesses whether other than temporary impairments have occurred based upon the Company’s case-by-case evaluation of the underlying reasons for the decline in estimated fair value. All securities with a gross unrealized loss at the statement of financial condition date are subjected to the Company’s process for identifying other than temporary impairments. The Company considers a wide range of factors, as described below, about the security issuer and uses its best judgment in evaluating the cause of the decline in the estimated fair value of the security and in assessing the prospects for near-term recovery. Inherent in the Company’s evaluation of each security are assumptions and estimates about the operations of the issuer and its future earnings potential.

		Considerations used by the Company in the impairment evaluation process include, but are not limited to, the following:

	•		The duration and extent that the estimated fair value has been below net carrying amount

	•		Industry factors or conditions related to a geographic area that are negatively affecting the security

	•		Underlying valuation of assets specifically pledged to support the credit

	•		Past due interest or principal payments or other violation of covenants

	•		Deterioration of the overall financial condition of the specific issuer

	•		Downgrades by a rating agency

	•		Ability and intent to hold the investment for a period of time to allow for a recovery of value

	•		Fundamental analysis of the liquidity and financial condition of the specific issuer

PLA-10

		Also, the Company estimates the cash flows over the life of certain purchased beneficial interests in securitized financial assets. Based upon current information and events, if the estimated fair value of its beneficial interests is less than or equal to its net carrying amount and if there has been an adverse change in the estimated cash flows since the last revised estimate, considering both timing and amount, then an other than temporary impairment is recognized.

		Securities and purchased beneficial interests that are deemed to be other than temporarily impaired are written down to estimated fair value in the period the securities or purchased beneficial interest are deemed to be impaired.

		Realized gains and losses on investment transactions are determined on a specific identification basis and are included in net realized investment gain (loss). The Company also includes other than temporary impairment write-downs in net realized investment gain (loss).

		Mortgage loans on real estate are carried at their unpaid principal balance, net of deferred origination fees, valuation allowances and write-downs. Mortgage loans are considered to be impaired when management estimates that based upon current information and events, it is probable that the Company will not be able to collect amounts due according to the contractual terms of the mortgage loan agreement. For mortgage loans deemed to be impaired, a valuation allowance is established for the difference between the carrying amount and the Company’s estimate of the present value of the expected future cash flows discounted at the current market rate. Changes to the valuation allowance are recorded in net realized investment gain (loss). Policy loans are stated at unpaid principal balances.

		Other investments primarily consist of partnership and joint venture interests, derivative instruments and non marketable equity securities. Partnership and joint venture interests where the Company does not have a controlling interest or a majority ownership are recorded under the cost or equity method of accounting depending on the equity ownership position.

		All derivatives, whether designated in hedging relationships or not, are required to be recorded at estimated fair value. If the derivative is designated as a cash flow hedge, the effective portion of changes in the estimated fair value of the derivative is recorded in OCI and recognized in earnings when the hedged item affects earnings. If the derivative is designated as a fair value hedge, the changes in the estimated fair value of the derivative and the hedged item are recognized in net realized investment gain (loss). The change in value of the hedged item associated with the risk being hedged is reflected as an adjustment to the carrying amount of the hedged item. For derivative instruments not designated as hedges, the change in estimated fair value of the derivative is recorded in net realized investment gain (loss). Estimated fair value exposure is calculated based on the aggregate estimated fair value of all derivative instruments with each counterparty, net of collateral received, in accordance with legally enforceable counterparty master netting agreements (Note 5).

		The periodic cash flows for all hedging derivatives are recorded consistent with the hedged item on an accrual basis. For derivatives that are hedging securities, these amounts are included in net investment income. For derivatives that are hedging liabilities, these amounts are included in interest credited to policyholder account balances. For derivatives not designated as hedging instruments, the periodic cash flows are reflected in net realized investment gain (loss) on an accrual basis. Upon termination of a cash flow hedging relationship, the accumulated amount in OCI is amortized into net investment income or interest credited to policyholder account balances over the remaining life of the hedged item.

		CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS


		Cash and cash equivalents include all investments with an original maturity of three months or less.

		DEFERRED POLICY ACQUISITION COSTS


		The costs of acquiring new insurance business, principally commissions, medical examinations, underwriting, policy issue and other expenses, all of which vary with and are primarily associated with the production of new business, are deferred and recorded as an asset commonly referred to as DAC. DAC related to internally replaced contracts (as defined by SOP 05-1), is immediately written off to expense and any new deferrable expenses associated with the replacement are deferred if the contract modification substantially changes the contract. However, if the contract modification does not substantially change the contract, the existing DAC asset remains in place and any acquisition

PLA-11

		costs associated with the modification are immediately expensed. As of December 31, 2007 and 2006, the carrying value of DAC was $72.7 million and $47.0 million, respectively.

		For UL, variable annuities and other investment-type contracts, acquisition costs are amortized through earnings in proportion to the present value of estimated gross profits (EGPs) from projected investment, mortality and expense margins and surrender charges over the estimated lives of the contracts. Actual gross margins or profits can vary from management’s estimates, which can increase or decrease the rate of DAC amortization. DAC related to term insurance policies is amortized through earnings over the premium-paying period of the related policies in proportion to premium revenues recognized, using assumptions and estimates consistent with those used in computing policy reserves. DAC related to certain unrealized components in OCI, primarily unrealized gains and losses on securities available for sale, is amortized directly to equity through OCI.

		Significant assumptions in the development of EGPs include investment returns, surrender and lapse rates, rider utilization, interest spreads, and mortality margins. The Company’s long-term assumption for the underlying separate account investment return ranges up to 8.0%.

		A change in the assumptions utilized to develop EGPs results in a change to amounts expensed in the reporting period in which the change was made by adjusting the DAC balance to the level DAC would have been had the EGPs been calculated using the new assumptions over the entire amortization period. In general, favorable experience variances result in increased expected future profitability and may lower the rate of DAC amortization, whereas unfavorable experience variances result in decreased expected future profitability and may increase the rate of DAC amortization. All critical assumptions utilized to develop EGPs are evaluated at least annually and necessary revisions are made to future EGPs to the extent that actual or anticipated experience necessitates such a prospective change.

		The Company defers sales inducements and amortizes them over the life of the policy using the same methodology and assumptions used to amortize DAC. The Company offers a sales inducement to the policyholder where the policyholder receives a bonus credit, typically ranging from 4.0% to 5.0% of each deposit. The capitalized sales inducement balances included in the DAC asset were $4.4 million and $2.7 million as of December 31, 2007 and 2006, respectively.

		Components of DAC are as follows:


	Years Ended December 31,
	2007			2006			2005
	(In Thousands)
Balance, January 1	$	47,020		$	35,084		$	27,884
Cumulative pre-tax effect of adoption of new accounting principle		(538	)
Additions:
Capitalized during the year		32,179			21,320			11,190
Amortization:
Allocated to commission expenses		(4,674	)		(6,579	)		(3,362	)
Allocated to operating expenses		(857	)		(2,446	)		(1,115	)

Total amortization		(5,531	)		(9,025	)		(4,477	)

Allocated to OCI		(411	)		(359	)		487

Balance, December 31	$	72,719		$	47,020		$	35,084

		FUTURE POLICY BENEFITS


		Future policy benefits, which consist primarily of structured settlement annuities, are equal to the present value of estimated future payments using pricing assumptions, as applicable, for interest rates, mortality, morbidity, retirement age, and expenses. Interest rate assumptions ranged from 3.00% to 7.73%.

PLA-12

		Estimates of future policy benefit reserves and liabilities are continually reviewed and, as experience develops, are adjusted as necessary. Such changes in estimates are included in earnings for the period in which such changes occur.

		POLICYHOLDER ACCOUNT BALANCES


		Policyholder account balances on UL and investment-type contracts, such as fixed account liabilities and GICs, are valued using the retrospective deposit method and are equal to accumulated account values, which consist of deposits received, plus interest credited, less withdrawals and assessments. Interest credited to these contracts primarily ranged from 3.00% to 8.00%.

		REVENUES, BENEFITS AND EXPENSES


		Insurance premiums, annuity contracts with life contingencies and term insurance contracts, are recognized as revenue when due. Benefits and expenses are matched against such revenues to recognize profits over the lives of the contracts. This matching is accomplished by providing for reserves and liabilities for future policy benefits, expenses of contract administration and the amortization of DAC.

		Receipts for UL and investment-type contracts are reported as deposits to either policyholder account balances or separate account liabilities, and are not included in revenue. Policy fees consist of mortality charges, surrender charges and expense charges that have been earned and assessed against related account values during the period. The timing of policy fee revenue recognition is determined based on the nature of the fees. Certain amounts assessed that represent compensation for services to be provided in future periods are reported as unearned revenue and recognized in revenue over the periods benefited. Benefits and expenses include policy benefits and claims incurred in the period that are in excess of related policyholder account balances, interest credited to policyholder account balances, expenses of contract administration and the amortization of DAC.

		REINSURANCE


		The Company has reinsurance agreements with other insurance companies to limit potential losses, reduce exposure arising from larger risks, obtain greater diversification of risks and provide additional capacity for future growth. As part of a strategic alliance, the Company also reinsures risks associated with policies written by an independent producer group through modified coinsurance arrangements with this producer group’s reinsurance company. As part of its risk management process, the Company routinely evaluates its reinsurance programs and may change retention limits, reinsurers or other features at any time.

		Reinsurance receivables primarily include amounts associated with the reinsurance of a terminated block of long-term disability. Reinsurance receivables were $1.1 million and $0.9 million as of December 31, 2007 and 2006, respectively. Reinsurance payables were $1.9 million and $1.4 as of December 31, 2007 and 2006, respectively.

		The ceding of risk does not discharge the Company from its primary obligations to contract owners. To the extent that the assuming companies become unable to meet their obligations under reinsurance agreements, the Company remains contingently liable. Each reinsurer is reviewed to evaluate its financial stability before entering into each reinsurance contract and throughout the period that the reinsurance contract is in place.

		DEPRECIATION AND AMORTIZATION


		Certain other assets are depreciated or amortized on the straight-line method over periods ranging from 3 to 10 years. Depreciation and amortization of certain other assets are included in operating expenses.

		INCOME TAXES


		The Company is taxed as a life insurance company for Federal income tax purposes and is included in the consolidated Federal income tax return of its ultimate parent, Pacific Mutual Holding Company (PMHC). The Company is allocated tax expense or benefit based principally on the effect of including its operations in the consolidated return under a tax sharing agreement. Amounts receivable (payable) under the tax sharing agreement as of December 31, 2007 and 2006, were $4.6 million and ($4.9) million, respectively, and are included in other assets and other liabilities,

PLA-13

		respectively. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognized for the future tax consequences attributable to differences between the financial statement carrying amounts of existing assets and liabilities and their respective tax bases. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured using enacted tax rates expected to apply to taxable income in the years the differences are expected to be recovered or settled.

		SEPARATE ACCOUNTS


		Separate accounts include variable annuity and life contracts. Separate account assets and liabilities are recorded at estimated fair value and represent legally segregated contract holder funds. Deposits to separate accounts, investment income and realized and unrealized gains and losses on the separate account assets accrue directly to contract holders and, accordingly, are not reflected in the statements of operations or cash flows. Amounts charged to the separate account for mortality, surrender and expense charges are included in revenues as policy fees.

		FAIR VALUE OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS


		The estimated fair value of financial instruments, disclosed in Notes 4, 5, and 7, has been determined using available market information and appropriate valuation methodologies. However, considerable judgment is often required to interpret market data to develop the estimates of fair value. Accordingly, the estimates presented may not be indicative of the amounts the Company could realize in a current market exchange. The use of different market assumptions and/or estimation methodologies could have a significant effect on the estimated fair value amounts.

2.		STATUTORY FINANCIAL INFORMATION AND DIVIDEND RESTRICTIONS

		STATUTORY ACCOUNTING PRACTICES


		The Company prepares its regulatory statutory financial statements in accordance with accounting practices prescribed or permitted by the AZ DOI, which is a comprehensive basis of accounting other than U.S. GAAP. Statutory accounting practices primarily differ from U.S. GAAP by charging policy acquisition costs to expense as incurred, establishing future policy benefit liabilities using different actuarial assumptions, as well as valuing investments and certain assets and accounting for deferred income taxes on a different basis. The Company does not have any permitted statutory accounting practices.

		STATUTORY NET INCOME AND SURPLUS


		Statutory net income of the Company was $1.9 million, $5.8 million and $37.1 million for the years ended December 31, 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively. Statutory capital and surplus of the Company was $369.1 million and $364.5 million as of December 31, 2007 and 2006, respectively.

		RISK-BASED CAPITAL


		Risk-based capital is a method developed by the National Association of Insurance Commissioners to measure the minimum amount of capital appropriate for an insurance company to support its overall business operations in consideration of its size and risk profile. The formulas for determining the amount of risk-based capital specify various weighting factors that are applied to financial balances or various levels of activity based on the perceived degree of risk. Additionally, certain risks are required to be measured using actuarial cash flow modeling techniques, subject to formulaic minimums. The adequacy of a company’s actual capital is measured by the risk-based capital results, as determined by the formulas. Companies below minimum risk-based capital requirements are classified within certain levels, each of which requires specified corrective action. As of December 31, 2007 and 2006, the Company exceeded the minimum risk-based capital requirements.

		DIVIDEND RESTRICTIONS


		The maximum amount of ordinary dividends that can be paid by the Company to Pacific Life without restriction cannot exceed the lesser of 10% of statutory surplus as regards to policyholders, or the statutory net gain from operations.

PLA-14

		Based on this limitation and 2007 statutory results, the Company could pay $6.2 million in dividends in 2008 to Pacific Life without prior regulatory approval. No dividends were paid during 2007, 2006 and 2005.

3.		DISCONTINUED OPERATIONS

		On April 27, 2005 (Closing Date), the Company and Pacific Life sold their group insurance business to an unrelated third-party. The transaction is structured as a coinsurance arrangement whereby the Company and Pacific Life cedes to the buyer future premiums received for their existing group insurance business and the buyer assumes future claim liabilities following the Closing Date. Group insurance business liabilities arising prior to the Closing Date were not reinsured. The buyer also obtained renewal rights for the existing business as of the Closing Date.

		Operating results of discontinued operations were as follows:


	Years Ended December 31,
	2007			2006			2005
	(In Thousands)
Revenues	$	572		$	4,701		$	201,147
Benefits and expenses		1,164			6,049			170,331

Income (loss) from discontinued operations		(592	)		(1,348	)		30,816
Provision for income taxes (benefit)		(522	)		(161	)		10,792

Income (loss) from discontinued operations, net of tax		(70	)		(1,187	)		20,024


Net gain on sale of discontinued operations								22,802
Provision for income taxes								7,981

Net gain on sale of discontinued operations, net of taxes		—			—			14,821

Discontinued operations, net of taxes		($70	)		($1,187	)	$	34,845

		Included in revenues from discontinued operations for the years ended December 31, 2007, 2006 and 2005 are direct premiums of $0.9 million, $79.5 million and $502.7 million, net of premiums ceded of $0.9 million, $77.5 million and $313.2 million, respectively.

		Group insurance business liabilities consist of future policy benefits, such as reserves for group health and group life, of $0.1 million and $32.2 million, and other liabilities of $0.7 million and $5.4 million as of December 31, 2007 and 2006, respectively.

4.		INVESTMENTS

		The net carrying amount, gross unrealized gains and losses, and estimated fair value of fixed maturity and equity securities available for sale are shown below. The net carrying amount represents amortized cost adjusted for other than temporary declines in value and changes in the estimated fair value of fixed maturity securities. The estimated fair value of publicly traded securities is based on quoted market prices. For securities not actively traded, fair values were estimated based on amounts provided by independent pricing services specializing in matrix pricing and modeling techniques. The Company also estimates certain fair values based on interest rates, credit quality and average maturity utilizing matrix pricing and other modeling techniques.

PLA-15


	Net
	Carrying		Gross Unrealized				Estimated
	Amount		Gains		Losses		Fair Value
	(In Thousands)
December 31, 2007:
U.S. Treasury securities and obligations of U.S. government authorities and agencies	$	6,375	$	107			$	6,482
Obligations of states and political subdivisions		34,435		609	$	138		34,906
Corporate securities		682,051		30,566		13,205		699,412
Mortgage-backed and asset-backed securities		250,784		4,600		7,040		248,344
Redeemable preferred stock		5,590				390		5,200

Total fixed maturity securities	$	979,235	$	35,882	$	20,773	$	994,344


Total equity securities	$	16,680	$	278	$	1,167	$	15,791


December 31, 2006:
U.S. Treasury securities and obligations of U.S. government authorities and agencies	$	6,751			$	33	$	6,718
Obligations of states and political subdivisions		49,966	$	310		1,657		48,619
Foreign governments		25,000		250				25,250
Corporate securities		550,298		33,870		3,894		580,274
Mortgage-backed and asset-backed securities		253,057		3,554		3,332		253,279
Redeemable preferred stock		4,281				93		4,188

Total fixed maturity securities	$	889,353	$	37,984	$	9,009	$	918,328


Total equity securities	$	13,967	$	1,096	$	167	$	14,896

The net carrying amount and estimated fair value of fixed maturity securities available for sale as of December 31, 2007, by contractual repayment date of principal, are shown below. Expected maturities may differ from contractual maturities because borrowers may have the right to call or prepay obligations with or without call or prepayment penalties.


	Net
	Carrying		Gross Unrealized				Estimated
	Amount		Gains		Losses		Fair Value
	(In Thousands)
Due in one year or less	$	30,405	$	167	$	179	$	30,393
Due after one year through five years		55,896		8,222		208		63,910
Due after five years through ten years		109,807		2,783		887		111,703
Due after ten years		532,343		20,110		12,459		539,994

		728,451		31,282		13,733		746,000
Mortgage-backed and asset-backed securities		250,784		4,600		7,040		248,344

Total	$	979,235	$	35,882	$	20,773	$	994,344

PLA-16

The following tables present the number of investments and the estimated fair value and gross unrealized losses for fixed maturity and other securities, which include equity securities available for sale and other cost method investments, where the estimated fair value had declined and remained below the net carrying amount.


	Total
					Gross
			Estimated		Unrealized
	Number		Fair Value		Losses
			(In Thousands)
December 31, 2007:
Obligations of states and political subdivisions		3	$	11,033		($138	)
Corporate securities		117		329,829		(13,205	)
Mortgage-backed and asset-backed securities		32		175,749		(7,040	)
Redeemable preferred stock		1		3,825		(390	)

Total fixed maturity securities		153		520,436		(20,773	)
Total equity securities		10		10,357		(1,798	)

Total		163	$	530,793		($22,571	)


	Less than 12 Months							12 Months or Greater
					Gross							Gross
			Estimated		Unrealized					Estimated		Unrealized
	Number		Fair Value		Losses			Number		Fair Value		Losses
			(In Thousands)							(In Thousands)
December 31, 2007:
Obligations of states and political subdivisions		1	$	5,435		($65	)		2	$	5,598		($73	)
Corporate securities		55		229,506		(8,552	)		62		100,323		(4,653	)
Mortgage-backed and asset-backed securities		23		78,397		(2,627	)		9		97,352		(4,413	)
Redeemable preferred stock									1		3,825		(390	)

Total fixed maturity securities		79		313,338		(11,244	)		74		207,098		(9,529	)
Total equity securities		7		9,903		(1,684	)		3		454		(114	)

Total		86	$	323,241		($12,928	)		77	$	207,552		($9,643	)

PLA-17


	Total
					Gross
			Estimated		Unrealized
	Number		Fair Value		Losses
			(In Thousands)
December 31, 2006:
U.S. Treasury securities and obligations of U.S. government authorities and agencies		4	$	5,924		($33	)
Obligations of states and political subdivisions		7		37,637		(1,657	)
Corporate securities		148		197,053		(3,894	)
Mortgage-backed and asset-backed securities		22		167,148		(3,332	)
Redeemable preferred stock		1		4,187		(93	)

Total fixed maturity securities		182		411,949		(9,009	)
Total equity securities		2		3,926		(76	)

Total		184	$	415,875		($9,085	)


	Less than 12 Months							12 Months or Greater
					Gross							Gross
			Estimated		Unrealized					Estimated		Unrealized
	Number		Fair Value		Losses			Number		Fair Value		Losses
			(In Thousands)							(In Thousands)
December 31, 2006:
U.S. Treasury securities and obligations of U.S. government authorities and agencies									4	$	5,924		($33	)
Obligations of states and political subdivisions		3	$	13,275		($224	)		4		24,362		(1,433	)
Corporate securities		37		141,892		(2,192	)		111		55,161		(1,702	)
Mortgage-backed and asset-backed securities		14		78,878		(1,049	)		8		88,270		(2,283	)
Redeemable preferred stock									1		4,187		(93	)

Total fixed maturity securities		54		234,045		(3,465	)		128		177,904		(5,544	)
Total equity securities		1		3,925		(75	)		1		1		(1	)

Total		55	$	237,970		($3,540	)		129	$	177,905		($5,545	)

		The Company has evaluated fixed maturity and other securities with gross unrealized losses and determined that the unrealized losses are temporary and that the Company has the ability and intent to hold the securities until recovery.

		Sub-prime mortgage lending is the origination of residential mortgage loans to customers with weak credit profiles. Alt-A mortgage lending is the origination of residential mortgage loans to customers who have credit ratings above sub-prime, but do not conform to government-sponsored enterprise standards. The slowing U.S. housing market, greater use of affordability mortgage products and relaxed underwriting standards for some originators for these loans has led to higher delinquency and loss rates, especially within the 2007 and 2006 vintage years.

		The Company has exposure to sub-prime residential mortgage loans through one direct purchase of a residential mortgage-backed security. The investment is included in the table above in mortgage-backed and asset-backed securities. The Company’s net carrying value was $4.9 million and the estimated fair value of the direct investment was $4.7 million, as of December 31, 2007. The security is rated Aaa by an independent rating agency. The

PLA-18

		underlying collateral for this security originated during 2003. The Company’s net carrying value and estimated fair value of a direct investment to an Alt-A residential mortgage-backed security was $5.0 million and $4.8 million, respectively, as of December 31, 2007. The security is rated Aaa by an independent rating agency. The vintage year breakdown of the underlying collateral for this security is 53% during 2007 and 47% during 2006.

		The Company does not hold any investments in collateral debt obligations that have exposure to sub-prime residential mortgage loans.

		Monoline insurers guarantee the timely payment of principal and interest of certain securities. The Company’s net carrying value and estimated fair value of total monoline insured securities was $29.9 million as of December 31, 2007. Included in these amounts are insured municipal securities with a net carrying value and estimated fair value of $21.9 million and $21.8 million, respectively, as of December 31, 2007. Municipalities will often purchase monoline insurance to wrap a security issuance in order to benefit from better market execution. 100% of the overall credit quality of the municipal bond portfolio, including the benefits of monoline insurance, was rated AAA by an independent rating agency. The Company’s direct investment in monoline insurers is immaterial.

		Major categories of investment income and related investment expenses are summarized as follows:


	Years Ended December 31,
	2007		2006		2005
	(In Thousands)
Fixed maturity securities	$	56,684	$	46,342	$	38,733
Equity securities		765		875		522
Mortgage loans		4,718		2,962		2,607
Policy loans		78		64		57
Partnerships and joint ventures		9,826		12,801		9,197
Other		2,539		2,016		1,057

Gross investment income		74,610		65,060		52,173
Investment expense		1,456		904		796

Net investment income	$	73,154	$	64,156	$	51,377

PLA-19

The components of net realized investment gain (loss) are as follows:


	Years Ended December 31,
	2007			2006			2005
	(In Thousands)
Fixed maturity securities:
Gross gains on sales	$	570		$	4,574		$	1,039
Gross losses on sales		(2,626	)		(2,486	)		(677	)
Other than temporary impairments		(2,917	)					(4,086	)
Other		(3	)		129			(1	)

Subtotal		(4,976	)		2,217			(3,725	)


Equity securities:
Gross gains on sales		482			502
Gross losses on sales					(25	)		(13	)

Subtotal		482			477			(13	)


Derivatives		(4,535	)		3,355			839
Real estate		(145	)		(18	)		(235	)
Trading		(60	)		4			(2	)
Other investments		(231	)		65			(737	)

Total		($9,465	)	$	6,100			($3,873	)

The change in unrealized gain (loss) on investments in available for sale and trading securities is as follows:


	December 31,
	2007			2006			2005
				(In Thousands)
Available for sale securities:
Fixed maturity		($13,866	)		($6,041	)		($13,001	)
Equity		(1,818	)		211			(5,076	)

Total		($15,684	)		($5,830	)		($18,077	)


Trading securities		($33	)	$	0		$	0

		Trading securities totaled $0.1 million as of December 31, 2007. The cumulative unrealized loss on trading securities held as of December 31, 2007 was insignificant.

		Fixed maturity securities, which have been non-income producing for the twelve months preceding December 31, 2007 and 2006, were insignificant.

		As of December 31, 2007 and 2006, fixed maturity securities of $6.5 million and $6.6 million, respectively, were on deposit with state insurance departments to satisfy regulatory requirements. There were no securities that exceeded 10% of stockholder’s equity as of December 31, 2007 and 2006.

		Mortgage loans on real estate are collateralized by properties primarily located throughout the U.S. As of December 31, 2007, approximately 34%, 18% and 18% of the collateral properties were located in California, Illinois and Texas, respectively. As of December 31, 2007, 10% of the collateral properties were located in Canada.

PLA-20


		The Company had a mortgage loan general valuation allowance of $0.5 million and $0.4 million as of December 31, 2007 and 2006, respectively. There were no defaults during the years ended December 31, 2007, 2006 and 2005.

		The Company did not have mortgage loans with accrued interest more than 180 days past due as of December 31, 2007 and 2006.

5.		DERIVATIVES AND HEDGING ACTIVITIES

		The Company primarily utilizes derivative instruments to manage its exposure to interest rate risk, foreign currency risk, credit risk, and equity risk. Derivative instruments are also used to manage the duration mismatch of assets and liabilities. The Company utilizes a variety of derivative instruments including swaps, foreign exchange forward contracts, caps, floors, and options.

		The Company applies hedge accounting by designating derivative instruments as either fair value or cash flow hedges on the date the Company enters into a derivative contract. The Company formally documents all relationships between hedging instruments and hedged items, as well as its risk management objectives and strategy for undertaking various hedge transactions. In this documentation, the Company specifically identifies the asset, liability, firm commitment, or forecasted transaction that has been designated as a hedged item and states how the hedging instrument is expected to hedge the risks related to the hedged item. The Company formally measures effectiveness of its hedging relationships both at the hedge inception and on an ongoing basis in accordance with its risk management policy.

		The following table summarizes the notional amount and estimated fair value by hedge designation and derivative type. The notional amount of the variable annuity rider reinsurance contracts represents the full protected basis of the underlying embedded derivative and estimated fair value represents the amount recoverable from reinsurers based on the portion of risk ceded. Collateral received from or pledged to counterparties is not included in the amounts below.


	Notional Amount				Estimated Fair Value
	December 31,				December 31,
	2007		2006		2007			2006
	(In Thousands)				(In Thousands)
Cash flow hedges:
Foreign currency interest rate swaps	$	7,842				($1,031	)
Forward starting interest rate swap agreements		200,000	$	200,000		3,063		$	2,143
Interest rate swaps		10,000		10,000		695			282

Total cash flow hedges		217,842		210,000		2,727			2,425


Derivatives not designated as hedging instruments:
Variable annuity rider embedded derivatives		854,565		520,236		(6,575	)		1,537
Foreign currency interest rate swaps				8,000					(57	)
Other		1,350		180		(68	)		(14	)

Total derivatives not designated as hedging instruments		855,915		528,416		(6,643	)		1,466

Total	$	1,073,757	$	738,416		($3,916	)	$	3,891

		Notional amount represents a standard of measurement of the volume of derivatives. Notional amount is not a quantification of market risk or credit risk and is not recorded in the statements of financial condition. Notional amounts generally represent those amounts used to calculate contractual cash flows to be exchanged and are not paid or received, except for certain contracts such as currency swaps.

		The following table summarizes the asset and liability values of the Company’s derivative instruments and are calculated based on the aggregate estimated fair value of all derivative instruments with each counterparty, net of collateral received or pledged, in accordance with legally enforceable counterparty master netting agreements. Net

PLA-21

cash collateral received from counterparties was zero as of December 31, 2007 and 2006. If the net estimated fair value exposure to the counterparty is positive, the amount is reflected in other investments, whereas, if the net estimated fair value exposure to the counterparty is negative, the estimated fair value is included in future policy benefits or other liabilities, depending on the nature of the derivative.


	Asset Value				Liability Value
	December 31,				December 31,
	2007		2006		2007		2006
	(In Thousands)				(In Thousands)
Other investments	$	2,726	$	2,368
Future policy benefits					$	6,574		($1,537	)
Other liabilities						68		14

Total	$	2,726	$	2,368	$	6,642		($1,523	)

		CASH FLOW HEDGES

		The Company primarily uses foreign currency interest rate swaps, forward starting interest rate swaps and interest rate swaps to manage its exposure to variability in cash flows due to changes in foreign currencies and the benchmark interest rate. These cash flows include those associated with existing assets and liabilities, as well as the forecasted interest cash flows related to anticipated investment purchases and liability issuances. Such anticipated investment purchases and liability issuances are considered probable to occur and are generally completed within 22 years of the inception of the hedge.

		Foreign currency interest rate swap agreements are used to convert a fixed or floating rate, foreign-denominated asset or liability to a U.S. dollar fixed rate asset or liability. The foreign currency interest rate swaps involve the exchange of an initial principal amount in two currencies, and the agreement to re-exchange the currencies at a future date, at an agreed exchange rate. There is also periodic exchange of interest payments in the two currencies at specified intervals; calculated using agreed upon rates and the exchanged principal amounts. The main currency that the Company hedges is the Canadian Dollar.

		Forward starting interest rate swaps are used to hedge the variability in the future interest receipts or payments stemming from the anticipated purchase of fixed rate securities or issuance of fixed rate liabilities due to changes in benchmark interest rates. These derivatives are predominantly used to lock in interest rate levels to match future cash flow characteristics of assets and liabilities. Forward starting interest rate swaps involve the exchange, at specified intervals, of interest payments resulting from the difference between fixed and floating rate interest amounts calculated by reference to an underlying notional amount to begin at a specified date in the future for a specified period of time. Generally, no cash is exchanged at the outset of the contract and no principal payments are made by either party. The notional amounts of the contracts do not represent future cash requirements, as the Company intends to close out open positions prior to expiration.

		Interest rate swap agreements are used to convert a floating rate asset or liability to a fixed rate to hedge the variability of cash flows of the hedged asset or liability due to changes in benchmark interest rates. These derivatives are predominantly used to better match the cash flow characteristics between assets and liabilities. These agreements involve the exchange, at specified intervals, of interest payments resulting from the difference between fixed rate and floating rate interest amounts calculated by reference to an underlying notional amount. Generally, no cash is exchanged at the outset of the contract and no principal payments are made by either party.

		When a derivative is designated as a cash flow hedge, the effective portion of changes in the estimated fair value of the derivative is recorded in OCI and recognized in earnings when the hedged item affects earnings, and the ineffective portion of changes in the estimated fair value of the derivative is recorded in realized investment gain (loss). For the years ended December 31, 2007, 2006 and 2005, the Company recognized an insignificant amount of gains and losses related to the ineffective portion of designated cash flow hedges. No component of the hedging instrument’s fair value is excluded from the determination of effectiveness. The Company has not discontinued any cash flow hedges due to forecasted transactions that are no longer probable of occurring. Over the next twelve months, the Company

PLA-22

		anticipates that $0.4 million of deferred gains on derivative instruments in accumulated OCI will be reclassified to earnings. For the years ended December 31, 2007, 2006 and 2005, all of the Company’s hedged forecasted transactions were determined to be probable of occurring.

		DERIVATIVES NOT DESIGNATED AS HEDGING INSTRUMENTS

		The Company has certain insurance and reinsurance contracts that are considered to have embedded derivatives. When it is determined that the embedded derivative possesses economic and risk characteristics that are not clearly and closely related to those of the host contract and that a separate instrument with the same terms would qualify as a derivative instrument, it is separated from the host contract and accounted for as a stand-alone derivative.

		The Company offers a rider on certain variable annuity contracts that guarantees net principal over a ten-year holding period, as well as riders on certain variable annuity contracts that guarantee a minimum withdrawal benefit over specified periods, subject to certain restrictions. These variable annuity riders (VA Riders) are considered embedded derivatives and are recorded in future policy benefits.

		The decrease in the estimated fair value of the embedded derivatives resulted in before DAC and pre-tax unrealized gains (losses) of ($8.1) million, $0.8 million, and zero for the years ended December 31, 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively, which were recorded as a component of net realized investment gain (loss).

		Additionally, certain policy fee revenue related to the VA Riders of $3.6 million, $2.7 million, and $1.0 million is included in net realized investment gain (loss) for the years ended December 31, 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively.

		CREDIT EXPOSURE

		Credit exposure is measured on a counterparty basis as the net positive aggregate estimated fair value, net of collateral received, if any. The credit exposure for over the counter derivatives as of December 31, 2007 was $2.7 million. The Company had no collateral received or pledged as of December 31, 2007 and 2006.

		For all derivative contracts other than VA Riders, the Company enters into master agreements that may include a termination event clause associated with the Company’s insurer financial strength rating. If the Company’s insurer financial strength rating falls below a specified level assigned by certain rating agencies or, in most cases, if one of the rating agencies ceases to provide an insurer financial strength rating, the counterparty can terminate the master agreement with payment due based on the estimated fair value of the underlying derivatives. As of December 31, 2007, the Company’s insurer financial strength rating was above the specified level.

		The Company attempts to limit its credit exposure by dealing with creditworthy counterparties, establishing risk control limits, executing legally enforceable master netting agreements, and obtaining collateral where appropriate. In addition, each counterparty is reviewed to evaluate its financial stability before entering into each agreement and throughout the period that the financial instrument is owned. All of the Company’s credit exposure from derivative contracts is with investment grade counterparties. The Company has not incurred any losses on derivative financial instruments due to counterparty nonperformance.

6.		POLICYHOLDER LIABILITIES

		FUTURE POLICY BENEFITS

		Future policy benefits, primarily comprised of structured settlement annuity reserves, were $778.5 million and $590.8 million as of December 31, 2007 and 2006, respectively.

PLA-23

		POLICYHOLDER ACCOUNT BALANCES

		The detail of the liability for policyholder account balances is as follows:


	December 31,
	2007		2006
	(In Thousands)
Fixed account liabilities	$	78,843	$	72,626
Variable universal life		12,286		8,255

Total	$	91,129	$	80,881

7.		FAIR VALUE OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

		The carrying amount and estimated fair value of the Company’s financial instruments are as follows:


	December 31, 2007				December 31, 2006
	Carrying		Estimated		Carrying			Estimated
	Amount		Fair Value		Amount			Fair Value
	(In Thousands)
Assets:
Fixed maturity and equity securities (Note 4)	$	1,010,135	$	1,010,135	$	933,224		$	933,224
Mortgage loans		93,628		101,335		41,214			42,862
Policy loans		2,371		2,371		1,948			1,948
Other invested assets		9,377		11,038		8,678			9,127
Derivative instruments (Note 5)		2,726		2,726		2,368			2,368
Cash and cash equivalents		63,408		63,408		47,648			47,648
Liabilities:
Fixed account liabilities		78,843		78,843		72,626			72,626
Derivative instruments (Note 5)		6,642		6,642		(1,523	)		(1,523	)

		The following methods and assumptions were used to estimate the fair value of these financial instruments as of December 31, 2007 and 2006:

		MORTGAGE LOANS

		The estimated fair value of the mortgage loan portfolio is determined by discounting the estimated future cash flows, using a market rate that is applicable to the yield, credit quality and average maturity of the composite portfolio.

		POLICY LOANS

		The carrying amounts of policy loans are a reasonable estimate of their fair values because interest rates are generally variable and based on current market rates.

		OTHER INVESTED ASSETS

		The estimated fair value of private equity investments is based on the ownership percentage of the underlying equity of the investments. The estimated fair value of trading securities is based on quoted market prices, and non marketable equity securities is based on management’s estimate of fair value.

PLA-24

		CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS

		The carrying values approximate fair values due to the short-term maturities of these instruments.

		FIXED ACCOUNT LIABILITIES

		Fixed account liabilities include fixed annuity liabilities. The estimated fair value of fixed annuity liabilities approximates carrying value and primarily includes policyholder deposits and accumulated credited interest.

8.		COMPREHENSIVE INCOME (LOSS)

		The Company displays comprehensive income (loss) and its components in the accompanying statements of stockholder’s equity. The disclosure of the gross components of other comprehensive income (loss) and related taxes are as follows:


	Years Ended December 31,
	2007			2006			2005
	(In Thousands)
Gross holding loss:
Securities available for sale		($20,178	)		($3,137	)		($21,814	)
Derivatives		1,853			2,335			115
Income tax benefit		6,414			279			7,619
Reclassification adjustment — realized (gain) loss:
Sale of securities available for sale		4,494			(2,693	)		3,737
Derivatives		(175	)		(175	)		(175	)
Income tax expense (benefit)		(1,512	)		1,003			(1,247	)
Allocation of holding (gain) loss to DAC		(411	)		(359	)		487
Income tax expense (benefit)		144			125			(169	)

Total other comprehensive loss, net		($9,371	)		($2,622	)		($11,447	)

9.		EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLANS

		As a result of the sale of the group insurance business (Note 3), substantially all the employees of the Company were terminated on the Closing Date. The following employee benefit plans were available to eligible employees prior to the sale.

		The Company permitted eligible employees to participate in a defined benefit pension plan provided by Pacific Life. Pacific Life allocated amounts to the Company based on a percentage of salaries. The Company’s share of net expense was $0.5 million for the year ended December 31, 2005, and is included in discontinued operations. In addition, Pacific Life allocated actual expenses incurred as a result of the termination of the Company employees, of $8.5 million for the year ended December 31, 2005, and is included in net gain on sale of discontinued operations.

		The Company permitted certain employees to defer a portion of cash compensation under a deferred compensation plan provided by Pacific Life. The Company’s expense for this plan amounted to $0.3 million for each of the years ended December 31, 2007, 2006 and 2005 and is included in discontinued operations. The deferred compensation plan, which will be paid out until January 2015, will continue to accrue interest expense until paid out.

		The Company participated in a defined benefit health care plan and a defined benefit life insurance plan (the Plans) provided by Pacific Life. The Plans provide postretirement benefits for all eligible retirees and their dependents. Generally, qualified employees became eligible for these benefits if they reached normal retirement age, had been

PLA-25

		covered under Pacific Life’s policy as an active employee for a minimum continuous period prior to the date retired, and had an employment date before January 1, 1990. The Plans contain cost-sharing features such as deductibles and coinsurance, and require retirees to make contributions, which can be adjusted annually. Pacific Life’s commitment to qualified employees who retired after April 1, 1994 is limited to specific dollar amounts. Pacific Life reserves the right to modify or terminate the Plans at any time.

		The Company permitted eligible employees to participate in a defined contribution plan provided by Pacific Life. Pacific Life provided a voluntary Retirement Incentive Savings Plan (RISP) pursuant to Section 401(k) of the Internal Revenue Code covering all eligible employees. Pacific Life’s RISP matched 75% of each employee’s contribution, up to a maximum of 6% of eligible employee compensation. The Company’s share of net expense was $1.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2005 and is included in discontinued operations.

10.		INCOME TAXES

		The provision for income taxes is as follows:


	Years Ended December 31,
	2007			2006			2005
	(In Thousands)
Current	$	773		$	2,990		$	3,649
Deferred		4,605			8,539			(141	)

Provision for income taxes from continuing operations		5,378			11,529			3,508
Provision for income taxes (benefit) from discontinued operations		(522	)		(161	)		18,773

Total	$	4,856		$	11,368		$	22,281

A reconciliation of the provision for income taxes from continuing operations based on the prevailing corporate statutory tax rate of 35% to the provision for income taxes from continuing operations reflected in the statements of operations is as follows:


	Years Ended December 31,
	2007			2006			2005
	(In Thousands)
Provision for income taxes at the statutory rate	$	8,004		$	10,889		$	3,538
Separate account dividends received deduction		(2,290	)		(525	)		(399	)
Nontaxable investment income		(526	)		(47	)		(6	)
Amounts related to prior periods		190			1,212			375

Provision for income taxes from continuing operations	$	5,378		$	11,529		$	3,508

		Upon adoption of FIN 48 on January 1, 2007 (Note 1), the Company had an immaterial amount of unrecognized tax benefits, which relate entirely to an uncertain tax position regarding refund claims for the impact of short-term capital gains on computing dividends received deductions relating to the Company’s separate accounts (DRD), which may be realized during the next twelve months.

		All realized tax benefits and related interest will be recorded as a discrete item that will impact the effective tax rate in the accounting period in which the uncertain DRD tax position is ultimately settled.

		The Company did not recover or release any unrecognized tax benefits during the year ended December 31, 2007.

		During the year ended December 31, 2007, the Company paid an immaterial amount of interest and penalties to state tax authorities.

PLA-26

The deferred tax liability, net, included in other liabilities as of December 31, 2007 and 2006, is comprised of the following tax effected temporary differences:


	December 31,
	2007			2006
	(In Thousands)
Deferred tax assets:
Investment valuation	$	10,329		$	7,004
Policyholder reserves		3,364			3,189
Hedging		2,174			2,126
Deferred compensation		1,347			1,611
Retirement benefits		941			980

Total deferred tax assets		18,155			14,910


Deferred tax liabilities:
DAC		(20,138	)		(13,291	)
Partnership income		(7,409	)		(6,218	)
Other		(740	)		(928	)

Total deferred tax liabilities		(28,287	)		(20,437	)


Deferred tax liability from continuing operations, net		(10,132	)		(5,527	)
Deferred taxes on cumulative change in accounting principle		188
Deferred taxes on other comprehensive income and other		(6,000	)		(13,250	)

Deferred tax liability, net		($15,944	)		($18,777	)

		SFAS No. 109, Accounting for Income Taxes requires the reduction of deferred tax assets by a valuation allowance if, based on the weight of available evidence, it is more likely than not that a portion or all of the deferred tax assets will not be realized. Based on management’s assessment, it is more likely than not that deferred tax assets will be realized through future taxable earnings.

		PMHC and its subsidiaries file income tax returns in U.S. Federal and various state jurisdictions and have tax years open by statute, or valid extension thereof, for tax years after 1997. PMHC is under continuous audit by the Internal Revenue Service (IRS) and is audited periodically by some state taxing authorities. The IRS and state taxing authorities have completed audits of PMHC’s tax returns through the tax years ended December 31, 2003 and are currently auditing the tax years ended December 31, 2005 and 2004. The Company does not expect the federal and state audits to result in any material assessments.

PLA-27

11.		SEGMENT INFORMATION

		The Company has three operating segments: Investment Management, Annuities and Life Insurance. These segments are managed separately and have been identified based on differences in products and services offered. All other activity is included in Corporate and Other segment.

		The Investment Management segment offers investment and annuity products to pension fund sponsors and other institutional investors primarily through its home office marketing team and other intermediaries. The Investment Management segment also offers structured settlement annuities through a nationwide network of brokers.

		The Annuities segment offers variable annuities to individuals and small businesses through Financial Industry Regulatory Authority (FINRA) firms, regional and national wirehouses, and financial institutions. FINRA was created in July 2007 through the consolidation of the National Association of Securities Dealers and the member regulation, enforcement and arbitration functions of the New York Stock Exchange.

		The Life Insurance segment offers UL and other life insurance products to individuals, small businesses and corporations through independent producers working through a network of distribution channels.

		The Corporate and Other segment primarily includes investment income, expenses and assets not attributable to the operating segments. The Corporate and Other segment also includes the elimination of intersegment transactions. The group insurance business is included in Corporate and Other segment as discontinued operations (Note 3).

		The Company uses the same accounting policies and procedures to measure segment net income and assets as it uses to measure its net income and assets. Net investment income and net realized investment gain (loss) are allocated based on invested assets purchased and held as is required for transacting the business of that segment. Overhead expenses are allocated based on services provided. Interest expense is allocated based on the short-term borrowing needs of the segment and is included in net investment income. The provision for income taxes (benefit) is allocated based on each segment’s actual tax provision.

		The operating segments are allocated equity based on formulas determined by management and receive a fixed interest rate (debenture) return on their allocated equity. The debenture amount is reflected as investment expense in net investment income in the Corporate and Other segment and as investment income in the operating segments.

		The Company generates substantially all of its revenues and net income from customers located in the U.S. As of December 31, 2007 and 2006, the Company had foreign investments with an estimated fair value of $136.8 million and $137.9 million, respectively.

		Depreciation expense and capital expenditures were substantially all attributable to the group insurance business. Depreciation expense for the group insurance business was zero, $1.3 million and $0.6 million for the years ended December 31, 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively, which is included in discontinued operations. There were no capital expenditures during the years ended December 31, 2007, 2006 and 2005.

PLA-28

The following is segment information as of and for the year ended December 31, 2007:


	Investment						Life		Corporate
	Management			Annuities			Insurance		and Other			Total

REVENUES	(In Thousands)
Insurance premiums	$	166,392					$	163				$	166,555
Policy fees		1,828		$	15,034			7,211					24,073
Net investment income		43,891			2,755			1,367	$	25,141			73,154
Net realized investment loss		(4,357	)		(4,469	)				(639	)		(9,465	)
Other income		37			2,545			87		119			2,788

Total revenues		207,791			15,865			8,828		24,621			257,105


BENEFITS AND EXPENSES
Policy benefits		201,378			351			1,359					203,088
Interest credited					3,539			441					3,980
Commission expenses		6,737			6,871			1,742					15,350
Operating expenses		2,564			6,728			13		2,512			11,817

Total benefits and expenses		210,679			17,489			3,555		2,512			234,235


Income (loss) from continuing operations before provision for income taxes (benefit)		(2,888	)		(1,624	)		5,273		22,109			22,870
Provision for income taxes (benefit)		(1,119	)		(2,654	)		1,565		7,586			5,378


Income (loss) from continuing operations		(1,769	)		1,030			3,708		14,523			17,492
Discontinued operations, net of taxes										(70	)		(70	)

Net income (loss)		($1,769	)	$	1,030		$	3,708	$	14,453		$	17,422


Total assets	$	810,685		$	1,213,993		$	163,888	$	343,677		$	2,532,243
DAC		2,260			56,881			13,578					72,719
Separate account assets					1,088,666			93,087					1,181,753
Policyholder and contract liabilities		740,663			86,887			42,051					869,601
Separate account liabilities					1,088,666			93,087					1,181,753

PLA-29

The following is segment information as of and for the year ended December 31, 2006:


	Investment				Life			Corporate
	Management		Annuities		Insurance			and Other			Total

REVENUES	(In Thousands)
Insurance premiums	$	143,915			$	487					$	144,402
Policy fees		1,834	$	8,671		5,205						15,710
Net investment income		34,153		4,769		864		$	24,370			64,156
Net realized investment gain		3,022		3,020					58			6,100
Other income		26		4,285		183						4,494

Total revenues		182,950		20,745		6,739			24,428			234,862


BENEFITS AND EXPENSES
Policy benefits		170,537		178		3,933						174,648
Interest credited		34		2,996		335						3,365
Commission expenses		5,819		8,067		1,922						15,808
Operating expenses		1,346		7,368		(690	)		1,904			9,928

Total benefits and expenses		177,736		18,609		5,500			1,904			203,749


Income from continuing operations before provision for income taxes		5,214		2,136		1,239			22,524			31,113
Provision for income taxes		1,698		207		406			9,218			11,529


Income from continuing operations		3,516		1,929		833			13,306			19,584
Discontinued operations, net of taxes									(1,187	)		(1,187	)

Net income	$	3,516	$	1,929	$	833		$	12,119		$	18,397


Total assets	$	661,584	$	858,727	$	57,240		$	382,219		$	1,959,770
DAC		2,379		36,839		7,802						47,020
Separate account assets				748,017		33,784						781,801
Policyholder and contract liabilities		589,675		71,355		10,678						671,708
Separate account liabilities				748,017		33,784						781,801

PLA-30

The following is segment information for the year ended December 31, 2005:


	Investment					Life			Corporate
	Management		Annuities			Insurance			and Other			Total

REVENUES	(In Thousands)
Insurance premiums	$	107,496					($698	)				$	106,798
Policy fees		1,767	$	6,571			2,760						11,098
Net investment income		28,131		6,088			623		$	16,535			51,377
Net realized investment gain (loss)		707		716			(659	)		(4,637	)		(3,873	)
Other income		13		2,669			131						2,813

Total revenues		138,114		16,044			2,157			11,898			168,213


BENEFITS AND EXPENSES
Policy benefits		129,307		340			810						130,457
Interest credited		1,019		3,996			292						5,307
Commission expenses		4,359		5,490			(159	)					9,690
Operating expenses		2,392		11,419			(935	)		(228	)		12,648

Total benefits and expenses		137,077		21,245			8			(228	)		158,102


Income (loss) from continuing operations before provision for income taxes (benefit)		1,037		(5,201	)		2,149			12,126			10,111
Provision for income taxes (benefit)		363		(2,495	)		702			4,938			3,508


Income (loss) from continuing operations		674		(2,706	)		1,447			7,188			6,603
Discontinued operations, net of taxes										34,845			34,845

Net income (loss)	$	674		($2,706	)	$	1,447		$	42,033		$	41,448

12.		TRANSACTIONS WITH AFFILIATES

		Pacific Life provides general administrative and investment management services to the Company under an administrative services agreement and product contract services relating to the Company’s variable universal life insurance, other life insurance, variable annuities and investment management products under a separate services agreement. Amounts charged by Pacific Life to the Company for these services were $16.5 million, $18.1 million and $36.1 million for the years ended December 31, 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively.

		On May 1, 2007, Pacific Life and the Company formed a two member limited liability company, Pacific Life Fund Advisors LLC (PLFA), which became the investment adviser for the Pacific Select Fund, the investment vehicle provided to the Company’s variable life insurance policyholders and variable annuity contract owners. Prior to May 1, 2007, Pacific Life served in this capacity and the Company provided certain investment options and other administrative services under a services agreement for which the Company earned a service fee from Pacific Life. PLFA is owned 99% by Pacific Life and 1% by the Company.

		Prior to May 1, 2007, service fees earned by the Company of $2.6 million and related expenses of $0.7 million, included in amounts paid to Pacific Life under the administrative services agreement described above, were recorded directly in the books of the Company. For the year ended December 31, 2006, the fees earned and related expenses were $4.5 million and $1.5 million, respectively. For the year ended December 31, 2005, the fees earned and related expenses were $2.8 million and $1.0 million, respectively. Subsequent to May 1, 2007, these revenues and expenses

PLA-31

		are being recorded at either PLFA or Pacific Select Distributors, Inc. (PSD), a wholly owned subsidiary of Pacific Life and distributor of the Company’s variable life insurance and variable annuity products. Earnings from PLFA to the Company included in net investment income for the period May 1, 2007 to December 31, 2007, amounted to $1.3 million. Revenues earned by PSD are passed onto the Company as a reduction of commission expense paid to PSD on the Company’s variable annuity and variable life insurance products. Commission expense reductions amounted to $1.4 million for the period May 1, 2007 to December 31, 2007.

		The Company has an agreement with Pacific Life to borrow up to $20 million at variable interest rates. In October 2006, the Company borrowed $10 million under this borrowing facility, which it repaid in the same month. The Company did not utilize this borrowing facility during 2007.

13.		DEBT

		The Company maintains a $40 million reverse repurchase line of credit with a commercial bank. These borrowings are at variable rates of interest based on collateral and market conditions. There was no outstanding debt in connection with this line of credit as of December 31, 2007 and 2006.

		The Company is a member of the Federal Home Loan Bank of San Francisco (FHLB). In December 2006, the Company became eligible to borrow from the FHLB amounts based on a percentage of statutory capital and surplus and could borrow amounts up to $102 million as of December 31, 2007. Of this amount, half, or $51 million, can be borrowed for terms other than overnight, out to a maximum term of nine months. These borrowings are at variable rates of interest, collateralized by certain mortgage loan and government securities. As of December 31, 2007 and 2006, there were no borrowings outstanding.

14.		COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES

		COMMITMENTS

		The Company has outstanding commitments to make investments primarily in fixed maturity securities, mortgage loans, limited partnerships and other investments as follows (In Thousands):


Years Ending December 31:
2008	$	23,830
2009 through 2012		25,410

Total	$	49,240

		The Company leased office facilities under various noncancelable operating leases prior to the sale of the group insurance business (Note 3). Substantially all operating leases were transferred to the buyer. The Company is contingently liable (to a maximum of $16 million) for future rent and expense obligations related to one of these leases. Rent expense, which was included in discontinued operations, was insignificant for the years ended December 31, 2007 and 2006 and was $1.9 million for the year ended December 31, 2005.

		CONTINGENCIES — LITIGATION

		The Company is a respondent in a number of legal proceedings, some of which involve allegations for extra-contractual damages. Although the Company is confident of its position in these matters, success is not a certainty and it is possible that in any case a judge or jury could rule against the Company. In the opinion of management, the outcome of such proceedings is not likely to have a material adverse effect on the Company’s financial statements.

PLA-32

		CONTINGENCIES — IRS REVENUE RULING

		On August 16, 2007, the IRS issued Revenue Ruling 2007-54, which provided the IRS’ interpretation of tax law regarding the computation of the Company’s DRD. On September 25, 2007, the IRS issued Revenue Ruling 2007-61, which suspended Revenue Ruling 2007-54 and indicated the IRS would address the proper interpretation of tax law in a regulation project that has been added to the IRS’ 2007/2008 priority guidance plan. If, after public notice and comment, the IRS regulation project ultimately adopts the IRS’ interpretation contained in Revenue Ruling 2007-54, the Company could lose a substantial amount of DRD tax benefits, which could have a material adverse effect on the Company’s financial statements.

		CONTINGENCIES — OTHER

		In the course of its business, the Company provides certain indemnifications related to dispositions, investments, lease agreements or other transactions that are triggered by, among other things, breaches of representations, warranties or covenants provided by the Company. These obligations are typically subject to time limitations that vary in duration, including contractual limitations and those that arise by operation of law, such as applicable statutes of limitation. Because the amounts of these types of indemnifications often are not explicitly stated, the overall maximum amount of the obligation under such indemnifications cannot be reasonably estimated. The Company has not made any payments for these types of indemnifications. The estimated maximum potential amount of future payments under these obligations is not determinable due to the lack of a stated maximum liability for certain matters, and therefore, no related liability has been recorded. Management believes that judgments, if any, against the Company related to such matters are not likely to have a material adverse effect on the Company’s financial statements.

		Most of the jurisdictions in which the Company is admitted to transact business require life insurance companies to participate in guaranty associations, which are organized to pay contractual benefits owed pursuant to insurance policies issued by insolvent life insurance companies. These associations levy assessments, up to prescribed limits, on all member companies in a particular state based on the proportionate share of premiums written by member companies in the lines of business in which the insolvent insurer operated. The Company has not received notification of any insolvency that is expected to result in a material guaranty fund assessment.

		See Note 5 for discussion of contingencies related to derivative instruments.

		See Note 10 for discussion of other contingencies related to income taxes.

PLA-33


Small-Cap Growth International Value Long/Short Large-Cap International Small-Cap Equity Index Small-Cap Index Diversified Research Equity American Funds^® Growth-Income		American Funds^® Growth Large-Cap Value Technology Short Duration Bond Floating Rate Loan Diversified Bond Growth LT Focused 30 Health Sciences		Mid-Cap Equity (formerly called Mid-Cap Value) Large-Cap Growth International Large-Cap Small-Cap Value Multi-Strategy Main Street^® Core Emerging Markets Money Market		High Yield Bond Managed Bond Inflation Managed Comstock Mid-Cap Growth Real Estate Small-Cap Equity


	Without
	Stepped-Up Death Benefit		With Stepped-Up
	Rider		Death Benefit Rider



• Mortality and Expense Risk Charge⁴		0.90%		0.90%
• Administrative Fee⁴		0.15%		0.15%
• Stepped-Up Death Benefit Rider Charge^4,5		none		0.20%

• Total Separate Account A Annual Expenses		1.05%		1.25%





Loan Expenses (interest on Contract Debt) (Loans are only available with certain Qualified Contracts. See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES— Qualified Contracts— General Rules on page 61):
• Loan Interest Rate (net)⁶				2.00%


	Current Charge			Maximum Charge
	Percentage			Percentage



• Foundation 10 Rider Charge⁸		0.85	%		1.50	%
• Flexible Lifetime Income Rider Charge (Single)⁹		0.65	%		1.20	%
• Flexible Lifetime Income Rider Charge (Joint)⁹		0.85	%		1.20	%
• Guaranteed Protection Advantage 3 (GPA 3) Rider Charge¹⁰		0.45	%		1.00	%
• Guaranteed Protection Advantage 5 (GPA 5) Rider Charge¹¹		0.40	%		0.75	%
• Guaranteed Income Advantage Plus (GIA Plus) Rider Charge¹²		0.50	%		0.50	%


¹		The withdrawal charge may or may not apply or may be reduced under certain circumstances. The age is measured from the date of each Purchase Payment. See CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS and WITHDRAWALS.

²		We deduct an Annual Fee on each Contract Anniversary up to your Annuity Date and when you make a full withdrawal if the Contract Value on these days is less than $50,000 after deducting any outstanding loan and interest (your Net Contract Value). See CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS.

³		The Account Value represents the value of your Variable Investment Options and any fixed Investment Options on any Business Day. The Contract Value represents the value of your Variable Investment Options, any fixed Investment Options plus any Loan Account Value on any Business Day.

⁴		This is an annual rate and is assessed on a daily basis. The daily rate is calculated by dividing the annual rate by 365.

⁵		If you buy the Stepped-Up Death Benefit Rider, we will add this charge to the Mortality and Expense Risk Charge until your Annuity Date.


⁶		If we process a loan on your Contract, we will charge you a gross interest rate of 5.00% on your outstanding principal amount. We will credit you the amount of 3.00% on any Contract Value attributed to your Loan Account. The net amount of interest you pay on your loan will be 2.00% annually. See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES—Qualified Contracts—General Rules—Loans.

⁷		Only one Foundation 10 Rider, Flexible Lifetime Income Rider (Single) or Flexible Lifetime Income Rider (Joint) may be owned or in effect at the same time. Only one GPA 3 or GPA 5 Rider may be owned or in effect at the same time.

⁸		If you buy the Foundation 10 Rider, the annual charge is equal to the current charge percentage multiplied by the Protected Payment Base. The Protected Payment Base is the amount used to determine the allowable annual withdrawal amount under the Rider. For a complete explanation of the Protected Payment Base, see OTHER OPTIONAL RIDERS—Foundation 10 Rider. We deduct this charge proportionately from your Investment Options on each Contract Anniversary following the Effective Date of the Rider during the term of the Rider and while the Rider is in effect, or if the Rider is terminated. Under the terms and conditions of the Rider, the annual Charge percentage may increase if an Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset occurs, but will never be more than the maximum charge percentage. We will waive the annual Charge if the Rider terminates as a result of the death of an Owner or sole surviving Annuitant or upon full annuitization of your Contract. The annual charge is only waived for the Contract Year that death or annuitization occurs.

⁹		If you buy the Flexible Lifetime Income Rider (Single or Joint), the annual charge is equal to the current charge percentage multiplied by the Protected Payment Base. The Protected Payment Base is the amount used to determine the allowable annual withdrawal amount under the Rider. For a complete explanation of the Protected Payment Base, see OTHER OPTIONAL RIDERS— Flexible Lifetime Income Rider (Single or Joint). We deduct this charge proportionately from your Investment Options on each Contract Anniversary following the Effective Date of the Rider during the term of the Rider and while the Rider is in effect, or if the Rider is terminated. Under the terms and conditions of the Rider, the annual Charge percentage may increase if an Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset occurs, but will never be more than the maximum charge percentage. Under the Single version, we will waive the annual Charge if the Rider terminates as a result of the death of an Owner or sole surviving Annuitant or upon full annuitization of your Contract. Under the Joint version, we will waive the annual charge if the Rider terminates as a result of the death of the surviving Designated Life or upon full annuitization of the Contract. The annual charge is only waived for the Contract Year that death or annuitization occurs.

¹⁰		If you buy the GPA 3 Rider, the annual charge is equal to the current charge percentage multiplied by the Guaranteed Protection Amount. For a complete description of the Guaranteed Protection Amount, see OTHER OPTIONAL RIDERS— Guaranteed Protection Advantage 3 (GPA 3) Rider. We deduct this charge proportionately from your Investment Options on each Contract Anniversary following the Effective Date of the Rider during the term of the Rider and while the Rider is in effect, or if you terminate the Rider. Under the terms and conditions of the Rider, the annual charge percentage may increase if a Step-Up is elected but will never be more than the maximum charge percentage. The annual charge is only waived for the Contract Year that death or annuitization occurs.

¹¹		If you buy the GPA 5 Rider, we deduct this charge proportionately from your Investment Options on each Contract Anniversary following the Effective Date of the Rider during the term of the Rider and while the Rider is in effect, or if you terminate the Rider. If the Effective Date of the GPA 5 Rider is before May 1, 2008, the Guaranteed Protection Charge is equal to 0.25%. Under the terms and conditions of the Rider, the annual charge percentage may increase if a Step-Up is elected but will never be more than the maximum charge percentage.

¹²		If you buy the GIA Plus Rider, we charge the fee based on the greater of the Contract Value or the Guaranteed Income Base. The Guaranteed Income Base is the amount invested to date grown at 5% annually (until age 80) that may be used for fixed annuity payments starting on the Annuity Date. For a complete explanation of the Guaranteed Income Base, see OTHER OPTIONAL RIDERS— Guaranteed Income Advantage Plus (GIA Plus). We deduct this charge proportionately from your Investment Options on each Contract Anniversary and when you make a full withdrawal if the Rider is in effect on that date, or if the Rider is terminated. We will waive the annual charge if the Rider terminates as a result of death of an Owner or sole surviving Annuitant or upon full annuitization of your Contract. The annual charge is only waived for the Contract Year that death or annuitization occurs.


AllianceBernstein Variable Products Series Fund, Inc. AllianceBernstein VPS Balanced Wealth Strategy Portfolio Class B		BlackRock Variable Series Fund, Inc. BlackRock Global Allocation V.I. Fund Class III		Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust Franklin Templeton VIP Founding Funds Allocation Fund Class 4






An Overview of Pacific Journey		3

Your Investment Options		12
Your Variable Investment Options		12
Your Fixed Option		15

Purchasing Your Contract		15
How to Apply for Your Contract		15
Making Your Investments (“Purchase Payments”)		16

How Your Investments are Allocated		16
Choosing Your Investment Options		16
Portfolio Optimization		17
Investing in Variable Investment Options		21
When Your Investment is Effective		22
Transfers and Market-timing Restrictions		22
Systematic Transfer Options		23

Charges, Fees and Deductions		24
Withdrawal Charge		24
Mortality and Expense Risk Charge		25
Administrative Fee		26
Annual Fee		26
Optional Rider Charges		26
Premium Taxes		27
Waivers and Reduced Charges		27
Fund Expenses		27

Annuitization		28
Selecting Your Annuitant		28
Annuitization		28
Choosing Your Annuity Date		28
Default Annuity Date and Options		29
Choosing Your Annuity Option		29
Your Annuity Payments		31

Death Benefits and Optional Death Benefit Riders		32
Death Benefits		32
	Optional Stepped-Up Death Benefit Rider (SDBR)	34

Withdrawals		35
Optional Withdrawals		35
Tax Consequences of Withdrawals		37
Right to Cancel (“Free Look”)		37

Other Optional Riders		38
Foundation 10 Rider		39
Flexible Lifetime Income Rider (Single)		44
Flexible Lifetime Income Rider (Joint)		49
Guaranteed Protection Advantage 3 (GPA 3) Rider		54
Guaranteed Protection Advantage 5 (GPA 5) Rider		56
Guaranteed Income Advantage Plus (GIA Plus) Rider		58

Pacific Life & Annuity and the Separate Account		60
Pacific Life & Annuity Company (PL&A)		60
Pacific Life		61
Separate Account A		61
Financial Highlights		62

Federal Tax Issues		62
Taxation of Annuities — General Provisions		62
Non-Qualified Contracts — General Rules		62
Impact of Federal Income Taxes		65
Taxes on Pacific Life & Annuity Company		66
Qualified Contracts — General Rules		66
IRAs and Qualified Plans		69

Additional Information		71
Voting Rights		71
Changes to Your Contract		71
Changes to All Contracts		72
Inquiries and Submitting Forms and Requests		73
Telephone and Electronic Transactions		73
Electronic Delivery Authorization		74
Timing of Payments and Transactions		74
Confirmations, Statements and Other Reports to Contract Owners		74
Distribution Arrangements		75
Service Arrangements		76
Replacement of Life Insurance or Annuities		76
Financial Statements		76

The General Account		76
General Information		76
DCA Plus Fixed Option		77

Terms Used in This Prospectus		79

Contents of the Statement of Additional Information		81

Appendix A: Foundation 10 Rider Sample Calculations		83

Appendix B: Flexible Lifetime Income Rider (Single and Joint) Sample Calculations		90

Appendix C: Guaranteed Protection Advantage 3 (GPA 3) and Guaranteed Protection Advantage 5 (GPA 5) Rider Sample Calculations		98

Appendix D: Guaranteed Income Advantage Plus Rider Sample Calculations		100

Appendix E: Death Benefit Amount and Stepped-Up Death Benefit Rider (SDBR) Sample Calculations		105

Appendix F: Portfolio Optimization Models Until May 2, 2008		107

Where to Go for More Information		Back Cover


• Maximum Withdrawal Charge (as a percentage of Purchase Payments withdrawn)¹






“Age” of Payment in Years:	1	2	3	4	5	6	7 or more




Withdrawal Charge Percentage:	7%	7%	6%	5%	3%	1%	0%


Total Annual Portfolio Operating Expenses¹	Minimum			Maximum


Expenses that are deducted from the Funds’ assets, including management fees, shareholder servicing or distribution (12b-1) fees, and other expenses.		0.27	%		1.66	%



¹		The minimum and maximum percentages in the table above do not reflect any expense reimbursements or fee waiver arrangements. However, to help limit Pacific Select Fund expenses, PLFA, adviser to the Pacific Select Fund, has contractually agreed to reduce its investment advisory fees or otherwise reimburse certain Portfolios of the Pacific Select Fund which may reduce the expenses reflected above. See the Fees and Expenses section of the Pacific Select Fund prospectus for complete information regarding annual fund operating expenses.


	1 Year	3 Years	5 Years	10 Years
Maximum*	$1,230	$2,383	$3,411	$6,605
Minimum*	$788	$1,031	$1,118	$1,859


•	If you did not surrender or annuitize, but left the money in your Contract:


*		In calculating the examples above, we used the maximum and minimum total operating expenses of all the Portfolios as shown in the Fees And Expenses section of each Fund Prospectus. For more information on fees and expenses, see CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS in this Prospectus, and see each Fund Prospectus. See the FINANCIAL HIGHLIGHTS section in the Prospectus for condensed financial information about the Subaccounts.







PACIFIC SELECT FUND	INVESTMENT GOAL	THE PORTFOLIO’S MAIN INVESTMENTS	PORTFOLIO MANAGER




Small-Cap Growth	Capital appreciation.	Equity securities of small, fast growing companies.	Fred Alger Management, Inc.




International Value	Long-term capital appreciation.	Equity securities of relatively large non-U.S. companies believed to be undervalued.	AllianceBernstein L.P.




Long/Short Large-Cap	Above-average total returns.	Equity securities of large- capitalization companies including both long and short positions.	Analytic Investors, LLC & J.P. Morgan Investment Management, Inc.




International Small-Cap	Long-term growth of capital.	Equity securities of non- U.S. companies with small market capitalizations.	Batterymarch Financial Management, Inc.




Equity Index	Investment results that correspond to the total return of common stocks publicly traded in the U.S.	Equity securities of companies that are included in or representative of the S&P 500 Index^® (including derivatives).	BlackRock Investment Management, LLC




Small-Cap Index	Investment results that correspond to the total return of an index of small-capitalization companies.	Equity securities of small companies that are included in or representative of the Russell 2000 Index (including derivatives).	BlackRock Investment Management, LLC




Diversified Research	Long-term growth of capital.	Equity securities of companies located in the U.S., or whose principal markets are in the U.S.	Capital Guardian Trust Company




Equity	Capital appreciation. (Current income is of secondary importance.)	Equity securities of growth-oriented companies located in the U.S., or whose principal markets are in the U.S.	Capital Guardian Trust Company




American Funds Growth-Income	Long-term growth of capital and income.	A master fund that invests in equity securities of both U.S. and non-U.S. companies of any size and other securities which demonstrate the potential for appreciation and/or dividends.	Capital Research and Management Company (adviser to the Master Growth-Income Fund)




American Funds Growth	Long-term growth of capital.	A master fund that invests in equity securities of both U.S. and non-U.S. companies of any size that appear to offer superior opportunities for growth of capital.	Capital Research and Management Company (adviser to the Master Growth Fund)




Large-Cap Value	Long-term growth of capital. (Current income is of secondary importance.)	Equity securities of large U.S. companies.	ClearBridge Advisors, LLC




Technology	Long-term growth of capital.	Equity securities in the technology sector that the manager believes have or will develop products, processes or services that will provide significant technological improvements, advances or developments, as well as those expected to benefit from their extensive reliance on technology in connection with their operations and services.	Columbia Management Advisors, LLC




Short Duration Bond	Current income. (Capital appreciation is of secondary importance.)	High quality fixed income securities with an average portfolio duration not likely to exceed 3 years.	Goldman Sachs Asset Management, L.P.




Floating Rate Loan	High level of current income.	Interests in floating rate senior loans.	Highland Capital Management, L.P.




Diversified Bond	Maximize total return consistent with prudent investment management.	Fixed income securities of varying qualities and terms to maturity of both U.S. and non-U.S. companies and derivatives relating to such securities or related indexes.	J.P. Morgan Investment Management, Inc.




Growth LT	Long-term growth of capital.	Equity securities of companies of any size.	Janus Capital Management LLC




Focused 30	Long-term growth of capital.	U.S. and foreign equity securities selected for their growth potential.	Janus Capital Management LLC


• Annual Fee²							$30.00






	Model A			Model B			Model C			Model D			Model E


Cash		7	%		5	%		2	%		—			—

Bonds		73			55			38			20	%		4	%

Domestic Stocks		15			29			43			55			66

International Stocks		5			11			17			25			30


	Withdrawal
	Charge as a
	percentage
	of the
“Age” of Payment	Purchase Payment
in Years	withdrawn





1		7	%




2		7	%




3		6	%




4		5	%




5		3	%




6		1	%







ALLIANCEBERNSTEIN VARIABLE PRODUCTS SERIES FUND, INC.	INVESTMENT GOAL	THE PORTFOLIO’S MAIN INVESTMENTS	PORTFOLIO MANAGER




AllianceBernstein VPS Balanced Wealth Strategy Portfolio Class B	Maximize total return.	Invests in equity and debt securities. Targets a weighting of 60% equity securities and 40% debt securities with a goal of providing moderate upside potential without excessive volatility.	AllianceBernstein L.P.







BLACKROCK VARIABLE SERIES FUND, INC.	INVESTMENT GOAL	THE PORTFOLIO’S MAIN INVESTMENTS	PORTFOLIO MANAGER




BlackRock Global Allocation V.I. Fund Class III	High total investment return.	A mix of U.S. and foreign equity, debt and money market securities.	BlackRock Advisors, LLC







FRANKLIN TEMPLETON VARIABLE INSURANCE PRODUCTS TRUST	INVESTMENT GOAL	THE PORTFOLIO’S MAIN INVESTMENTS	PORTFOLIO MANAGER




Franklin Templeton VIP Founding Funds Allocation Fund, Class 4	Seeks capital appreciation, with income as a secondary goal.	Invests equal portions in Class 1 shares of Franklin Income Securities Fund, Mutual Shares Securities Fund and Templeton Growth Securities Fund. The underlying funds invest in both U.S. and foreign equity securities and debt securities.	Franklin Templeton Services, LLC serves as the Fund’s administrator.





Portfolio Optimization Model Target Allocations as of May 2, 2008

		Model A			Model B			Model C			Model D			Model E


	Small-Cap Growth		—			—			2	%		2	%		3	%

	International Value		3	%		5	%		6			9			10

	Long/Short Large-Cap		1			2			2			3			4

	International Small-Cap		—			1			2			3			3

	Equity Index		2			3			3			4			4

	Small-Cap Index		—			—			—			—			2

	Diversified Research		1			2			2			2			2

	American Funds^® Growth-Income		—			—			3			5			5

	American Funds^® Growth		—			4			4			4			5

	Large-Cap Value		4			5			6			6			7

	Short Duration Bond		12			9			4			2			—

	Floating Rate Loan		8			5			3			—			—

	Focused 30		—			—			1			1			2

	Growth LT		—			2			3			3			4

	Diversified Bond		15			10			6			2			—

	Mid-Cap Equity (formerly Mid-Cap Value)		3			6			8			10			11

	Large-Cap Growth		—			—			2			2			2

	International Large-Cap		3			4			4			8			9

	Small-Cap Value		—			1			1			1			1

	Main Street^® Core		3			4			4			4			5

	Emerging Markets		—			—			3			4			5

	High Yield Bond		4			3			2			—			—

	Managed Bond		21			16			11			4			—

	Inflation Managed		18			14			11			8			—

	Mid-Cap Growth		—			1			2			2			2

	Comstock		2			3			4			6			6

	Real Estate		—			—			—			2			4

	Small-Cap Equity		—			—			1			3			4



Less Volatile < ---------------------------------------------------------------- > More Volatile


where	(Y)	=	the Unit Value for that Subaccount as of the end of the preceding Business Day; and
	(Z)	=	the Net Investment Factor for that Subaccount for the period (a “valuation period”) between that Business Day and the immediately preceding Business Day.


where		(A)		=		the “per share value of the assets” of that Subaccount as of the end of that valuation period, which is equal to: a+b+c


where	(a)	=	the net asset value per share of the corresponding Portfolio shares held by that Subaccount as of the end of that valuation period;
	(b)	=	the per share amount of any dividend or capital gain distributions made by each Fund for that Portfolio during that valuation period; and
	(c)	=	any per share charge (a negative number) or credit (a positive number) for any income taxes and/or any other taxes or other amounts set aside during that valuation period as a reserve for any income and/or any other taxes which we determine to have resulted from the operations of the Subaccount or Contract, and/or any taxes attributable, directly or indirectly, to Investments;


(B)	=	the net asset value per share of the corresponding Portfolio shares held by the Subaccount as of the end of the preceding valuation period; and
(C)	=	a factor that assesses against the Subaccount net assets for each calendar day in the valuation period the basic Risk Charge plus any applicable increase in the Risk Charge and the Administrative Fee (see the CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS section in this Prospectus).


				Maximum Charge
				Percentage if
	Current Charge			Step-Up/Reset
Optional Rider	Percentage			is elected





Foundation 10		0.85	%		1.50	%




Flexible Lifetime Income (Single)		0.65	%		1.20	%




Flexible Lifetime Income (Joint)		0.85	%		1.20	%




Guaranteed Protection Advantage 3 (GPA 3)		0.45	%		1.00	%




Guaranteed Protection Advantage 5 (GPA 5)¹		0.40	%		0.75	%




Guaranteed Income Advantage Plus (GIA Plus)		0.50	%		0.50	%


¹		If you purchased the GPA 5 Rider and the Effective Date of the Rider is before May 1, 2008, the charge percentage is equal to 0.25% unless a Step-Up occurs.


	•	a surviving Joint Annuitant, or

	•	a surviving Contingent Annuitant.


	(b)	the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date.


Allowable Asset Allocation Models		Allowable Investment Options
Portfolio Optimization Model A		BlackRock Global Allocation V.I. Fund
Portfolio Optimization Model B		AllianceBernstein VPS Balanced Wealth Strategy Portfolio
Portfolio Optimization Model C		Franklin Templeton VIP Founding Funds Allocation Fund
Portfolio Optimization Model D
Portfolio Optimization Model E


	Pacific Life & Annuity Company
	P.O. Box 2829
	Omaha, Nebraska 68103-2829


	Pacific Life & Annuity Company
	P.O. Box 2736
	Omaha, Nebraska 68103-2736


PERFORMANCE
	Total Returns
	Yields
	Performance Comparisons and Benchmarks
	Power of Tax Deferral

DISTRIBUTION OF THE CONTRACTS
	Pacific Select Distributors, Inc. (PSD)

THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT
	Calculating Subaccount Unit Values
	Variable Annuity Payment Amounts
	Redemptions of Remaining Guaranteed Variable Payments Under Options 2 and 4
	Corresponding Dates
	Age and Sex of Annuitant
	Systematic Transfer Programs
	Pre-Authorized Withdrawals
	Joint Annuitants on Qualified Contracts
	More on Federal Tax Issues
	Safekeeping of Assets

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM AND INDEPENDENT AUDITORS






To receive a current copy of the Pacific Journey SAI without charge, call (800) 748-6907 or complete the following and send it to:
Pacific Life & Annuity Company Post Office Box 2829 Omaha, Nebraska 68103-2829

Name

Address

City	State	Zip


PH02/53003.29


Beginning					Protected	Protected	Remaining
of Contract	Purchase		Contract Value	Annual	Payment	Payment	Protected	Maximum
Year	Payment	Withdrawal	after Activity	Credit	Base	Amount	Balance	Credit Base


1	$100,000		$100,000	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$100,000	$200,000
Activity	$100,000		$200,000		$200,000	$10,000	$200,000	$400,000
2			$207,000	$20,000	$220,000	$11,000	$220,000	$400,000
Activity	$100,000		$307,000		$320,000	$16,000	$320,000	$500,000
3			$321,490	$30,000	$350,000	$17,500	$350,000	$500,000
4			$343,994	$30,000	$380,000	$19,000	$380,000	$500,000
5			$368,073	$30,000	$410,000	$20,500	$410,000	$500,000
6			$393,839	$30,000	$440,000	$22,000	$440,000	$500,000
7			$421,407	$30,000	$470,000	$23,500	$470,000	$500,000
8			$450,906	$30,000	$500,000	$25,000	$500,000	$500,000
9			$482,469	$0	$500,000	$25,000	$500,000	$500,000
10	Prior to Automatic Reset		$516,242	$0	$500,000	$25,000	$500,000	$500,000
10	After Automatic Reset		$516,242	$0	$516,242	$25,812	$516,242	$500,000




		End of Year	Annual	Protected	Protected Payment	Remaining
Contract Year	Withdrawal	Contract Value	Credit	Payment Base	Amount	Protected Balance


1	$5,000	$96,489	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$95,000
2	$5,000	$94,384	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$90,000
3	$5,000	$92,215	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$85,000
4	$5,000	$89,982	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$80,000
5	$5,000	$87,681	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$75,000
6	$5,000	$85,311	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$70,000
7	$5,000	$82,871	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$65,000
8	$5,000	$80,357	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$60,000
9	$5,000	$77,768	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$55,000
10	$5,000	$75,101	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$50,000
11	$5,000	$72,354	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$45,000
12	$5,000	$69,524	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$40,000
13	$5,000	$66,610	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$35,000
14	$5,000	$63,608	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$30,000
15	$5,000	$60,517	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$25,000
16	$5,000	$57,332	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$20,000
17	$5,000	$54,052	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$15,000
18	$5,000	$50,674	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$10,000
19	$5,000	$47,194	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$5,000
20	$5,000	$43,610	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$0
21	$5,000	$39,918	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$0
22	$5,000	$36,115	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$0
23	$5,000	$32,199	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$0
24	$5,000	$28,165	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$0
25	$5,000	$24,010	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$0
26	$5,000	$19,730	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$0
27	$5,000	$15,322	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$0
28	$5,000	$10,782	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$0
29	$5,000	$6,105	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$0
30	$5,000	$1,288	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$0
31	$5,000	$0	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$0
32	$5,000	$0	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$0
33	$5,000	$0	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$0
34	$5,000	$0	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$0




Beginning	Purchase			Guaranteed	Amount
of Contract	Payments	Withdrawal	Contract	Protection	added to the
Year	Received	Amount	Value	Amount	Contract Value


1	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000
Activity	$20,000		$118,119	$120,000
2			$117,374	$120,000
3			$114,439	$120,000
4			$111,578	$120,000
Activity	$10,000		$119,480	$120,000
5			$118,726	$120,000
6			$124,662	$120,000
Step-Up (New 10- Year Term Begins)			$124,662	$124,662
7			$121,546	$124,662
Activity		$10,000	$109,259	$114,209
8			$108,570	$114,209
9			$105,856	$114,209
10			$103,209	$114,209
11			$100,629	$114,209
12			$98,114	$114,209
13			$95,661	$114,209
14			$93,269	$114,209
15			$90,937	$114,209
Values at End of 15th Year			$88,664	$114,209
			$114,209	$0	$25,545